UNIT 1.

LEISURE TIME
A. Pronunciation: /u:/ and /ʊ/
I. Put the words with the underlined part into the correct column.
good school book wood moon food
foot tool cook took cartoon spoon
fool broom look too shook zoo
/u:/ /ʊ/

II. Underline the /ʊ/ sound, and double underline the /u:/ sound. Then practise reading these
sentences.
1. The book about cooking is very good.
2. The boy ate the food with a spoon.
3. They were walking in the woods and enjoying the moon.
4. Students are using the brooms to clean the schoolyard.
5. Children looked at the cartoon book when they sat on the stool in the zoo.

B. Vocabulary
• Leisure activities
I. Fill in the blanks with the correct words or phrases matching with the verbs. Maybe some verbs
can be used more than once.
knitting cycling sport in the park with friends
messages basketball cooking emails
puzzles shopping time on your own DIY
fishing computer skills building dollhouses
free time with other people making paper flowers
something about the world
1. spend _______________________________________________________________________
2. hang out _______________________________________________________________________
3. love _______________________________________________________________________
4. go _______________________________________________________________________
5. play _______________________________________________________________________
6. send _______________________________________________________________________
7. do _______________________________________________________________________
8. learn _______________________________________________________________________
II. Complete the sentences with the words given below.
knitting DIY relaxation message surfing
paper flowers creativity hanging out dollhouse puzzles
1. He spent a lot of time listening to records and just _________________ with friends.
2. Jack does the newspaper crossword _________________ every Sunday morning.
3. She is busy _________________ baby clothes.
4. A _________________ is a toy house with small furniture and sometimes dolls in it for children to
play with.
5. On the table was a vase of colorful _________________.
6. My brother is a real _________________ enthusiast; he repairs things around the house every
weekend.
7. You can _________________ several people at once - it’s very convenient.
8. Many young people spend hours _________________ the Internet.
9. I go fishing for _________________.
10. _________________ and originality are more important than technical skills.
III. Complete the text with the words below.
go swimming go go for go to beach
picnic the guitar play shopping parties
My Free Time by Lisa
I go 1 _________________ on Saturday afternoons with my friends. It’s my favourite free time activity.
And I love having 2 _________________, but my parents aren’t very keen on them.
3 4 5
I don’t _________________ the gym, but I _________________ a walk every day. I don’t
_________________ football or basketball, but I sometimes 6 _________________ bowling on Friday
evenings with my family. In the summer holidays, I enjoy going to the 7 _________________ and I 8

_________________ in the sea. It’s great. I enjoy having a 9 _________________ in the park with my
 10
friends when the weather is hot too. My ambition is to learn to play _________________ like Eric
Clapton.
IV. Complete the sentences with the activities below. Use the correct form of the verbs.
design websites do athletics go horse riding go sailing
take photos meet friends play in a band do dance lessons
1. Nick and Jack _________________. They’re guitarists and they’re really good.
2. My sister _________________ in town on Saturday afternoons. They go to the cinema or they go
shopping.
3. I’ve got my own computer and I like _________________ and writing a blog.
4. I _________________ every Saturday morning. I’m learning ballet. It’s difficult but great fun.
5. My brother _________________ at the sports stadium on Sunday mornings.
6. My cousin _________________ at the weekends. She’s got her own horse called Charlie.
7. In my free time, I love going out with my camera and _________________ of people, animals and
buildings.
8. Let’s _________________ at summer camp this year. It looks fun and there’s a beautiful lake there.
V. Complete the sentences with the activities below.
speaking English listening to music reading
acting cooking swimming
1. She likes _________________ and goes to the pool in the sports centre every day.
2. Phong is in the drama club. He likes _________________ and wants to become an actor one day.
3. Mai loves languages. She likes _________________ when she can, so she goes to classes twice a
week.
4. My brother doesn’t like _________________ books, but he likes comics and magazines.
5. My best friend likes _________________ in her bedroom every evening. Her favourite band is The
Sheep.
6. Do you like _________________? I love making new things in the kitchen.
VI. Complete the leaflet with the words below. There is one word that you do not need.
novel video games support watch hang
check bake jewelry social networking
After School is Cool
1
Do you sit at home and _________________ DVDs every afternoon? Are you fed up with playing
adventure 2 _________________ all weekend? Do you want to make new friends? At the After School
centre, we have courses and activities for everyone. New members are always welcome.
Cookery course
Learn to make soup, cook spaghetti, 3 _________________ cakes and much more. Starts at 4 pm on
Monday.
Book club
4
Read a _________________ and discuss it with your friends. We choose a different book every
week. See you at the school library at 2 pm on Tuesday.
Arts and crafts weekend
Learn to make 5 _________________ -earrings, necklaces and bracelets, Sat-Sun, 10 am.
K-festival
6 7
Come and _________________ out the new bands from the area, listen to cool music and
_________________ out with friends in the sun. Dorney Park, 15 Oct.
Help a silver surfer
8
Volunteers wanted! Can you teach an old person how to use _________________ sites and send
emails? If you have some free time on Thursday afternoon, we’d like to hear from you. Contact
info@afterschool.com for more information.
VII. Complete each gap in the dialogue with ONE appropriate word.
Phong: What do you often do 1 _________________ the weekend, Jack?
Jack: I often go to the movies 2 _________________ my friends.
Phong: How 3 _________________ do you do that?
Jack: About once a week. I also go swimming on Sunday morning.
Phong: Do you like music? Do you often 4 _________________ to music?
Jack: Yes, I often do that 5 _________________ the evening.
Phong: How about weekdays?
Jack: I’m always busy 6 _________________ the week.
Phong: Why?
7 8
Jack: I do my homework and help my parents _________________ the housework. I sometimes
_________________ TV when I have free 9 _________________. Phong, let’s go to the cafeteria and 10
_________________ a cold drink.
Phong: That’s a good idea!
VIII. Complete each gap in the text with ONE appropriate word.
A magazine survey of 13 years old show 1 _________________ American teenagers like to do in their
free time. Here are some most 2 _________________ activities.
3
Eating _________________ fast food restaurants is one of their favourite. Some young people
attend youth organizations such as 4 _________________ and guides.
Many of them learn to play a(n) 5 _________________ instrument.
Most of the young enjoy 6 _________________ shopping. Watching television is also their enjoyment.
Some like to go to the movies while others 7 _________________ to music. Several of them collect
things, such as stamps or coins. A few 8 _________________ models of things, such as cars or planes.
9
There are many volunteers who help old people _________________ their shopping or cleaning.
Now teenagers are doing more 10 _________________ service.
• Expressions about likes and dislikes
IX. Complete the sentences with the words below.
into fond keen interested about
1. I have always been very _________________ of your mother.
2. I wasn’t _________________ on going to the party.
3. I’m not particularly _________________ in art.
4. Nam is crazy _________________ football.
5. He is _________________ surfing the Internet in his free time.
• Prepositions
X. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. Dad really enjoys chatting _________________ people from other countries.
2. He’s beginning to like Japanese food, and he prefers rice _________________ potatoes.
3. Many people now rely _________________ the Internet for news.
4. Eating fast food will have an effect _________________ your health.
5. Some children have become addicted _________________ surfing the Internet.
6. My uncle writes short stories _________________ his free time.
7. You can find Tom at the hall - he often hangs _________________ there.
8. The newspaper provides a forum _________________ discussion of the topic.
9. This book is a guide _________________ Vietnamese birds.
10. We hope that there will be an increase _________________ leisure time.
11. There should be a ban _________________ talking loudly in cinemas.
12. Mai sat _________________ the computer writing an email to her penfriend.

C. Grammar
• Verbs of liking + gerunds / to-infinitives
I. Complete the sentences with the simple present form of the verbs given below.
do eat go meet ride shop study
 = like, enjoy;  = love;  = don’t like, dislike;  = hate
1. Nam _________________ his new bike. 
2. He _________________ to school on the bike. 
3. He _________________ tests. 
4. He _________________ in supermarkets. 
5. He _________________ art. 
6. He _________________ meat. 
7. He _________________ new people. 
II. Complete the sentences with the verb + -ing.
do go play ski swim watch
1. Susan loves _________________ judo.
2. They enjoy _________________ the Olympics on TV.
3. We really like _________________ in the Alps in February.
4. Sam hates _________________ boxing but he loves football.
5. I don’t like _________________ in the pool at the sports centre.
6. Do you like _________________ running in the morning?
III. Complete the conversations with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.
Mai: I 1 _________________ (not like / watch) football. I 2 _________________ (hate / stand) around
and 3 _________________ (get) cold.
Lan: Me, too. I 4 _________________ (prefer / be) indoors. I 5 _________________ (not mind / play)
football - on my computer!
Nick: Ha ha! I know your brother’s really good at football, Mai. 6 _________________ (he / like / play)
at the back?
7
Mai: Tuan? No, he _________________ (prefer / play) centre forward. He 8 _________________
(like / score) goals!
Lan: Great pass, Tuan!
Mai: Lan, do you like football?
Nick: No, but she 9 _________________ (not mind / watch) Tuan!

D. Reading
I. Read the webpage and do the tasks that follow.
Free Time
How can you make your free time really free? We’ve got the solutions to your problems.
1. _________________
Problem: I’m keen on sport, but the gym is expensive. Lewis, 12
Solution: Organize some sport in a park near your house. It’s easy! Ask your friends to come too. Take
a football, a basketball or a skateboard. Have fun!
2. _________________
Problem: I love old films, but my parents haven’t got a film channel. Martha, 13
Solution: Don’t worry! Have your own film night with some friends and a DVD. Cook a pizza and
you’ve got a fantastic night in! Have your friends got a film channel? Go to their house! Remember to
check with their parents first.
3. _________________
Problem: I’m really into good food, but I never go to restaurants. Sally, 13
Solution: Take turns to cook a meal for friends at the weekend. Choose interesting recipes and ask
your parents to buy the ingredients.
Task 1. Match 1-3 with a topic below.
films food sport
Task 2. Read the webpage again and choose the correct answers.
1. What is the aim of the text?
A. To give people ideas about how to use their free time.
B. To tell people about how to join a gym and do sport.
C. To tell people about different film channels on TV.
2. What does it say about organizing sport in the park?
A. It’s hard to organize, but cheap.
B. It’s easy to organize, but it’s expensive.
C. It isn’t difficult or expensive to organize.
3. How can you organize your own film night?
A. Buy a DVD and ask your family to watch it with you.
B. Choose a DVD and invite your friends over.
C. Choose a DVD and watch it on your own.
4. What is it a good idea to do if you want to watch a film at a friend’s house?
A. Ask their parents if it’s OK.
B. Invite a big group of friends.
C. Text your friend to say which film you’d like to watch.
5. What does the webpage suggest if you never go to restaurants?
A. Ask your parents to cook your favorite meal.
B. Ask your friends to take you to a restaurant.
C. Choose a recipe and cook a meal for your friends.
II. A new report into teenagers’ leisure time has some surprising results. Read it and fill in each
blank with the correct figure from the report.
In this digital age, many people think that young adults spend all their time on the computer. And a
new government survey of how young adults spend their leisure time says that 87 percent of people
in the UK between the ages of 13 to 19 use the Internet every day. But it’s still important for young
people to go out with friends. And the most popular evening out is going to the cinema: 42 percent
say it’s their favorite way to spend an evening.
For people who don’t go out, not surprisingly, television is more popular than radio. 82 percent say
that they watch television for more than ten hours a week - mainly for films and news programmes -
but only 23 percent listen to the radio.
Music is always a favorite topic, but it seems that many people listen to music than can play a musical
instrument. The survey reveals that 38 percent watch live music, but 30 percent of people between
13 and 19 can play a musical instrument.
Only 32 percent of young adults play sports; with football, swimming, and cycling the most popular
activities. But that means that more than two-thirds don’t play any sport!
Leisure Time Survey of Teenagers In The UK
 1 ________ percent of teenagers use the Internet every day.
 The most popular leisure activity is going to the cinema: 2 ________ percent say it is their favorite
evening activity.
 3 ________ percent of people say that they watch TV for more than 4 ________ hours a week, but
only 5 ________ percent listen to the radio.
6 7
 ________ percent of young people watch live music, but only ________ percent can play a
musical instrument.
 Only 8 ________ percent of young adults play sports. Football, swimming, and cycling are the most
popular sports.
III. Read the passage about Phong’s weekend and answer the questions.
‘On Friday’s afternoon, after school, I usually surf the Net or listen to music. In the evening I often go
to the cinema with my friends.
On Saturday morning I get up late and have breakfast. Then I play football with my classmates in the
park. In the afternoon I watch TV (usually a football match). In the evening I go to my best friend’s
place - we sometimes play computer games, or we talk.
On Sunday morning I do my homework. Then I listen to music or watch TV. On Sunday evening I surf
the Net again, or read a book.’ Phong
1. Where does Phong often go on Friday evening?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. When does he play football?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. What does he watch on Saturday afternoon?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. What does he do on Sunday morning?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. When does he surf the Net?
___________________________________________________________________________________
IV. Read the passage carefully, and then answer the questions below.
In the 1970s, skateboarding suddenly became very popular. At first, skateboarders moved slowly on
flat, smooth areas. Then they began to ride quickly. This is called ‘freestyle’ skateboarding. Soon they
were skateboarding skillfully up ramps and doing tricks in the air. This is called ‘ramp’ skateboarding.
Then they started skateboarding and doing tricks on the street. This was ‘street-style’ skateboarding -
a combination of freestyle and ramp. For this, the skateboarders needed protective clothing such as
knee and elbow pads and helmets. This allowed them to skateboard safely.
Today skateboarding is still a very popular sport, and there are lots of competitions.
Note: skateboarding (n) = môn trượt ván
1. When did skateboarding become very popular?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. What are the three styles of skateboarding?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. What was ‘street-style’ skateboarding?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. Why do ‘street-style’ skateboarders need protective clothing?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Do you think skateboarding is a very popular sport now? Why or why not?
___________________________________________________________________________________
V. Read the passage about British and American teenagers, and answer the questions.
Sport: In the UK, football, rugby, tennis and basketball are the most popular sports for teenagers. In
the USA, American football, athletics, basketball and baseball are popular.
The Internet and television: Teenagers in both the UK and the USA today watch television less than
before but they use the Internet more. They spend over 25 hours a week online.
Pocket money and shopping: The average teenager in the UK gets about £7 a week pocket money. In
the USA it is about $10. They spend their money on clothes and going out, but magazines, presents
and snacks are also important.
Friends: The average British and American teenager has seven close friends. He or she has sixteen
online friends on social network websites.
1. What sports do British and American teenagers play in their free time?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. How long do they spend online?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. How much pocket money do they get?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. What do they spend it on?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. How many online friends do they have?
___________________________________________________________________________________
VI. Read the text, and answer the questions.
How People Across the World Spend Their Free Time
 Internet
People from Canada spend, on average, 43.5 hours per week online, 8 hours longer than the next
highest, the USA. One reason: Canada has long, cold winters so people spend lots of time indoors.
 Sport
Football is king. In second place, surprisingly, it is cricket. Only a few nations play the game seriously,
but it’s very popular in India, which has 1.2 billion people.
 Outdoors
New Zealanders spend the most time outdoors. The countryside is perfect for hiking, mountain
climbing, and water sports. If you live in New Zealand, you’re never more than two hours’ drive from
the sea. And then there is the rugby, too.
 Bars
Spain has six bars per 1,000 people, easily the highest number. In Spain, a bar is for families, not just
drinkers. It’s a meeting place and often an eating place.
 Galleries and Museums
The UK has six of the top 20 most visited art galleries and museums in the world, including the
National Gallery, the British Museum and Tate Modern.
 TV
The biggest TV-watchers are in Thailand. They spend 22.4 hours a week watching TV. The second
place comes the Philippines (21 hours) and in third place, Egypt (20.9 hours), is famous for its never-
ending soap opera.
 Party
It’s impossible to say who parties the most, but Brazil’s annual carnival makes it a good choice. Some
of the best cities for partying include Bangkok (friendly people, great nightclubs), Berlin (live music
scene), and the island of Ibiza (dance music).
 Exercising
The biggest exercisers are people from Greece and Estonia. Over 80 percent of people in those
countries exercise regularly. In both countries, football and the Olympic sports are the most popular,
but Estonia has one very special game: ice cricket.
1. Who spends the most time on the internet?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. What is the world’s most popular sport?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Who spends the most time outdoors?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. Which country has the most bars per person?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Which country has the most popular galleries and museums?
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. Which nation watches the most TV?
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. Which country parties the most?
___________________________________________________________________________________
8. Who exercises the most?
___________________________________________________________________________________
VII. Read the text, and then do the following tasks.
Trapped in the Net
1. ________________________
Jenny Foxton is a secondary student, but she’s also got another life. She spends all night on the net.
Eveiy night she turns on her laptop and visits a virtual world called Habbo, where users can create
avatars, rooms and communities. Jenny’s avatar buys clothes and also furniture for her room, using
virtual money. When she isn’t buying virtual things, her avatar moves from place to place, chatting to
some of the millions of people who join Habbo in the UK.
2. ________________________
Tom Dobson’s life on the internet is different, but also very time-consuming and obsessive. At two or
three o’clock in the morning, Tom is often fighting battles with ogres on his computer. Tom hasn’t
slept. His mother made him a sandwich seven hours ago, but he hasn’t eaten it. He’s one of eleven
million people who play World of Warcraft online. His battle continues ...
3. ________________________
It can be cool to blog, chat, or play games online, but when you’ve been on the internet forty eight
hours non-stop, or more than a hundred hours a week, your idea of reality changes. This can happen
to real addicts, who often feel tired, depressed, and isolated. Most people use the internet sensibly,
but between five and ten per cent of internet users are addicted to the web and psychologists now
recognize this as a problem.
4. ________________________
Internet addiction has ruined people’s education, relationships and careers. It’s now one of the main
reasons why university students fail. If you spend more time online than offline, maybe it’s time to
come back to real life and find some help. There are clinics, advice and cures if you’ve got a problem.
And a lot of them are online, of course.
Task 1. Match the headings a-e with the paragraphs 1-4. There is one heading that you do not need.
a. Online Gamer
b. Do Something about It
c. Stolen Identity
d. A New Identity
e. Serious Symptoms
Task 2. Complete the summary of the text with six of the words given below.
play games messages psychologists internet
chat rooms real virtual online
This text describes two people’s experience of the 1 __________________. Jenny spends time in a 2
__________________ community while Tom 3 __________________ online. These days some people
spend more time in 4 __________________ and on game sites than with their 5 __________________
friends. It’s a problem which 6 __________________ have now identified and which they can treat.
Task 3. Find the nouns in the text that go with these verbs.
Example: turn on - laptop
1. fight 2. use 3. play
4. recognize 5. ruin 6. spend
VIII. Read the text, and do the following tasks.
 Teen Second Life
Jan Hofinan has never scored less than 80% in an English test and his spoken English is amazing. But
Jan doesn’t have extra English classes at school and he doesn’t read an English dictionary. In fact, Jan
spends at least three hours a day playing a game online. What’s his secret? Why is Jan so brilliant at
English? His secret is TSL - Teen Second Life.
TSL is a virtual world for thirteen to seventeen-year-olds and it’s free to join. In TSL, teenagers from
around the world have their own avatar. Avatars can go shopping and spend money - ‘Linden dollars’ -
in the shops. They can make friends and play sports. They can even join a band and play music!
How has TSL helped Jan Hofman to improve his English? ‘There are a lot of places in TSL where you
can improve your English,’ explains Jan. ‘The British Council has got a special island in TSL and I’ve
spent most of my time there. They don’t give English lessons, but there are games and competitions
in English. I also like the Global Kids Island, where I learn a lot about social and world problems, all in
English. The best thing about TSL is simply chatting. I love messaging players from other countries. I
think anyone who wants to practise their English should log on to TSL!’
Task 1. Choose the correct answers.
1. Jan Hofman’s English is __________________.
a. very good b. OK c. really bad
2. Jan Hofman __________________.
a. reads dictionaries b. has extra English lessons c. plays a game online
3. TSL is __________________.
a. a school b. a dictionary c. a game
4. TSL has helped Jan to __________________.
a. practise English b. learn about England c. spend money
5. Jan enters competitions on the __________________ island.
a. British Council’s b. Global Kids c. Linden
6. TSL is a good place to __________________.
a. play computer games b. communicate in English c. discuss the world’s problems
Task 2. Answer the questions. Write complete sentences.
1. Does Jan spend a long time online?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. How much does it cost to join TSL?
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. Who can join TSL?
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. What can avatars do in TSL?
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. What does Jan do on the Global Kids island?
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. What has Jan enjoyed most about TSL?
__________________________________________________________________________________
7. Who does Jan chat with?
__________________________________________________________________________________
Task 3. Finds the words in the text and match them with their meanings.
1. score _________ a. very good
2. brilliant _________ b. about society
3. social _________ c. to get better at something
4. avatar _________ d. to get points
5. improve _________ e. online character

E. Speaking
• Everyday English
I. Choose the correct response. Then practise the short exchanges in pairs.
1. A: Do you want to join us to play badminton B: a/ Do you like badminton?
tomorrow morning? b/ I love to. What time?
2. A: Would you like to watch the new film at B: a/ Where’s the cinema?
 the Galaxy Cinema? b/ Oh, it’s not my cup of tea.
3. A: Yoga is good for both our body and mind. B: a/ I can’t agree more.
Right? b/ It originates in India, doesn’t it?
4. A: We should do exercise and play sports. B: a/ But you shouldn’t push your body too
much. b/ And we shouldn’t stop our body at any
time.
5. A: Doing exercise regularly is good. B: a/ Certainly. We should put it in our daily
routines.
b/ OK. But you need a lot of equipment.
6. A: Shouldn’t we play computer games at all? B: a/ Yes. We have a lot of homework to do.
b/ Not really, playing them a bit can train our
minds.
7. A: ‘You watch TV and eat popcorn a lot, son.’ B: a/ ‘Can you get the tickets for the cinema?
b/ ‘OK, Mum. My eyes feel tired now.’
8. A: Practising karate is not for teenagers. B: a/ I don’t think so. We do it with a trainer.
b/ It’s a competitive sport, isn’t it?
9. A: We can make a lot of friends on social B: a/ But we should be careful.
networks. b/ I have some pen pals.
10. A: I sometimes listen to English songs in my B: a/ Great. You can improve your English.
free time. b/ You should buy some new CDs.
• Talking about leisure activities with family
II. Complete the sentences about leisure activities with your family with the phrases below.
A. playing instruments, or a new language
B. to make your brain sharper
C. have better understanding of nature
D. to keep fit and have good mental health
E. learn to cook
F. watch informative and productive programmes
G. to gain knowledge
H. try to get rid of them by working on them
1. Read good books, newspapers, magazines ________________________________.
2. Do exercise, yoga ________________________________.
3. Identify your weaknesses and ________________________________.
4. Learn some new skills like ________________________________.
5. on YouTube or on TV ________________________________.
6. Spend more time with nature, do gardening and ________________________________.
7. new tasty dishes ________________________________.
8. Try some indoor games like chess, playing cards ________________________________.
III. Match the questions to the answers below. There is one extra answer that you do not need.
A. We practised in Paul’s house, but his neighbour said that it was so noisy. Now we are practising in
the garden.
B. I usually relax in front of the TV for an hour. Sometimes, instead of watching TV, I read news on the
Internet, and about once a week, I send emails to my relatives in England.
C. I’m sending an email to my uncle in England.
D. Oh, yes. I enjoy playing the piano and the drums, but my favourite musical instrument is the guitar.
I play the guitar in a group at weekends.
E. I often go to the school clubs with my friends.
F. I like to spend most of my free time at home. You see, I’m tired after school.
A Hi, Jack. What are you doing?
B 1 _______________________________________________________________________________
A Well, where do you often spend your free time?
B 2 _______________________________________________________________________________
A What do you often do in your free time?
B 3 _______________________________________________________________________________
A Do you have any hobbies and something else interesting?
B 4 _______________________________________________________________________________
A Oh, you’re very musical. Where do your group practise music?
B 5 _______________________________________________________________________________
IV. Match the questions to the answers below.
A. Oh, yes. Sometimes we fight cats and dogs, but in the end, we are good friends and good sisters.
B. I have a nuclear family, my parents, my younger sister and I.
C. We read books together and watch films or web series.
D. When I don’t feel good, she is always beside to encourage me.
E. It’s my sister - she’s a thoughtful and very friendly girl.
F. We share our interests with each other, and good or bad experiences.
A Who do you live with?
B 1 _______________________________________________________________________________
A Who do you spend most of your free time with?
B 2 _______________________________________________________________________________
A What do two of you do in your free time?
B 3 _______________________________________________________________________________
A Have you two ever had arguments?
B 4 _______________________________________________________________________________
A What activities do both of you often do in the free time?
B 5 _______________________________________________________________________________
A In what way can your sister help you?
B 6 _______________________________________________________________________________
• Inviting and accepting invitations
V. Order the sentences to make a suitable dialogue.
_________ A: That would be great. See you later then.
_________ B: OK, Bye
_________ C: I’m going to see a new fantasy film with some friends tomorrow. Do you fancy coming?
_________ D: I’m not sure. I’ll text you, OK?
_________ E: I’d love to. What time?
VI. Put the dialogue in the correct order. Number the sentences.
_________ Jack: Yes, it’s fantastic. I’m going there tomorrow. Do you fancy coming?
_________ Mai: All right. See you tomorrow then. Bye!
_________ Jack: Hi, Mai. I haven’t seen you for a while. How are things?
_________ Mai: No, I haven’t. But I’ve heard it’s brilliant.
_________ Jack: Nine o’clock, I think. But I’ll text you later, OK?
_________ Mai: Yes, I’d love to. That would be great. What time?
_________ Jack: Fine, thanks. Have you been to that new sports centre yet?
_________ Mai: Not bad. How are you?
F. Writing
• Writing an email about leisure activities with friends
Write an email to a penfriend to tell him / her about what you usually do with your friends in your
free time, using the form and the cues below.
- a lot of things / I / do / my friends
- go / the cinemas / watch films / weekends
- go / long walks / or / exercise together
- host / a games night / or / play games / online
- also make dinner together / each / bring / a dish
- volunteer / or / attend / a class / a course together
Hi Ann,
It’s nice to hear from you again.
Let me tell you about what I do in my free time.
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
 TEST (UNIT 1)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. school B. food C. foot D. fool
2. A. good B. wood C. shook D. zoo
3. A. spoon B. took C. could D. wood
4. A. food B. door C. cartoon D. broom
5. A. wood B. look C. shook D. poor
II. Complete the sentences with the words given.
surfing memories messaged knitted improved
make friends hang out cycling relaxation puzzles
6. My grandmother ______________ some gloves for me.
7. I used to ______________ with them when I was at primary school.
8. He sits on a bench, re-reads the morning newspaper, and tries to do the crossword
______________ in his head.
9. We like to go ______________ at weekends.
10. Nam ______________ me the news about the geography field trip.
11. I was ______________ the Internet looking for information on classical music.
12. He goes hill-walking for ______________.
13. The photos bring back lots of good ______________.
14. The event has ______________ both her mental and physical health.
15. Jack finds it hard to ______________ with other children in the new school.
III. Complete the sentences with the correct prepositions.
16. He is particularly keen ______________ football.
17. We have grown fond ______________ the house and don’t want to leave.
18. All she is interested ______________ is clothes.
19. Both my uncles are crazy ______________ old motorcycles.
20. I’m really ______________ folk music - I always listen to it in my free time.
21. He did it ______________ his own - all his friends were busy.
22. I’ve never mastered the art ______________ making paper flowers.
23. What do you like to do ______________ your free time?
IV. Jack and Tina talk about their leisure activities. Complete what they say with the verbs below in
the correct simple present form. Some verbs may be used more than once.
listen to watch go go out play use
24
Jack: My computer is very important to me. I’m a student at Manchester University, so I the
25
Internet a lot for my studies and my friends and I ______________ a lot of computer games. I don’t
26 27
______________ any sport. I ______________ to evening classes twice a week; it’s a course on
Computer Skills. On other nights, I 28 ______________ with friends - we usually 29 ______________ to
the cinema.
30
Tina: I’m an amateur musician, so music is my life! I ______________ the radio nearly all day -
31 32
mainly classical or jazz. When I ______________ TV, it’s always a music channel. I even
______________ music when I 33 ______________ to the gym! I 34 ______________ the piano and the
saxophone. And I 35 ______________ a lot of live music in my free time.
V. Complete the sentences in Mai’s e-mail with the correct form of the verb in brackets.
Hi Susan!
36
Well, I’m here in Ha Noi, now. I see quite a lot of my cousin Hoa because we ______________
(enjoy / do) the same things. I have some new friends called David and John. David is very good at
computers and he 37 ______________ (not mind I help) me so that’s good. John is really nice too. He 38
______________ (play) basketball and he 39 ______________ (go / skateboard) quite a lot. His brother
40
Toby is 18 and he’s really cool but he ______________ (prefer / play) football. I 41 ______________
42
(do) gymnastics once a week and Hoa ______________ (do) karate. She prefers indoor sports
because she 43 ______________ (not like / get) cold! Write soon!
Love, Mai
VI. Read the conversation and put the sentences (A-F) in the correct places (44-48). There is one
extra question.
A. Who’s she?
B. Not just a name on a computer screen.
C. Does she live near here?
D. Do you fancy coming with us?
E. Are you there?
F. How do you know her?
44
Mai: Hi, Susan. I’m going out with Hoa and Lan this evening. ______________ We’re going to have
something to eat and then go to the cinema.
Susan: I can’t. I’m going to chat with Linda.
Mai: 45 _____________________________________
Susan: She’s my best friend. You don’t know her.
Mai: 46 _____________________________________
Susan: We chat online. She’s great.
Mai: 47 _____________________________________
Susan: No. She’s from Scotland. I really like her; we chat all the time.
Mai: Come on, Susan. She’s not your real friend. Let’s go and have a drink and a cake.
Susan: I’m not hungry. Anyway, I want to go to the Internet café. Linda might be online.
48
Mai: Well, I’m going to meet Hoa and Lan in the canteen. You know, real people you can talk to.
_____________________________________
VII. Read the review of a video game. Put the comments in the correct order (49-54).
_________ A. What happens in the game
_________ B. The kind of game
_________ C. The name of the game
_________ D. What features it has
_________ E. The price
_________ F. Problems with the game
By SimsFan
I love “The Sims”! It’s a strategy game and you control the lives of cartoon characters – the “Sims”.
You help them work, play, shop and do things in their houses. I bought the first Sims when I was
thirteen and I played it every day. This new version is much better - it has got amazing graphics, lots of
new and fun characters and incredible music. But it does crash sometimes.  It’s not a cheap game
(£19.99), but it is great fun!
VIII. Read the article and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).
 So Strange! People Have Strange Hobbies
Mr. and Mrs. Ball live in Oxford. They collect garden gnomes. They have 225 in their garden! The
gnomes are all different colours and come from different countries.
Today, Mr. and Mrs. Ball are preparing a big garden party for their gnomes. They are putting lanterns
on the trees and decorating the garden with colourful balloons. “We’re writing 225 invitations and we
are putting up little tables and chairs for the gnomes,” Mrs. Ball says. “It’s a lot of work, but it’s fun.”
Note:
- (garden) gnome (n) = tượng thần lùn giữ của
55. Mr. and Mrs. Ball come from England. _________
56. They collect garden plants. _________
57. There are a lot of gnomes in Mr. and Mrs. Ball’s garden. _________
58. The gnomes are all from the UK. _________
59. The gnomes are not very colourful. _________
60. Mr. and Mrs. Ball have had a party. _________
61. Mr. and Mrs. Ball will invite all their gnomes to the party. _________
62. Mr. and Mrs. Ball hope that the party will be enjoyable. _________
IX. Read the passage carefully, and do the tasks that follow.
Task 1. Match the headings (A-E) to the paragraphs (63-67).
A. No computers for two days.
B. Never again!
C. Homework wasn’t as easy.
D. I used my phone more.
E. I didn’t want to listen to them talking!
No computer day! How did you survive?
63. _________ Ben, Luton, UK
It was very difficult. I had quite a lot of homework to do. Usually, I use the computer to find
information and I write my essay on it. My dad has lots of books, atlases and reference books, but
almost all of them are out of date! It wasn’t difficult to find information, but it took more time.
64. _________ Jenny, Des Moines, USA
I didn’t have email contact with my friends. I hate it! I sent a lot of texts. A few of my friends also
turned off their computers, but most of them didn’t. On Sunday, there were lots of emails to read.
65. _________ David, Los Angeles, USA
I usually listen to sports on the Internet on Saturdays. I can listen to baseball from anywhere in the
USA or football from Europe. I listened to my mum’s small kitchen radio. It was awful. There was no
football at all. I won’t join in the next “no computer” day!
66. _________ Sara, Richmond, UK
My main problem was music. The batteries in my MP3 player were flat. I don’t have a DVD player -
only on my computer - so I listened to the radio. It wasn’t very good. A few DJs are OK, but most of
them talk too much.
67. _________ Lisa, Swansea, Wales
I read a lot. My mum has some good books. It was very relaxing. Usually, my eyes hurt in the evening.
Last Saturday, they were fine. I went to bed earlier, too. The next day, I didn’t turn on my computer at
all. I wanted to finish my book.
Task 2. Match the words / phrases (68-72) with their meanings (F-J). Write the answer in each blank.
68. survive (v) _________ A. a device giving electricity
69. atlas (n) _________ B. continue to live
70. out of date (adj) _________ C. a book of maps
71. battery (n) _________ D. not working
72. flat (adj) _________ E. no longer used
X. Write an email to a penfriend to tell him / her about what you usually do with your friends in
your free time, using the form and the cues below.
73. many fun things / do with friends / our free time / without / spend / much time
74. one / great things / you can do / have fun / friends / to go to a park / You / organise / a picnic
/spend / some time / nature
75. we / watch people / and / enjoy / friendly talks / our friends
76. at the local park / we / also bring along / a ball / play football / or / a shuttlecock and a net / play
badminton
77. besides sports / camping / also / a cheap and fun hobby / you / enjoy / friends / You / share
stories / around / campfire / and / build strong relationships
78. you / hang out / and / play/ all sorts / board games / large groups or small ones / You / hold /
tournament / and / compete against each other
79. you / go / the school club / friends / share /same passions / you
80. this / a great reason / organise monthly gatherings / learn new things / and / make / friendship /
last
Hi Jack,
It’s nice to hear from you again.
Let me tell you about what I do in my free time.
73. _______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
74. _______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
75. _______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
76. _______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
77. _______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
78. _______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
79. _______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
80. _______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
 UNIT 2.
LIFE IN THE COUNTRYSIDE
A. Pronunciation: /ə/ and /ɪ/
I. Put the words with the underlined part into the correct column.
fish milk combine hospitable orchard picturesque
detest speciality kit message balance bracelet
resort origami desert expect security listen
/ə/ /ɪ/

II. Underline the /ə/ sound, and double underline the /ɪ/ sound. Then practise reading these
sentences.
1. A good film is on at the cinema now.
2. Is it going to rain in the morning?
3. It was such a good film.
4. The kids should eat a lot of fish, vegetables, and drink milk.
5. We expect to spend our holiday at the resort.
6. He picked up the letter and went to the post office.
7. Many visitors come to the village because of its historical values.
8. My family lives in a village which is picturesque with vast fields stretching long distances.

B. Vocabulary
• Life in the countryside
I. Fill in the blanks with the correct words or phrases matching with the verbs. Some verbs may be
used more than once.
fields animals fish bags COW’S
boats rabbit luggage snow babies
goats pets ships pigs mice
 truck ducks cats robbers flu
1. unload ___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. plough ___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. milk _____________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. feed _____________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. catch ____________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
II. Match each word with the definition, write the answer in each blank.
1. cattle ________ A. food made from milk, such as butter, cheese, etc.
2. a combine harvester ________ B. tasks such as cleaning, washing, ironing... that have to
be done regularly at home
3. pasture ________ C. a field planted with rice growing in water
4. home-made ________ D. an area with mountains or hills
5. a paddy field ________ E. a large farm machine that both cuts a crop and also
separate the grains from the rest of the plant
6. household chores ________ F. male and female cows on a farm
7. countryside ________ G. the way that you live
8. lifestyle ________ H. made at home
9. dairy products ________ I. a field or land covered with grass, where cattle can feed
10. highland ________ J. land which is away from towns and cities
III. Fill in each blank with the correct word below.
fide grassland cattle loaded kites
bamboo dance vast harvest convenient buffalo
1. Several people were flying ______________ on the field.
2. Russia is a ______________ country with a lot of natural resources.
3. My brother is learning to ______________ a horse at the moment.
4. Despite its size, the ______________ is a very fast animal and can run up to thirty-five miles per
hour.
5. They ______________ the buffalo-drawn cart with hay.
6. Farmers always need extra help with the ______________.
7. Local people are turning ______________ into farmland.
8. Under the stilt house, beside the stream, the sounds of the ______________ still ring when friends
far away can find.
9. Is it ______________ to meet you at the moment?
10. My uncle raises a herd of ______________ on his farm.
IV. Fill in each blank with the appropriate form of the word in brackets.
1. Iceland is considered the most _____________ country in the world. (peace)
2. We should use expensive tractors and combine _____________ on large farms. (harvest)
3. My brother has been a stamp _____________ for several years. (collect)
4. It is a(n) _____________ place to hold a picnic because it is too far from the road. (convenience)
5. Drinking water in some areas may be _____________, and you can’t drink it. (safe)
6. During my stay in the village, local farmers were very _____________ to me. (friend)
7. Encouraging children to eat and drink _____________ is very important. (health)
8. Local people in the village often wear their _____________ costumes during the festivals.
(tradition)
9. Please give _____________ to that charity to help the homeless after the flood. (generous)
10. The baby slept very _____________ because the bed was really comfortable. (sound)
• Prepositions
V. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. She has been playing the piano ________ a very early age.
2. The gas price dropped ________ 50 percent this year.
3. Our office can provide busy managers ________ all the information they need.
4. Susan sat on a chair close ________ the window.
5. After less than a week away, he began to have feelings ________ homesickness.
6. I’ve got a parcel to collect ________ the post office.
7. We’re thinking of going ________ a trip ________ the mountains.
8. Jane loaded all the groceries ________ the car.
9. He wants to spend more time ________ his family.
10. We went for a walk ________ the river.

C. Grammar
• Comparative forms of adverbs
I. Complete the sentences with the comparative forms of the adverbs in brackets.
1. Jane cooks _____________ than Sue. (well)
2. Daisy walks _____________ than Alice. (fast)
3. Rob dances _____________ than Peter. (energetically)
4. Alice works _____________ than Carole. (hard)
5. Paul speaks _____________ than David. (clearly)
6. My aunt drives _____________ than my mum. (carefully)
II. Complete the sentences using the correct form of the words in brackets. Add than where
necessary.
1. I think I work _____________ Jack does. (hard)
2. We finished the job a lot _____________ we’d expected. (quickly)
3. She always arrives at work much _____________ anyone else. (early)
4. The children are behaving _____________ they usually do. (badly)
5. Of all the animals in the world, the tortoise lives _____________ humans. (long)
6. Our new system works _____________ our old one did. (efficiently)
7. He speaks English _____________ his sister. (fluently)
8. They usually play football much _____________ they did last night. (well)
9. Mai is studying a lot _____________ usual now that her exams are getting closer. (hard)
10. The car went _____________ and _____________ down the hill. (fast)
III. Complete the sentences with suitable forms of the adverbs given in the brackets.
1. I am a faster worker than Tom is. (fast)
 I work.
2. Mai’s singing is more beautiful than Mi’s. (beautifully)
 Mai sings.
3. We were earlier at the party than the Smiths last night. (early)
 We arrived.
4. Phong’s voice is louder than Nick’s. (loudly)
 Phong speaks.
5. My English is more fluent than my sister’s. (fluently)
 I speak English.

D. Reading
I. Complete the text with the words given.
carpet from peaceful path however
often flowers for water fresh
My village is about 10 kilometers 1 _____________ Da Lat. It is a very beautiful and 2 _____________
place where people grow 3 _____________ and vegetables only. It is very famous 4 _____________ its
pretty roses and beautiful landscapes. The air is quite fresh, 5 _____________, the smell of the roses
6
makes people feel cool. In spring, my village looks like a _____________ with plenty of colours.
Tourists come to visit it so 7 _____________. Nowadays, with electricity, it doesn’t take the villagers
8 9
much time to _____________the roses. And even at night, people can walk along the
_____________ and enjoy the 10 _____________smell of the flowers.
II. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage.
Living in the country is something that people from the city often dream about. However, in reality, it
has both advantages and disadvantages.
There are certainly many advantages to living in the country. First, you can enjoy peace and quietness.
Moreover, people tend to be friendlier. A further advantage is that there is less traffic, so it is safer for
young children.
However, there are certain disadvantages or drawbacks to life outside the city.. First, because there
are fewer people, you are likely to have few friends. In addition, entertainment is difficult to find,
particularly in the evening. Furthermore, the fact that there are fewer shops and services means that
it is hard to find jobs.
In short, it can be seen that the country is more suitable for some people than others. On the whole,
it is often the best for those who are retired or who have young children. In contrast, young people
who have a career are better provided in the city.
1. According to the passage, living in the country has _____________.
A. only good points B. only bad points
C. both good and bad points D. no disadvantages
2. How many advantages does living in the country have?
A. Two B. Three C. Four D. No
3. Living in the country is safer for young children because _____________.
A. there is less traffic B. there are few shops
C. there are fewer people D. there are few services
4. Which of the following statements is NOT true according to the passage?
A. People in the country tend to be friendlier than people in the city.
B. It's hard to find entertainment in the country.
C. There are fewer shops and services in the country.
D. The country is only suitable for retired people.
5. I laving few friends is _____________.
A. one of drawbacks to life in the country
B. the only disadvantage to living in the country
C. one of certain drawbacks to life outside the city
D. one of certain advantages to life outside the city
III. Fill in each blank with ONE suitable word.
The country is 1 _____________ beautiful than a town and pleasant to live in. Many people think so,
and go to the country 2 _____________ the summer holiday although they can't live 3 _____________
all the year round. Some have a cottage built in a village 4 that they can go there whenever they 5 find
the time.
English villages are not all alike, but 6 _____________ some ways they are not very different from 7

_____________ other. Almost every village 8 _____________ a church, the round or square tower of
9
which can _____________ seen from many miles around. Surrounding the church is the church
yard, 10 _____________ people are buried.
IV. Read the text and choose the correct answer.
My First Visit to the City by Phil Jenkins
I’ve just returned from spending a week in the city with my cousin, Jed. I live with my parents and
sister in a small country village, so it was interesting to go and find out about city life.
The first thing I noticed was the cost of everything. Cities are really expensive, and we spent loads
when we ate out in a café. Every day, we went into the city centre, but because Jed lives a 30- minute
train ride out of town, it was easier to stay in the city than go back to eat. Luckily, Jed knew some
cheaper takeaway places that did stuff like salads and vegetable soups. They’re not things I’d usually
choose - burgers are more my thing - but I tried a lot of new things and I found quite a few vegetables
and things that I actually liked - Mum will be pleased, I’m sure!
I missed the peace and quiet of the countryside a little, though the city traffic didn’t bother me. I saw
some amazing fast cars I’ve never seen in the countryside. I soon got used to being among all the
people, too. City life’s got a real buzz about it. I met all Jed’s friends and noticed that they were
wearing expensive clothes with logos. At first, I felt a bit uncomfortable in my own stuff-just old jeans
and shirts I wear round the farm - but then my cousin lent me these really stylish trainers which made
me feel like I fitted in with the crowd a bit better. But it didn’t really matter. I saw all kinds of people
wearing all kinds of things and I liked the fact that in the city you can wear whatever you want.
After a few days, I started to run out of money, so we had to find other things to do rather than
shopping or eating out. I was amazed by how many free or cheap things there are to do in a city. For
example, one lunchtime we walked into a museum where a really cool band was playing. You’d never
get that in our little village museum! There were loads of other things I didn’t get to do in the city -
but that just means there’s more for next time.
Before I went to the city, I’d always thought of myself as a country boy. I love going out riding, helping
on my dad’s farm and having an outdoor life. Now I’ve seen what else is available, I might want to
spend more of my time in the city. I guess the ideal thing would be to get a fiat and work in the city
when I’m old enough, but escape to the country at the weekend. Then I’d get the best of both worlds
- I can’t wait!
1. What is the main point of the text?
A. to give advice about things to do in the city
B. to describe someone’s feelings about an experience
C. to warn readers about how expensive city living is
D. to compare living in the city with the countryside
2. What does Phil say about eating in the city?
A. They had burgers and other fast food.
B. They bought a range of healthy foods.
C. They wanted to eat in expensive restaurants.
D. They preferred taking the train home for lunch.
3. During his time in the city, Phil felt _____________.
A. nervous about meeting new people
B. annoyed by all the traffic noise
C. embarrassed about his sense of style
D. bothered by the crowds
4. How does Phil feel about the city?
A. surprised by the range of things there was to do there
B. excited about going back to visit as soon as he can
C. unsure about whether he wants to live there
D. disappointed that he didn’t get to see anything
5. What email would Phil send to his cousin Jed?
A. I really enjoyed staying with you, but I definitely prefer being in the countryside.
B. You never know, one day I might come and live in the city - maybe we could share anapartment!
C. I haven’t made up my mind whether I prefer the city or the country, but I had a brilliant time with
you!
D. I found the city a bit scary, so I’m really glad I had you to show me around!

E. Speaking
• Everyday English
I. Choose the correct response. Then practise the short exchanges in pairs.
1. A: I think life in the countryside is boring. B: a/I don’t think so. You can play games and
enjoy the community activities.
b/ Right. Life is so peaceful and relaxing
2. A: I don’t want to live in an earthen house. B: a/ People used to live in it.
b/ It’s very cool in summer. You know?
3. A: Why do some people lead a nomadic life? B: a/ They can ride their horses every day.
b/ They have to raise their animals.
4. A: How about watching a paddy field? B: a/ Good. It makes us feel relaxed.
b/ There’s a full moon tonight.
5. A: Is the water buffalo useful to fanners? B: a/ People only use tractors now.
b/ It can be used to plough the fields.
6. A: Do you think the nomadic life is good for B: a/ No, it’s not good for their schooling.
children? b/ Of course not. They can learn to ride a horse.
7. A: Children in the countryside can’t get good B: a/ Not really. There are good schools and
education.
 teachers like in the city.
b/ Oh, no. They can enjoy a peaceful life and
have no worry at all.
8. A: What are you going to do in your summer B: a/ We enjoy the fresh air and the peace.
holidays in the countryside? b/ We help our grandparents to pick fruits.
9. A: What do people often do in the evening? B: a/ They can have more fun and learn more
about different places.
b/ They watch TV and relax for the coming day.
10. A: What do people often do at the B: a/ They watch TV with their family members.
community hall at the weekend? b/ They chat about their family and work
• Talking about the village or town where someone lives
II. Use the notes below to talk about the ancient villages. Student A chooses Phuoc Tich, and
student B chooses Tuy Loan.
Name Phuoc Tich Tuy Loan
Location on the boundary between the two about 15 km southwest of Da Nang,
provinces of Thua Thien- Hue and in Hoa Phong Commune, Hoa Vang
Quang Tri, Central Viet Nam, more District
than 40 km from Hue City
Scenery many shady roads and gardens full beautiful scenery and the unique
of lush trees; very clean characteristics of a Vietnamese rural
everywhere, from the roads to the village
gardens, alleys to temples
How people live famous for its pottery making; only eco-tourism
live by making pottery; its ceramic
products are famous for their
durability and their unique style
and colours
Special features more than 100 ‘nha ruong’ in the the village communal house - 1889;
village, including 37 houses of over an area of over 110 m2 and has brick
100 years; a great cultural value for walls and a pantile roof; a traditional
the typical architecture of Hue festival - held annually from the 9th to
 the 10th day of the 1st lunar month at
the communal house to pray for
peace and prosperity throughout the
year; folk games and traditional
competitions such as ‘bai choi’, tug
of war, catching eels, and interesting
boat races
Student A
I would like to talk about the ancient village of Phuoc Tich, in Thua Thien-Hue
It’s on
______________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Student B
I would like to introduce to you Tuy Loan ancient village in Da Nang.
It is located _________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
III. Talk about Long Tuyen ancient village in Can Tho, using the cues below.
Long Tuyen Ancient Village in Can Tho
- located about 5 km from Can Tho City
 - a destination / attracts many tourists in Viet Nam / its beautiful scenery, and the cultural
relics that remains after hundreds of years
- the largest fruit growing area in Can Tho / several specialities
- become a green belt / high-tech urban agriculture and eco-tourism / dozens of busy
homestay spots
- many famous tourist attractions / domestic and foreign visitors / Binh Thuy Temple, Binh
Thuy Old House, Nam Nha Pagoda and the annual Ky Yen Festival
I would like to talk about Long Tuyen ancient village in Can Tho.
It is located _________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
• Giving and responding to compliments
IV. Choose the correct responses.
1. “Well, it’s been nice talking to you.” - “_________________”
A. Yes, nice to have met you too. B. Oh, yes. I’m afraid so.
C. Nice to meet you, too. D. Have you been here long?
2. “It was very kind of you to help me out, Paul” - “_________________”
A. I’m glad you like it. B. Thanks a million.
C. That was the least I could do. D. You can say that again.
3. “It is very kind of you to invite us to your party.” - “_________________”
A. No, thanks. B. Good idea, thanks.
C. OK. That’s great. D. It’s my pleasure.
4. “You look great in the new dress.” - “_________________”
A. That’s fine. Thank you. B. Yours is lovely, too.
C. You are welcome. D. Of course not. You bet!
5. Diana: “I didn’t know you could play the guitar so well. Your tune was lovely! - Peter:
“___________”
A. You’re welcome.
B. I bought it near my house.
C. You must be kidding. I thought it was terrible.
D. You told a kid. I was playing better than that.
6. Ann: How well you are playing, Peter! - Peter: “_________________”
A. Say it again. I like to hear your words. B. Thank you too much.
C. I think so. I’m proud of myself. D. Many thanks. That’s a nice compliment.
7. “How lovely your pets are!” - “_________________”
A. Thank you. It’s nice of you to say so. B. Really? They are always very nice.
C. Can you say that again? D. I love them, too.
8. Daisy: “What an attractive hair style you have got, Mary!” - Mary: “_________________”
A. Thank you very much. I’m afraid. B. You’re telling a lie.
C. Thank you for your compliment! D. I don’t like your sayings.
9. Ann: “How well you are playing, Peter!” - Peter: “_________________”
A. Say it again. I like to hear your words. B. Thank you too much.
C. Many thanks, that’s a nice compliment. D. I think so. I’m too proud of myself.
10. A: "Your parents must be proud of your result at school." - B: “_________________”
A. Sorry to hear that. B. I am glad you like it.
C. Thanks. It's certainly encouraging. D. Of course.
11. Diana: “The reference book you lent me last week is so helpful for my science report, Ann.” - Ann:
“_________________”
A. Keep your nose out of my business. B. Well, mind your words.
C. I’m happy to hear that. D. You can’t believe it.
12. Ms. Hoa: “You did a really good job on your mid-term test. Keep going.” - Nick: “_____________”
A. I knew it. Thank you, my teacher. B. Thank you for your compliment.
C. Yes, it was sure for me to do so. D. Thanks a lot. I owe you one.

F. Writing
I. Read the following statements, tick () the benefits and cross () the drawbacks of life in the
countryside.
1. You have to learn a lot of new things about agriculture, and you rarely get professional help.
_______
2. People have to travel a long distance from place to place. _______
3. People in the countryside live longer because of a healthier environment. _______
4. The public transportation system is not good in the countryside, so you have to use a private means
of transportation like a bike or a motorbike. _______
5. The living costs and the costs of houses are lower than those in the city. _______
6. Children have a larger space to play. _______
7. For higher education, students have to move to the city. _______
8. You can grow organic food and sell it in big supermarkets. _______
9. Hospitals in the village do not have modem facilities. _______
10. The pace of life is much slower than the city, so there is less stress. _______
II. Write the benefits of living in the countryside, using the words or phrases below.
Benefits of Living in the Countryside
Space
1. homes / the countryside / larger / streets / emptier / and / the air / fresher
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Nature
2. live closer / nature / and / you / often have outdoor activities / fishing, camping, hiking or climbing
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Cleaner air
3. less traffic / the road / so / air quality / better / moreover / a lot of trees and grass / improve quality
of the air / too
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Cheaper cost of living
4. all things / groceries or products / cheaper / You / also grow / own vegetables
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Lower stress
5. it / because of living near nature / there / less noise, cheaper cost of living, and cleaner air
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
III. Write about the disadvantages of living in a village, using the words or phrases below.
Disadvantages of Living in a Village
1. big cities / all kinds of entertainment / but / the countryside / you / not find / all of these activities
there
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. a village / not have good schools, colleges or universities / therefore / students / move / a city /
further education
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. difficult / young people / have opportunities to develop their careers / or / work I big companies
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. lack / health facilities / one of the major issue / When I have serious health problems / you / go to
the city / get medical treatment
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. it / a lot of time / travel from one place to another / and sometimes / you / leave hours earlier / get
/ a place on time
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST (UNIT 2)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. catch B. cattle C. harvest D. paddy
2. A. picturesque B. herd C. ferry D. stretch
3. A. combine B. hospitable C. crop D. province
4. A. milk B. lighthouse C. kite D. nice
5. A. although B. plough C. neighbour D. laugh
II. Choose the words / phrases that do not go with the verb.
6. ride A. a donkey B. a car C. a horse D. an elephant
7. collect A. tomatoes B. entertainment C. honey D. tea leaves
8. pick A. blackberries B. roses C. wild flowersD. passengers
9. herd A. cattle B. cows C. carts D. camels
10. put up A. tents B. a new fence C. umbrellas D. nomadic life
III. Complete the sentences with the correct prepositions.
slow vast quiet peaceful slow
inconvenient colourful safe hard inconvenient
11. Nick looks very funny - today he is wearing a(n) _____________ shirt.
12. It will be very _____________ for me to have no bicycle.
13. Last Sunday our class visited a(n) _____________ village near our school.
14. The dentist asked me to try to be _____________ because it might hurt me a little.
15. People have cut down trees in a(n) _____________ area of forest this year.
16. We are walking on the _____________ narrow streets of the old city.
17. The life is usually _____________ and quiet in the countryside.
18. Is it _____________ to drink water from this river?
19. After he retired, he leads a(n) _____________ life in his home village.
20. Many years ago, my village was very poor, and the living conditions were so _____________.
IV. Fill in each blank with an appropriate adjective.
21. The local people are very _____________ to strangers.
22. Our _____________ staff will quickly satisfy your needs.
23. We visited the _____________ fishing village of Vung Tau.
24. It is a very rich country with _____________ resources.
25. I loved being _____________ by enthusiastic young people.
V. Fill in each blank with the appropriate form of the word in brackets.
26. There is a _____________ of books on the shelf. (collect)
27. It is very _____________ for people in remote areas to get to hospitals. (convenience)
28. He is very _____________ with his hands. (skill)
29. It is said that water collected from the local streams is _____________ to drink. (safe)
30. We want _____________ relations with all countries. (friend)
31. I like to eat _____________, so I eat a lot of fruits and vegetables every day. (health)
VI. Complete the sentences, using the comparative form of the adverbs from the correspondent
adjectives in the brackets.
32. It usually rains _____________ in Central Viet Nam than in other regions. (heavy)
33. I will have to try a bit _____________ than this. (hard)
34. The hall was lighted _____________ than the corridors. (bright)
35. Time goes by _____________ when we are busy. (quick)
36. Our family has lived _____________ in the country than in the town since last year. (happy)
37. The boys were playing the game _____________ than the girls. (noisy)
38. This task can be completed _____________ than that one. (easy)
39. A tractor can plough _____________ than a buffalo or a horse. (good)
VII. Complete the sentences, using the comparative form of the adverbs from the correspondent
adjectives below.
generous bad optimistic healthy
traditional quick sound good
40. A baby can sleep _____________ than an adult.
41. People in the country eat _____________ than people in the city.
42. Our grandparents got dressed _____________ than we do nowadays.
43. Nick speaks English _____________ than I do.
44. That old lady donates _____________ than her family members.
45. City people seem to apply modem techniques _____________ than country people.
46. The scientist talked _____________ about the future of young people in the country than local
people.
47. The paddy fields in my village were _____________ affected by the floods than the next village.
VIII. Complete the sentences with suitable forms of the adverbs given in the brackets.
48. Nick is a more careful writer than Phuc. (carefully)
 Nick writes essays.
49. A snail is slower than a crab. (slowly)
 A snail moves.
50. My father’s explanation about the subject was clearer than my brother’s. (clearly)
 My father explained the subject.
51. My cousin is a better singer than I am. (well)
 My cousin sings.
52. Phong is a faster swimmer than Phuc. (fast)
 Phong swims.
IX. Complete the conversation, using the phrases / sentences (A-H) given below.
A. It’s a real life, I think.
B. You don’t worry about delay or being late any more.
C. I see.
D. the fresh air and the open space
E. to make you fit and happy
F. It’s really interesting.
G. We can’t enjoy social activities there, especially in the evening.
H. the traffic systems in the city
Nick: Hi, Mai. Have you just come back from your stay in the countryside?
Mai: Yeah, I stayed on my uncle’s farm for the weekend. 53 ______________________
Nick: Do you really like the life in the countryside? Why?
Mai: First, you can enjoy 54 ______________________.
Nick: What do you mean, Mai?
Mai: In the countryside, we have the yard or the garden to play in. You can run around, kick a ball or
chase butterflies.55 ______________________
Nick: In my opinion, the countryside...it’s only nice if people are retired or they get old.
56
______________________.
Mai: But in the country, you are not in a hurry. 57 ______________________. We can say “no” to
traffic jams there.
58
Nick: Well, ______________________are becoming much better. Anyway, we can ride a bicycle
around 59 ______________________.
60
Mai: ______________________. Maybe we can live in the town and go to the countryside at the
weekend or during the summer holiday.
X. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
61
The country and the city have advantages and _____________. People in the country live in more
beautiful surroundings. They enjoy 62 _____________ and quietness, and can do their work at their 63

64
_____________pace because no one is in a _____________. They live in' larger, more comfortable
65
houses, and their neighbours are more friendly, and ready to help them _____________ they need
it. Their life, however, can be 66 _____________ and they may be isolated, which is a serious problem
67
_____________ they are ill or want to take children to school.
68
The city has all the services that the country lacks, but it _____________ has a lot of disadvantages.
69
Cities are often polluted. They not _____________ have polluted air but also have noisy streets.
Everyone is always in a hurry and this 70 _____________ that people have no time to get to know each
other and make friends.
61. A. joy B. enjoyment C. happiness D. disadvantages
62. A. quiet B. quietly C. peace D. peaceful
63. A. less B. own C. just D. only
64. A. hurry B. hurried C. hurriedly D. hurrying
65. A. when B. which C. what D. that
66. A. bore B. bored C. boring D. bores
67. A. unless B. because C. although D. if
68. A. also B. yet C. already D. so
69. A. never B. ever C. hardly D. only
70. A. aims B. means C. asks D. said
XI. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage.
The country is more beautiful than a town and more pleasant to live in. Many people think so, and go
to the country for the summer holidays though they cannot live there all the year round. Some have a
cottage built in a village so that they can go there whenever they can find the time.
English villages are not all alike, but in some ways they are not very different from one another.
Almost every village has a church, the round or square tower of which can be seen from many miles
around. Surrounding the church is the churchyard, where people are buried.
The village green is a wide stretch of grass, and houses or cottages are built round it. Country life is
now fairly comfortable, and many villages have running water brought through pipes into each house.
Most villages are so close to some small towns that people can go there to buy what they can’t find in
the village shops.
71. When do city people often go the country?
A. At the weekends B. All the year round
C. At Christmas D. The summer holidays
72. What is the advantage of city people when they have a cottage built in the village?
A. They can have their houses rented.
B. They can go to the country at weekends.
C. They can go to the country whenever they can find the time.
D. All are correct.
73. What is the common feature of English villages?
A. They have a church.
B. They have a church with a tall tower, and a village green.
C. They have a village green.
D. They have running water.
74. What is NOT mentioned in the life of English villages?
A. The village green B. The church C. Running water D. The Internet
75. What can villagers do when their villages are close to small towns?
A. They can go there to buy whatever they want.
B. They can go there to buy cheaper things.
C. They can go there to buy what is not found in the village shops.
D. They can go there to buy luxury goods.
XI. Use the words or phrases given to write meaningful sentences about advantages and
disadvantages of life in the countryside.
People love living in the countryside because of the advantages, but there are also several drawbacks.
There are a lot of positive aspects of living in the countryside.
76. first / the air / not polluted / and / you / enjoy fresh air
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
77. second / no traffic jams / and / you / enjoy peaceful views
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
78. besides / living cost / cheaper / most food / supplied / local farmers
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
However, living in the countryside has some problems
79. few forms / entertainment there / and / not many recreation parks, shopping malls or cinemas
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
80. in addition / difficult / young people / find jobs / develop their careers there
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
In short, the rural life is suitable for people who love peaceful life, but there should be more forms of
entertainment and job opportunities.
 UNIT 3.
TEENAGERS
A. Pronunciation: /ʊə/ and /ɔɪ/
I. Put the words with the underlined part into the correct column.
toy coin tour tourist voice choice
truer noisy tournament enjoy gourmet mature
destroy employee contour soil appointment gourd
/ʊə/ /ɔɪ/

II. Underline the /ʊə/ sound, and double underline the /ɔɪ/ sound. Then practise reading these
sentences.
1. He is very poor.
2. They take a tour to Singapore.
3. Boys are noisy.
4. These are coins, not toys.
5. The boy pointed to the poison.
6. The spoiled boy destroyed his sister’s joy.
7. Only cut down mature trees, and leave young ones.
8. A tourist found a jewel on the coast.
9. The road follows the contour of the coastline.
10. You can enjoy gourmet food in that restaurant.

B. Vocabulary
• Teen school clubs & teen’s use of social media & teen stress
I. Fill in the blanks with the correct words or phrases matching with the verbs. Some verbs may be
used more than once.
profile computer information the internet post
 device website modem status video
printer photograph email file page
1. upload _______________________________________________________________________
2. browse _______________________________________________________________________
3. check _______________________________________________________________________
4. log on _______________________________________________________________________
5. connect _______________________________________________________________________
II. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs given.
upload browse check log on connect
1. About 40,000 gainers have been _____________ every day since the website appeared last month.
2. She was _____________ through fashion magazines to find a new hairstyle.
3. The data was _____________ on Thursday July 20.
4. Can I _____________ my printer to your computer?
5. I always _____________ that I have closed the windows before I leave the house.
III. Choose the correct word to complete the sentences.
1. Browse / Check / Connect your work before handing it in.
2. I spent the whole evening just checking / connecting / browsing on the Internet.
3. I logged / connected / uploaded in to my Facebook account.
4. Laptops can log on / connect / surf wirelessly to the Net.
5. I can check / browse / download the app for free.
IV. Complete the sentences with the verbs given.
connect download log on switch off
log out install upload unplug
1. If you don’t _____________ your memory stick correctly, you may damage it.
2. You need to have a password to be able to _____________ to this computer.
3. I can’t wait to get home to _____________ the photographs I took to my computer.
4. I can’t _____________ to the Internet at the moment. There seems to be a problem. 5. Remember
to and the computer when you have finished.
6. You shouldn’t _____________ music or films from the Internet illegally.
7. The technician will come to _____________ the new software on the computer later.
V. Complete the sentences with the words given.
 club schoolwork notifications forum social media
user-friendly stress suits prepares share
1. People under a lot of _____________ may have headaches and sleeping difficulties.
2. The meeting provided a valuable _____________ for discussing the issue.
3. Mai and Nam are members of the same chess _____________.
4. That new hairstyle really _____________ you - you look beautiful.
5. This course _____________ students for their future career.
6. Companies are making use of _____________ in order to market their goods.
7. Please _____________ this issue on Facebook and Twitter so we can give you some advice.
8. This software is very so it is easy for you to work with _____________.
9. How can I stop random Twitter _____________?
10. My science teacher always sets a lot of _____________.
VI. Complete the text with the words given.
knowledge programmes field trips skills
clubs opportunities talent places
School clubs are about connecting students on shared interests and 1 _____________. They are not
limited to chess or books. In most schools, there are dozens of different 2 _____________ to choose
from.
If teenagers have a natural 3 _____________ for theater, the arts club might be a great resource for
them to use it in performing their comedy, dance, drama and chorus.
4
Participating in sports is much more than just losing weight. For most teens, there are plenty of
5
_____________ for them to work together while building strength and leadership skills with sports
_____________.
The travel club can help teens discover the amazing 6 _____________ around them and boost their 7
_____________ in geography and history. Luckily, most schools hold yearly 8 _____________.
 Prepositions
VII. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. He has always found a way to connect _____________ his audience.
2. I was browsing _____________ the magazine when I saw their advertisement.
3. I browsed the website _____________ information about the event.
4. With the press of a single button, you can upload information _____________ a server.
5. After I had finished the exam, I checked my answers _____________ mistakes.
6. Can anyone log on _____________ this system?
7. If you download pictures _____________ the Internet, check the terms of use.
8. The video will be posted _____________ their website later today.
9. She sent me links _____________ several useful websites.
10. Can you work _____________ well pressure?

C. Grammar
• Simple sentences and compound sentences
I. Complete the sentences with the correct conjunction.
1. He got out of the car _____________ walked into the house.
2. The weather was lovely _____________ we stayed in the garden.
3. The little boy was wet and cold _____________ he wasn’t hurt.
4. We turned off the lights _____________ left the room.
5. She worked hard _____________ failed all her exams.
6. I sat in the living room _____________ read a book.
7. It was so cold _____________ we didn’t go out.
8. He seemed a friendly person _____________ I didn’t like him.
9. Yesterday I was very hungry _____________ I ate the whole pizza.
10. He didn’t like sport _____________ he didn’t mind watching the football
II. Complete the sentences with the correct conjunction.
1. The teacher talked to Nam about his grades _____________ he listened carefully and promised to
improve them.
2. I washed my shirt _____________ it didn’t get clean.
3. Would you like some water _____________ some fruit juice?
4. He invited them to dinner _____________ they couldn’t come.
5. Cats _____________ dogs are domestic animals.
6. You can have chicken _____________ vegetables for dinner.
7. The river rose _____________ it flooded the towns in the valley.
8. The flight attendant served dinner _____________ I didn’t eat.
9. Sara is a good tennis player _____________ she’s never played golf.
10. Which would you prefer? Would you like to play football _____________ badminton on Sunday
morning?
III. Complete the sentences with so or but. Add commas if necessary.
1. It began to rain _____________ I opened my umbrella.
2. It began to rain _____________ I didn’t have my umbrella with me.
3. I didn’t have an umbrella _____________ I got wet.
4. I didn’t have an umbrella I didn’t get wet because _____________ I was wearing my raincoat.
5. The water was cold _____________ I didn’t go swimming.
6. The water was cold _____________ I went swimming anyway.
7. His friend’s directions to her house weren’t clear _____________ he got lost.
8. The directions weren’t clear _____________ I found her house anyway.
9. My friend lied to me _____________ I still like and trust her.
10. My friend lied to me _____________ I don’t trust her anymore.
IV. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.
1. I couldn’t repair my bike, _____________ I didn’t have the right tools.
A. so B. for C. because of D. therefore
2. I was tired _____________ I walked all the way home.
A. so B. or C. but D. and
3. The post office was closed _____________ I couldn’t mail my letter.
A. so B. but C. and D. for
4. I couldn’t use the pay phone, _____________ I didn’t have any coins with me.
A. and B. for C. but D. so
5. I have to eat breakfast in the morning; _____________, I get hungry before my lunch break.
A. therefore B. for C. otherwise D. however
6. Tom used to get over his problems easily; _____________, he can’t get over this serious one.
A. However B. therefore C. otherwise D. for
7. I wore a large hat at the beach _____________ my nose got sunburnt.
A. and B.so C. or D. but
8. He should improve his skills; _____________, he can’t do his job well.
A. but B. therefore C. otherwise D. however
9. There was no electricity _____________ I was able to read because I had a candle.
A. and B. but C. or D. for
10. Some snakes are poisonous _____________ others are harmless.
A. but B. and C. or D. so

D. Reading
I. Read the text and answer the questions.
There are many activities after school hours in Lan’s school, so she and her classmates can take part in
them. Lan and Mai join the school theater group and they are also the members of the stamp
collector’s club. They are rehearsing a play for Teacher’s Day. Hung and Tuan are members of the
school sport club. They play for the school football team. Ha and Thanh are the members of the
school art club, and they want to be good artists one day in the future.
1. Which of them joins the school theater group?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. What are they doing now?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Who are the members of the stamp collector’s club?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. Who plays for the school football team?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Who are the members of the school art club?
___________________________________________________________________________________
II. Read the passage carefully, and decide whether the sentences are T (true) or F (false).

Our school has a model club. The members of the club try to make water rockets. The students taking
part in the club love discovering new things and learning science subjects. A water rocket doesn’t cost
you much. You can use the things you have used such as empty bottles, old tyres of bicycles. The
model has two main parts: the base and the rocket. The pump in the base is made up of water pipes
and it can increase the pressure of water. The rocket made from empty bottles should have blades in
its tail and a pointed head. These parts help the water go in the correct path as the members have
planned. When we use the pump to increase the pressure of water, the rocket will take off and fly
into the air. Our school club has just won the first prize for making water rockets.
1. The members of the model club have a love of science. _________
2. You can use old things to make water rockets. _________
3. It is expensive to make water rockets. _________
4. The high pressure of water can make the models fly. _________
5. We cannot control the water rockets at all. _________
III. Read the text and answer the questions.
School Clubs
School clubs can bring many benefits to teenagers and help them to build skills in different areas.
The sports club is very popular with students. They can take swimming lessons, football training and
practice, badminton according to school age. If students are not interested in these sports, there are a
number of physical activities to keep them active. They can take part in martial arts, BMX biking,
dancing, or yoga.
The arts and crafts club are popular activities after school. Students can participate in performing on
stage, working on lights, sound and special effects. Some excellent students can go on to take part in
community theater when they become adults.
Clubs with programmes based on STEM (science, technology, engineering, or math) are for children
who like playing on computers or tablets. Science clubs can offer robotics, coding and video game
development.
You can choose your favorite club based on your age, your interests and your strengths. By following
school clubs, a student can expand their social circle, develop new skills, and have better skills to solve
problems.
1. What common activities does the sports club offer?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. Besides these activities, what types of exercise does it provide students?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. How can the arts and crafts club help students in their future career?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. What skills can you learn from the arts and crafts club?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Who is likely to take part in STEM programmes?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. What do science clubs offer to students?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. How can you choose the right school club?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
8. What are the advantages of attending a school club?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
IV. Read the text and do the tasks that follow.
Social media allows teenagers to communicate with others and build social networks. These networks
can provide teens with valuable support. Teens also use social media for entertainment.
However, social media use can negatively affect teens, distracting them from studying. A 2019 study
found that children spending more than three hours a day using social media might have mental
health problems.
In order to encourage responsible use of social media and limit some of its negative effects, we should
set reasonable limits, explain what happens on social media and encourage face-to-face contact with
friends. You should talk to your teen about how to avoid social media from his or her sleep, meals or
homework. Teenagers should also avoid electronic media use before bedtime. You should talk to your
teen about what is right and safe to share on social media and prevent gossiping, spreading rumours
or bullying. If teens may have anxiety and nervousness, you should encourage them to have face-to-
face contact with friends.
Task 1. Read the text again, and mark the sentences T (true) or F (false).
1. The text is written for parents of teenagers. __________
2. Social media only causes stress to teenagers. __________
3. Students may get bad results in their study because of spending too much time on social media.
__________
4. Parents should give explanations about what happens on social media to their children.
__________
5. Children must stop using electronic devices during daytime. __________
6. Good behaviours or habits are necessary when you use social media. __________
7. Children with serious problems in mental health should have more face-to-face contact.
__________
8. Face-to-face contact with friends will be the future way of communication. __________
Task 2. Match the words in bold from the text to their meanings.
1. __________ the greatest amounts of something that is possible
2. __________ taking somebody’s attention away from something
3. __________ hurting and frightening someone who is weaker
4. __________ a feeling of worry or fear
5. __________ talking about other people and their private lives
V. Read the passage, and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each question.
If parents bring up a child with the sole aim of turning the child into a genius, they will cause a
disaster. According to several scientists, this is one of the biggest mistakes which ambitious parents
make. Generally, the child will be only too aware of what his parents expect and will fail. Unrealistic
parental expectations can cause great damage to children.
However, if parents are not too unrealistic about what they expect their children to do, but are
ambitious in a sensible way, the child may succeed in doing very well - especially if the parents are
very supportive of their child.
Michael is very lucky. He is crazy about music, and his parents help him a lot by taking him to concerts
and arranging private piano and violin lessons for him. They even drive him 50 kilometers twice a
week for violin lessons. Michael’s mother knows very little about music, but his father plays the
trumpet in a large orchestra. However, he never makes Michael enter music competitions if he is
unwilling.
Winston, Michael’s friend, however, is not so lucky. Both his parents are successful musicians, and
they set too high a standard for Winston. They want their son to be as successful as they are and so
they enter him for every piano competition held. They are very unhappy when he does not win.
Winston is always afraid that he will disappoint his parents and now he always seems quite and
unhappy.
1. One of the serious mistakes parents can make is to __________.
A. push their child into trying too much B. help their child to become a genius
C. make their child become a musician D. neglect their child’s education
2. Parents’ ambition for their children is not wrong if they __________.
A. force their children into achieving success B. themselves have been very successful
C. understand and help their children sensibly D. arrange private lessons for their children
3. Michael is fortunate in that __________.
A. his father is a musician B. his parents are quite rich
C. his mother knows little about music D. his parents help him in a sensible way
4. Winston’s parents push their son so much and he __________.
A. has won a lot of piano competitions B. cannot learn much music from them
C. has become a good musician D. is afraid to disappoint them
5. The two examples given in the passage illustrate the principle that __________.
A. successful parents always have intelligent children
B. successful parents often have unsuccessful children
C. parents should let the child develop in the way he wants
D. parents should spend more money on the child’s education

E. Speaking
• Everyday English
I. Choose the correct response. Then practise the short exchanges in pairs.
1. A: I’m going to take four tests next week.
2. A: How do you think about Facebook?
3. A: Which club do you join at school?
4. A: What can you do on the class forum?
B: a/ Exams never give students stress.
b/ I’m sorry to hear that. Good luck.
B: a/ It has millions of users.
b/ It’s user-friendly.
B: a/ It’s the science club.
b/ It’s design.
B: a/ We can exchange the greeting cards that
 we have made them on our own.
b/ We discuss our problems and help each other
to find out solutions.
5. A: Why didn’t Mai look happy? B: a/ She was under stress from her study.
b/ She got good marks for her essay.
6. A: Why did you join the badminton club? B: a/ Badminton is taught at school.
b/ Badminton is my favorite sport.
7. A: Do you like Instagram? B: a/ Yes, I can share my photos on it.
b/ Yes, I can discuss my problems on it.
8. A: Have you ever got stress from your B: a/ Oh, yes. They have too high expectations
parents? for me.
b/ Yes. They often ask me to try as much as I
can.
9. A: I’m facing cyberbullying now. B: a/ Turn off your smartphone forever.
b/ Talk to your parents or teachers about it.
10. A: What did the coach of the sports club tell B: a/ She helped us improve our writing skills.
you in the last meeting? b/ She told us the ways to keep fit.
• Asking and answering questions about school clubs
II. Use the notes from the notices to give responses to the questions, then practise the dialogues
with your partner.
A. The School English Speaking Club
Meeting to share ideas about organising some special activities
Date: Dec 20 Time: from 7 am to 9 am
Venue: Room 14 on the second floor
Please contact Pham Thi Mai of Grade 8A at the above address for more information.
B. The Youth &Young (Y&Y) Club
Meeting to choose the best members
Date: Sunday December 10 Time: from 7 am to 8 am
Venue: Room 09 on the first floor
Each class will send three excellent students. They will join in a trip to visit Uncle Ho’s Mausoleum in
the capital.
Please contact Ms. Thanh Mai in charge of the Y&Y club for more information.
A. The School English Speaking Club
A: Which date does the School English Speaking Club meet?
B: 1 _______________________________________________________________________________
A: What time does the meeting start?
B: 2 _______________________________________________________________________________
A: Where does it meet?
B: 3 _______________________________________________________________________________
A: What is the purpose of the meeting?
B: 4 _______________________________________________________________________________
A: Who can I contact to get more information about the meeting?
B: 5 _______________________________________________________________________________
B. The Youth &Young (Y&Y) Club
A: Which date does the Youth & Young Club meet?
B: 1 _______________________________________________________________________________
A: What time does the meeting start?
B: 2 _______________________________________________________________________________
A: Where does it meet?
B: 3 _______________________________________________________________________________
A: What is the purpose of the meeting?
B: 4 _______________________________________________________________________________
A: What activity is the meeting going to discuss?
B: 5 _______________________________________________________________________________
A: Who can I contact to get more information about the meeting?
B: 6 _______________________________________________________________________________
• Making requests
III. Match the requests to their responses.
1. Mum, can you close the door, please? I’m busy with both my hands.
2. Will you stop making noise? I can’t concentrate on my study.
3. Could you turn off the lights, please? I can’t sleep.
4. Could you get me a cup of coffee?
5. Can you pass me the book?
6. Could you please help me with my homework?
7. Could you show me the way to the library? I’m new here.
8. Could you please send me the files in zip format?
9. Would you please hand me the microphone?
10. I was wondering if it would be possible for you to write a book report for our website.
______ A. Certainly. Here you are.
______ B. OK. Some biscuits too?
______ C. Here you are. The volume is OK.
______ D. Sorry. I’m talking a little bit loudly on the phone to my mum.
______ E. Yes. I’ll do it when I finish reading the book at the weekend.
______ F. Sure. We’ll work together.
______ G. OK. I’ll do it for you now, son.
______ H. Right. Go straight, and turn right at the end of this corridor.
______ I. It’s all right. I’ll do it now. Good night.
______ J. Sure. I’ve just done it. Check your email.
IV. Complete the formal requests with the words given.
mind wonder grateful all right
way could wondering think
1. I would be _____________ if you could answer a few questions for me?
2. Is there any _____________ you could change the date of meeting, sir?
3. Do you _____________ you could possibly lend me some money until next Friday?
4. _____________ you possibly rebook the flight?
5. Would it be _____________ if you do this for me?
6. Would you _____________ writing a letter on behalf all of us to the principal?
7. I _____________ if you could lend me a hand with my luggage?
8. I was _____________ if it could be possible for you to send the email again?

F. Writing
• Write a paragraph about the causes of one’s stress and solutions
Write a paragraph about the causes of one’s stress and solutions,
using the cues below.
1. many situations / cause stress / teenagers
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. schoolwork, exams and pressure / do well
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. relationships with friends and life changes / leaving school / moving house / lead / stress
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. family conflict / or / making big decisions / teenagers stressed
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. if / know / what / causing stress / easier for us / deal / it
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. healthy lifestyles / reduce / effects / stress
__________________________________________________________________________________
7. physical activities / exercise / improve mood / give / us / a sense / achievement
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
8. eating well / help / feel good, strong, energetic / able / concentrate
__________________________________________________________________________________
9. relaxation / reading a book, listening to some music or doing breathing exercises / help / a good
sleep
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
10. if / stress / too serious / see the school counsellor / get some support
__________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST (UNIT 3)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. tour B. sour C. tourist D. sure
2. A. mouse B. tournament C. ensure D. couture
3. A. coin B. noisy C. soil D. tortoise
4. A. choice B. enjoy C. porpoise D. toy
5. A. gourmet B. signature C. mature D. gourd
II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. It might take a while for this to ____________ the file.
A. log on B. write C. upload D. discover
7. Before we made a decision, we spent hours ____________ various websites.
A. browsing B. logging out C. uploading D. downloading
8. Remember to go over your essay ____________ for grammar and spelling mistakes before you
hand it in to the teacher.
A. browsing B. surfing C. connecting D. checking
9. I need a password in order to ____________.
A. check B. log on C. surf D. browse
10. Once the drives are installed, ____________ power and data cables to each one.
A. combine B. mix C. check D. connect
11. I uploaded the ____________ as soon as I had finished working on it.
A. email B. file C. website D. modem
12. There are many evening classes where you can study ____________.
A. art and craft B. arts and crafts C. artistic D. artists
13. She has been ____________ a lot of stress recently.
A. under B. at C. on D. in
14. I was preparing ____________ their arrival.
A. for B. about C. in D. with
15. I can provide you ____________ directions to their house.
A. about B. for C. with D. to
III. Complete the text with the words given.
 sport hobbies adults strengths sleep
friends tips minds exercise stress
How to Deal with Your Stress
Use the following 16 ____________ to manage your stress in a healthy way.
17
Getting enough ____________ helps you grow and develop normally. For teens, this means about
8-10 hours each night.
Take some time to think about what you are good at and ways to do more of those things. By building
your 18 ____________, you can control your 19 ____________.
Find activities or 20 ____________ that make you happy and put them into your daily life. It can be a
physical 21 ____________ or spending time with family and friends.
You should engage in physical activity because 22 ____________________ can take off stress from our
23
____________. This can be anything from a walk in the park to a bike ride or basketball game with
24
____________.
25
It can be hard to manage stress alone. Talk to a parent, teacher or other trusted ____________
about your problems and they may be able to help you find new ways to manage your stress.
IV. Choose the best answer to complete each of the following sentences.
26. Some people really enjoy swimming ____________ others are afraid of water.
A. so B. or C. and D. but
27. It was cold and wet; ____________, Nam put on his swimming suit and went to the beach.
A. however B. therefore C. otherwise D. for
28. The student had to give an explanation for his behaviour; ____________, he would get
punishment.
A. for B. otherwise C. however D. therefore
29. He asked her to help him, ____________ he knew he could depend on her.
A. so B. but C. or D. for
30. The room was hot, ____________ I turned on the electric fan.
A. so B. but C. or D. for
31. I had missed my bus ____________ I got to class on time.
A. and B. but C. so D. or
32. You should have the library card; ____________, you can’t borrow books.
A. otherwise B. therefore C. however D. and
33. Some camels have one hump; ____________, others have two humps.
A. but B. however C. therefore D. otherwise
34. The weather is getting warmer, ____________ the flowers will soon start to bloom.
A. so B. but C. or D. therefore
35. Vung Tau has excellent white sand beaches; ____________, it is famous for its tourist attractions.
A. so B. however C. therefore D. otherwise
V. Combine each pair of sentences using however, therefore, otherwise or for. Insert correct
punctuation.
36. The football team should play better. It may lose the match.
_________________________________________________________________________________
37. The weather is cold outside. I keep the windows open at night.
_________________________________________________________________________________
38. The two children were cooking for the first time. Their food was terrible, but I enjoyed it.
_________________________________________________________________________________
39. You have to promise to study harder. I don’t help you with your study.
_________________________________________________________________________________
40. He was born in a poor family. He tried his best to get a good education.
_________________________________________________________________________________.
41. He walked very slowly. He broke his leg in two places.
_________________________________________________________________________________
42. She has got a lot of money. She is a Hollywood film star.
_________________________________________________________________________________
43. You must lend me the money for the trip. I won't be able to go.
_________________________________________________________________________________
44. Laura is an honest person. I’m doubtful about her story of the incident.
_________________________________________________________________________________
45. They invite a lot of people to the meeting. I have to arrive early to get a good seat.
_________________________________________________________________________________
VI. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Cyberbullying is the 46 ____________ of technology to annoy, threaten, or embarrass 47 ____________
person. Online threats and aggressive, or rude texts, posts, or messages all count. So does
48
____________ personal information, pictures, or videos designed to hurt or embarrass someone
49
else. ____________ comments often focus on things like a person's gender, religion, race, or
physical differences.
50
Online bullying can be particularly damaging and upsetting ____________ it is usually anonymous
51 52
or ____________ to find. People can suffer ____________ a 24/7 basis - every time they
53
____________ their cellphone or computer.
The first thing 54 ____________ to solve the problem is to tell an adult you trust. You also can talk to
your school counselor or a trusted teacher or family member. Ignoring bullies is the best way to take
away their power, but it isn't always easy to do - in the real world 55 ____________ online.
46. A. use B. purpose C. advantage D. control
47. A. the other B. others C. other D. another
48. A. sending B. placing C. posting D. adding
49. A. Polite B. Rude C. Sudden D. Simple
50. A. so B. because C. due to D. but
51. A. hard B. hardly C. severe D. easy
52. A. at B. on C. of D. on
53. A. stop B. leave C. check D. mark
54. A. do B. doing C. to be done D. to do
55. A. of B. on C. in D. or
VII. Read the text and choose the best answer.
In small amounts and when children have the right support, stress can be good. It can help them face
a challenge, focus their effort, and meet deadlines. Stress can be harmful when children can’t deal
with it, and they lack the support they need.
When children face a challenge, they often have positive stress to help them to get things done or try
new things to get over the challenge. For example, students have to go to school on time every
weekday, so they form the necessary skills to get everything ready in a short time. This skill can
prepare them for their future life.
Many children face difficult life events, such as face the death of a loved relative, move to a new
neighborhood, or start a new school. Any of these life events can cause stress. When children face
difficult life events, they might feel stressed for a few days. Parents can provide support and help:
listen and talk with the child, help them feel safe and loved, talk about what they can do to get over
stress and give comfort to them.
When difficult life events lead to stress that lasts for more than a few weeks, it is called chronic stress.
Chronic stress is hard on children when they don’t have a break from or when they don’t have the
support they need or skills to overcome the stress. Having a serious health condition that lasts for a
long time can lead to chronic stress, too. Over time, stress like this can affect teenagers’ physical and
mental health.
56. Stress can be good to teenagers when ____________.
A. they lack the support B. they have the right support
C. the stress is serious D. they have many challenges
57. Positive stress can help teenagers to do some things except that ____________.
A. getting things done B. try new things
C. get over a challenge D. set limits in their future life
58. When children face difficult life events, parents can help them by doing some things except that
____________.
A. facing the difficult life events for them B. listening and talking with the child
C. helping them feel safe and loved D. giving comfort to them
59. When does life event stress become chronic stress?
A. when the stress is too serious B. when it continues for a long time
C. when children can get over it easily D. when parents offer support and help
60. The best title for the passage can be ____________.
A. Life Event Stress B. Stress and Its Effect
C. Stress and Ways to Get Over It D. Stress with Teenagers
VIII. Complete the conversation about teen stress, using the responses (A-G) given. There are two
extra ones.
A. Some are even stressed out about the entrance exam to high school.
B. Spending a minimum of 20 minutes a day talking with our parents about our school work is
very useful.
C. Teenagers should get enough rest every day - about 9 hours a day.
D. The challenge is to have a balance between work and play.
E. Yes, nowadays there is a heavy load for students to learn.
 F. I think we should have time-management skills and organizational skills.
G. Younger kids may have more serious signs of school stress.
Nick: I can see some Vietnamese students suffer from stress and homework pressure. Is it right, Phuc?
Phuc: 61 ____________________________________________________________________________
Nick: I have seen some girls crying in class after getting low test scores.
Phuc: And others have gone without sleep a few nights to keep up with homework.
62
_________________________________________________________________________________
Nick: So some students may have emotional, physical and mental stress.
63
Phuc: That’s right, Nick. _____________________________________________________________
We should plan our time wisely with homework.
Nick: We should try to do homework every night instead of cramming at the last moment.
Phuc: 64 ____________________________________________________________________________
Nick: I agree with you. I think nowadays teenagers have some problems with their sleep. Adequate
sleep alone would reduce teens' stress levels.
Phuc: Family time is also important for getting over stress. 65 _________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
IX. Make the requests for the situations below, using the beginning words given to you.
66. You would like to go to the nearest post office to post a letter. You ask a stranger for directions.
 Could you?
67. The room is not fresh, so you ask your friend to open the window.
 Would you mind?
68. You have a lot of homework to do this evening, and it seems to be difficult for you. You would like
to ask your father to help you to do it.
 I would be grateful, Dad.
69. You have just arrived at a hotel, and you would like a porter to carry your suitcase because it is too
heavy.
 I wonder if you. It's too heavy.
70. You can’t understand the lesson very well, and you would like the teacher to explain it to you
again.
 Would it be all right?
X. Write a paragraph about the causes of teenagers’ stress and offer solutions, using the words
given below.
71. teenagers / often feel / stressed / because / a number / causes
___________________________________________________________________________________
72. for their study / they / a lot / homework / do / and / exams / take
___________________________________________________________________________________
73. it / also / because of / expectations / pressure / do well at school / their parents
___________________________________________________________________________________
74. they / also have / some trouble / their social relationships / friends
___________________________________________________________________________________
75. they / often face / lack / time / so / they / do / too much / a short time / and / feel / unprepared /
upset
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
76. otherwise / some teenagers / sometimes have / lack / sleep
___________________________________________________________________________________
77. there / some ways / deal / stress
___________________________________________________________________________________
78. first / doing exercise / produce / hormone / helping you / reduce stress
___________________________________________________________________________________
79. diets / an important role / cope with stress / because / they / provide teenagers / enough energy /
vitamins / minerals / get over stress
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
80. teenagers / listen / relaxing music / before bedtime / and / they / also / avoid screen time /
coffee / one hour / before / go / bed
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 REVIEW 1 (UNITS 1-2-3)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. stretch B. prefer C. resort D. detest
2. A. crazy B. expectation C. vast D. bracelet
3. A. fold B. notification C. focused D. orchard
4. A. bracelet B. fancy C. speciality D. concentrate
5. A. pressure B. stress C. session D. possession
II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. Yoga helps us learn ____________ to co-ordinate breathing and movement.
A. what B. when C. why D. how
7. Teenagers enjoy ____________ to music and ____________ out with friends.
A. listen – hang B. to listen – to hang
C. listening – hang D. listening – hanging
8. ____________ should children do yoga too?
A. Why B. When C. What D. How
9. Don’t worry. It is ____________ to travel to that village even at night.
A. safe B. unsafe C. difficult D. inconvenient
10. I ____________ my changes, and the site went live.
A. moved B. copied C. downloaded D. uploaded
11. The boys often help their parents to ____________ water from the village well.
A. gather B. collect C. give D. find
12. Duong Lam, one of the most ancient villages in Ha Noi, is ____________ in Son Tay.
A. locating B. lied C. situated D. situating
13. Many visitors come to the village because of its historical and cultural ____________.
A. importance B. values C. amounts D. usefulness
14. I like rural life because the people here are close ____________ each other.
A. with B. to C. at D. on
15. My instructor wanted me to be more ____________ during a chess match. Now I can concentrate
better.
A. focused B. brought C. gathered D. strengthened
III. Circle the correct answers in the text.
Back in 2006, 79-year-old Peter Oakley made a film of himself talking about his life experiences and
16
uploaded / downloaded it onto the web. He used a new video-sharing site, YouTube (which was
then only one year old). He called the film “First Try", and the online community loved it. Within a
week, Peter was the number one user on YouTube, making him an Internet celebrity. The film has
now had nearly three million hits. Peter 17posted / searched more films online about himself and his
life, and called the series “Telling it All". He also has his own 18hit / website (askgeriatric.com), where
you can read his 19blog / video sharing site. Oh, yes, and you can 20download / post Peter’s songs
from it - he’s also in a rock band!
IV. Fill in each blank with the appropriate form of the word in brackets.
21. After installing your computer, you should test the internet ____________. (connect)
22. He spoke ____________ about the life in the countryside in Viet Nam. (optimistic)
23. All of us can realize the ____________ atmosphere in the countryside life. (peace)
24. Some of the ____________ have lived here all their lives. (village)
25. Having to wait for ten minutes was a minor ____________. (convenient)
V. Read the advertisements, and do the task that follows.
Choosing a Holiday Activity
Are you always bored in the holidays? Choose one of our fantastic holiday courses - have fun, learn
something new and make friends! All our courses are for five days.
Course 1: Join a band
Do you love playing music, but you haven’t got anyone to play with? This course is for you! Bring a
musical instrument ... your guitar, your violin ... or just your voice! Meet other musicians and start a
band. Learn to make music together.
Course 2: Picture perfect
This course teaches you how to take fantastic photographs using modern digital cameras. But it’s not
just photography ... we also help you with your painting skills. Use your photos to paint personal
pictures of people and scenery.
Course 3: Plain sailing
All you need to know about sailing. Don’t bring equipment: we have everything you need. We take
you to a beautiful area - only 30-minute drive - and we sail in every type of weather. You learn to sail
in groups of five ... so you make friends, too!
Course 4: A taste of Italy
Do you like Italian food? Do you want to learn how to prepare it? This course shows you how to make
three simple tasty dishes. We have all the ingredients for delicious traditional Italian food. Have an
amazing dinner party for your friends at the end of the course!
Which course is good for people who:
26. want to meet new people? ________________________
27. like art? ________________________
28. like to be in the open air? ________________________
29. like cooking and eating with friends? ________________________
30. play a musical instrument? ________________________
(Some questions may have more than one answer.)
VI. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank in the following passage.
I live in a small village ealled Northville. There are about 2000 people here. I love the village
31
_________ it is very quiet and life is slow and easy. The village is always clean; people look
32
_________ it with great care. The air is always clean, too. People are much more friendly here than
33
in a city because everyone _________ the others, and if someone has a problem, there are always
people who can help.
There are only a few things that I don't like about Northville. One thing is that we have not got many
34
things to do in the evening; we haven’t got _________ cinemas or theaters. The other thing is that
people always talk about 35 _________, and everyone knows what everyone is doing. But 1 still prefer
village life to life in a big city.
31. A. so B. although C. because D. but
32. A. for B. at C. up D. after
33. A. knows B. know C. is knowing D. knew
34. A. little B. some C. any D. few
35. A. others B. other C. another D. one another
VII. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage.
The thing I liked most when I was small was the change of seasons. Spring, summer, autumn and
winter - I could see them all come and go and each one was completely different. Now in the city, you
can buy summer flowers in winter and eat the same vegetables all the year round. Whereas, in the
country, I could only eat things at certain times of the year, for example, strawberries in June and
turnips in winter. I lived my childhood with the seasons.
We also made most of our food and would never eat frozen or tinned food. Everything was fresh, so it
must be better than the type of food I am taking now in the city. City people may think people in the
country miss a lot of things about modern life. In fact, in my opinion they miss a lot more than people
in the country, they miss real life.
36. What did the writer like most about living in the country?
A. Flowers in spring. B. Leaves in autumn.
C. The wild animals and plants. D. The change of seasons.
37. What does the word “them” in line 2 refer to?
A. Four seasons B. Winter and autumn
C. Countryside people D. Plants
38. In the countryside which season can we buy strawberries?
A. Spring B. Summer C. Autumn D. Winter
39. Why did the writer never eat tinned food when living in the country?
A. Because it was frozen. B. Because it was contaminated.
C. Because it was very fat. D. Because it wasn’t very fresh.
40. Which of the following sentences is NOT true?
A. People in the city can grow vegetables all the year round.
B. In the countryside turnips are grown in winter.
C. The writer often eats frozen and tinned food now.
D. Many city people think they live better than those in the country.
VIII. Complete the conversations, using the words or phrases given.
love don't mind hate don’t really like quite like
A.
Nick: Jenny, please help me with the washing up.
Jenny: Why? There’s not much.
Nick: I know, but I 41 _________________ doing it. It’s awful.
B.
Mum: Let me help you.
Sarah: No, that’s OK. I 42 _________________ doing the cooking. It’s one of my favorite hobbies.
C.
Phong: What are you doing?
Phuc: I’m tidying my room.
Phong: What? Still?
Phuc: Yeah, I 43 _________________ doing it. It’s a bit boring.
D.
John: And we also need lots of drinks. Shall I come with you?
Mai: No, I’m fine. I really 44 _________________ shopping.
E.
Mum: OK, give me the next shirt. I 45 _________________ doing another one.
Mai: You really don’t mind? How sweet of you.
IX. Fill the gaps with the words / phrases below to give your opinion about the best leisure activity.
There is one extra word that you do not need.
In addition also As I have noted
In my opinion Besides I think
My favorite leisure activity is listening to music.
46
_________________, listening to music not only helps me relax but also provides me with musical
knowledge. I also like the time that I can lie lazily in bed, put on the small earphones with my iPod and
enjoy any favorite songs of many kinds of music: pop music, hiphop, rock or jazz... I like pop music
very much because I think it is gentle and suitable for teenagers. I listen to rock music when I am sad
47
and after that I feel cheerful and happy. _________________ music from other countries is also
48
good for teenagers to understand other cultures. _________________ that, the lyrics are easy to
understand and interesting.
49
_________________, it can improve my English and listening skills.
50
_________________, music is an important part of my life and it helps me love my life more.
 UNIT 4.
ETHNIC GROUPS OF VIET NAM
A. Pronunciation: /k/ and /g/
I. Put the words with the underlined part into the correct column.
kid cup go ache good great
kitten like thinking egg again cart
back league duck sick guess truck
black cat cool guest chorus school
guerrilla antique unique caught
/k/ /g/

II. Read aloud the minimal pairs of sounds: /k/ and /g/.
clock clog dock dog duck dug block blog
crack crag lack lag rack rag tack tag
III. Underline the letter with sound /k/, and double underline the letter with sound /g/. Then
practise reading the sentences.
1. The dog can lick the girl.
2. Kick the big green ball.
3. The big cake cooled in the kitchen.
4. The school chorus gave a unique performance.
5. Get a clean fork from the sink.
6. Can I ask you to pick up forks from the kitchen.
7. I think I like to speak to the captain of the group.
8. The kitten is in the black cart.
9. Bring Kate the bigger egg.
10. He corrected the mistakes for the group.

B. Vocabulary
• The lifestyle of ethnic groups
I. Complete the sentences with the words given.
folk stilts overlooking minorities
instruments communal house minority folk dance
ethnic costumes terraced dish
1. The programme helped ________________ groups get better working conditions.
2. Singers performing folk music often wear traditional ________________.
3. Musical ________________ hang from the walls of the restaurant.
4. The ________________ has been handed down from generation to generation through traditional
teaching methods.
5. I enjoy listening to ________________ music.
6. The Ede are the second largest ________________ group in the Central Highlands.
7. The houses are built on ________________ to protect them from the annual floods.
8. The hotel is in a lovely location ________________ the lake.
9. Five-coloured sticky rice is a traditional ________________, and the colours represent the elements
of life.
10. They rented a little ________________ house in South London.
11. People from ethnic ________________ often face prejudice.
12. The ________________ or Rong house can only be found in villages to the North of the Central
Highlands.
II. Complete the sentences with the adjectives given below.
ethnic traditional open musical unique
dominant mountainous social rich alike
1. That famous artist was a(n) ________________ figure in the international art world.
2. The English language is ________________ in vocabulary.
3. A(n) ________________ feature of these rock shelters was that they were dry.
4. I think my mother and I are very much ________________ in some ways.
5. The Jrai are the ________________ largest group in the Central Highlands.
6. The campers roasted chicken over a(n) ________________ fire.
7. We are having a little ________________ gathering tonight and hope you can come.
8. Villagers have lived on ________________ basket weaving for years.
9. Gong is a round piece of metal that is hung in a frame, used as a(n) ________________ instrument.
10. This is a(n) ________________ area that produces good grain, olive oil, and wine.
III. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs given below.
do gather play grow live
raise keep overlook represent weave
1. Our balcony ________________ the river.
2. We were shown how to ________________ ferns and grass together to make a temporary shelter.
3. The farmer ________________ chickens and pigs.
4. Old people still only ________________ a minority of the population.
5. He learned to ________________ the guitar at the age of ten.
6. I don’t ________________ much gardening in my free time.
7. Most people ________________ in rural areas.
8. I just managed to ________________ myself from falling.
9. Tomatoes ________________ best in direct sunlight.
10. A crowd had ________________ to hear the lecturer speak.
IV. Fill in each blank of the passage with the correct word / phrase below.
a tour ethnic groups little bridges information
research cultural heritage stilt house display area
Viet Nam Museum of Ethnology in Ha Noi offers an insight into the 54 different ethnic groups of Viet
Nam in an effort to preserve 1 ________________.
2
The museum is full of ________________ about traditional Vietnamese ways of life of all the
Vietnamese 3 ________________.
4
The display hall shows everyday objects representing each ethnic group, a ________________
5
center, a library and an auditorium. Its indoor exhibition area provides you ________________
which includes the Viet, Muong, Tay, Thai, H’Mong, Yao, Khmer, Cham, and Hoa ethnic groups.
6
The outdoor ________________ presents a variety of Vietnamese homes including a Tay
7
________________ and a Viet house, each separated by a small stream and reached via
8
________________. The museum is suitable for children, and all documents and signs are translated
into English and French.
 Prepositions
V. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. The play was so boring that I could hardly keep myself ________________ falling asleep.
2. We are spending the weekend ________________ the mountains.
3. Those people come ________________ the same ethnic group.
4. I’d like to wish you every happiness ________________ your new home.
5. The strips of willow are woven ________________ baskets.
6. The houses are built ________________ stilts to prevent flooding during the rainy season.
7. The region is rich ________________ minerals and coal deposits.
8. The bridge rises almost 600 feet ________________ the water.
9. It is a lake with an island ________________ the middle.
10. Wine is made ________________ grapes.

C. Grammar
• Yes/No and Wh-questions
I. Make the appropriate Yes/No questions and short answers to complete each dialogue based on
the long answers given in brackets.
1. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: No, _______________________. (I don’t know your brother.)
2. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Yes, _______________________. (Mai eats lunch at the school canteen every weekday.)
3. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: No, _______________________. (This pen doesn’t belong to me.)
4. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Yes, _______________________. (The students in this class speak English well.)
5. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Yes, _______________________. (I slept well last night.)
6. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: No, _______________________. (Nick and Jack didn’t come to class yesterday.)
7. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: No, _______________________. (My dad won’t be at home tonight.)
8. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Yes, _______________________. (I have to study tonight.)
9. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Yes, _______________________. (The maths test was very difficult.)
10. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: No, _______________________. (The ethnic groups don’t use chemicals to dye their traditional
costumes.)
II. Make Wh-questions with where, why, when or what time, based on the answers.
1. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: At 5.
30. (I got up at 5.30 this morning.)
2. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: At the school canteen. (I ate lunch at the school canteen today.)
3. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: At 11.45. (I ate lunch at 11.45.)
4. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Because the food is good. (I eat lunch at the school canteen because the food is good.)
5. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: In Ha Noi. (My aunt and uncle live in Ha Noi.)
6. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Next summer holiday. (I’m going to visit my aunt and uncle next summer holiday.)
7. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Because it’s quiet. (Nam often studies at the library because it’s quiet.)
8. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: At that corner. (You can catch a bus at that comer.)
9. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Because they’re working on an exercise. (The students are writing in their notebooks because
they’re working on an exercise.)
10. A: ____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Around seven. (You should call me around seven.)
III. Make Wh-questions with which, whose, how or how often, based on the answers.
1. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: About twice a week. (I often read novels about twice a week.)
2. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: I walked. (I walked to school this morning.)
3. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Mai’s. (It’s Mai’s basketball.)
4. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: That one. (I want that book.)
5. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Hoi An. (I enjoy visiting Hoi An the most.)
6. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Every day. (1 check my email every day.)
7. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Not very. (The English test wasn’t very difficult.)
8. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Very well. (Mai speaks English very well.)
9. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Nam’s. (It’s Nam’s notebook.)
10. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Ten. (My younger sister is ten years old.)
IV. Read the passage, and make questions for the underlined words of the following answers.

In 2006, the house of a local family in Dong Van District, Ha Giang Province was chosen for the
background of the film “The Story of Pao”. From a distance, the house looks beautiful as a painting.
Bushes of wild but beautiful flowers in blossom on the right and an old leaning cherry blossom tree at
the gate create a romantic scene for the house. The film is about the life of a Hmong girl named Pao.
She was raised by her stepmother because her real mother left her when she was little. One day, her
stepmother died in an accident, and she began to look for her birth mother.
1. _____________________________________________________________________________?
 The house was chosen for the background of the film in 2006.
2. _____________________________________________________________________________?
 The house is in Dong Van District, Ha Giang Province
3. _____________________________________________________________________________?
 The film is about the life of a Hmong girl named Pao.
4. _____________________________________________________________________________?
 She was raised by her stepmother because her real mother left her when she was little.
5. _____________________________________________________________________________?
 She began to look for her birth mother when her stepmother died in an accident.
V. Make questions for the underlined words of these answers.
1. _____________________________________________________________________________?
 The Ha Nhi ethnic group has about 12,500 inhabitants.
2. _____________________________________________________________________________?
 They live in the provinces of Lai Chau and Lao Cai.
3. _____________________________________________________________________________?
 The Ha Nhi mainly worship their ancestors.
4. _____________________________________________________________________________?
 They live on rice cultivation of burnt-over land or terraced fields.
5. _____________________________________________________________________________?
 They use ploughs and harrows pulled by oxen and buffaloes to work in the fields.
6. _____________________________________________________________________________?
 The gardens are often close to their houses.
• Countable and uncountable nouns
VI. Write c (countable) or u (uncountable) in the brackets, then till in the gaps with a / an or some.
1. _______ rice (______)
2. _______ meat (______)
3. _______ cherry (______)
4. _______ books (______)
5. _______ egg (______)
6. _______ foot (______)
7. _______ biscuits (______)
8. _______ milk (______)
9. _______ loaf (______)
10. _______ berries (______)
VII. Choose the correct word.
1. Is there any / some coffee left?
2. How much / many apples have we got?
3. Can you get me a few / a little butter?
4. We’ve got very little / very few carrots left.
5. How much / many sugar do you take in your tea?
6. I think you eat too much / many chocolate.
7. Don’t drink too much / many coffee.
8. There is any / some milk in the fridge.
9. Can I have some / an apple?
10. There is a lot of / few meat left.
VIII. Complete the dialogues with some, any, no or a.
A
Waiter: What would you like to drink?
David: I’d like 1 ___________ apple juice, please.
Waiter: Sorry, but there’s 2 ___________ apple juice today.
David: Is there 3 ___________ orange juice?
Waiter: Yes, there is, and there’s 4 ___________ pineapple juice, too.
David: I’ll have 5 ___________ glass of pineapple juice, please.
B
Ann: Are there 6 ___________ desserts on the menu?
7 8
Waiter: Yes, there are. There’s ___________ ice-cream and there are ___________ chocolate
cakes, too.
Ann: Are there 9 ___________ nuts in chocolate cakes?
Waiter: No, there are 10 ___________ nuts in them.
Ann: That’s good. I’ll have that, please.
IX. Fill ill the dialogues with: a lot of, a few, a little, many, much or any.

A: How 1 ___________ bananas are there?
B: Not 2 ___________ but there are 3 ___________ cherries.
A: Is there 4 ___________ sugar?
B: Just 5 ___________? We need to get a bag.
A: There aren’t 6 ___________ apples left, either.
B: Let’s make a grocery list.

A: How was the party last night?
B: Fantastic! There were 1 ___________ students there.
2 3
A: Were ___________ of our teachers there? ___________ young teachers, like Miss Parsons.
There was so 4 ___________ food, too.
A: Did they have that delicious chocolate dessert this year?
B: Yes, but I only had 5 ___________ because so 6 people liked it. Kate didn’t get 7 ___________!
A: It’s a pity I didn’t come.
B: Don’t worry there are 8 ___________ birthday parties next month, so we’ll have some fun together.
X. Complete the dialogue with the words/phrases given.
a few how many how much a little
a lot lots of many much
David: Sorry, I’m late. There’s 1 ___________ traffic today.
Mary: Don’t worry. Let’s have a cup of tea.
David: Great!
Mary: 2 ___________ sugar do you have in tea?
David: 3 ___________. I love sugar.
Mary: 4 ___________ teaspoons of sugar, then?
David: Five.
Mary: Really? Oh, no. There isn’t 5 ___________ milk.
David: There’s 6 ___________. That’s enough for us. Are there any biscuits?
Mary: Let’s see. There aren’t 7 ___________ biscuits, but there are 8 ___________ cupcakes. Would
you like one?
David: Yes, please.
XI. Choose the correct words to complete the sentences.
1. I’ve got a few / a little coffee left.
2. ‘Did he drink any milk?’ -‘Not many / Not much.’
3. How much / many cheese do you want?
4. There isn’t many / much cake. How about a little / a few biscuits?
5. Can I have a few / a little apples, please?
6. How much / How many apple juice is there?
7. How much / many money do you need?
XII. Choose the correct words to complete the sentences.
1. My mum needs some / any sugar for the food.
2. There was lots of / not any food on the table. It was full.
3. She had few I little Hour, so she couldn’t make pancakes.
4. We should drink many / a lot of water every day.
5. Mum put too many / too much salt in the soup.
6. You don't need much I many butler to make this cake.
7. There is a few I a little coffee left.
8. Would you like some / a few honey in your tea?
9. Lan eats few I too many sweets. She should cut down.
10. ‘Did he eat any rice?' - ‘Not much / Not many.’

D. Reading
I. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.

Communal House (Rong House)

The Rong House can only be 1 ___________ in villages to the north of the Central Highlands, especially
in Gia Lai and Kon Turn provinces. It is a large, imposing, decorated stilt house built 2 ___________ the
middle of the village. It is where community activities 3___________, meetings, wedding ceremonies,
or praying ceremonies. It is also the place for reception of guests. The Rong House of each ethnic
group has its own architectural style, design, and decor. Yet there are shared 4 ___________. In the
village, it is often 5 ___________ house roofed with yellow-dried thatch leaves and having 8 big wood
columns. The rafters are decorated with patterns of bright colours, depicting religious scenes,
legendary stories about ancient heroes, stylized animals, and other familiar things of the village life.
The most distinction of the decor of the Rong House is the 6 ___________ of the brilliant God of Sun.
7
The Rong House is a ___________ of the culture of Central Highlanders, an age-old and stable
culture. The bigger the house, the wealthier the village is. It is a 8 ___________ of the whole village.
1. A. find B. found C. to find D. finding
2. A. on B. at C. in D. under
3. A. take place B. take on C. happens D. occurs
4. A. designs B. cultures C. customs D. features
5. A. a big B. a bigger C. the biggest D. biggest
6. A. painting B. photo C. image D. portrait
7. A. signal B. symbol C. sign D. scene
8. A. design B. respect C. proud D. pride
II. Read the text, and choose the correct answer for each gap.

Treehouses - Not Just For Kids

Have you ever wanted to hide away from the rest of your family and get a little 1 ___________ and
quiet? Do you think houses in trees are just for children? Well, think again. Here at Arborbuild we can
help you 2 ___________ the perfect treehouse.
3
David Arbor started Arborbuild in the late 1980s. He needed an office to work ___________ so he
built a treehouse in his garden. He enjoyed the project so much that he gave 4 ___________ his job as
an accountant and started his own company, building treehouses full-time. Twelve people work for
him now and he 5 ___________ treehouses in fifteen countries.
6
___________ you need an office, a storeroom, a playroom for the kids, or just somewhere to relax
and read a book, Arborbuild can help you. Our planners will help you create the perfect space. Our
workers will then build your dream - a dream that 7 ___________ a lifetime.
1. A. silence B. peace C. sleep
2. A. map B. describe C. design
3. A. in B. for C. with
4. A. up B. over C. in
5. A. built B. has built C. build
6. A. Where B. As C. If
7. A. last B. will last C. needs to last
III. Read the following passage, and answer the questions below.

Duong Lam: An Ancient Vietnamese Village

Duong Lam Village is located in Duong Lam Commune at a 45 km distance from Ha Noi. It is the
birthplace of two kings in the history of Viet Nam, Phung Hung (or Bo Cai Dai Vuong) and Ngo Quyen,
who opened up the long-term self-control and independence period of Viet Nam after Bach Dang
Victory in the year 938.
All houses, gates, village gates and wells are built of laterite creating an architectural complex, a
unique village that is typical for villages in the midlands in the North of Viet Nam.
At present, there are still nearly old 200 houses and many other historical monuments such as Phung
Hung Temple, Ngo Quyen Royal Tomb, Mong Phu Communal House, Ho Gam Hill at which Phung
Hung killed tigers to rescue villagers and the temple at which the diplomat Giang Van Minh is
worshiped.
1. Where is Duong Lam Village?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. Who were the two kings whose birthplace is Duong Lam Village?
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. What is Duong Lam typical for?
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. How many old houses are there in Duong Lam?
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. What are the famous historical monuments there?
__________________________________________________________________________________
IV. Read the text, and answer the questions.
Gong culture in the Central Highlands of Viet Nam has been recognised by UNESCO as a Masterpiece
of the Intangible Heritage of Humanity. Gong culture covers five provinces of the Central Highlands:
Kon Turn, Gia Lai, Dak Lak, Dak Nong and Lam Dong. The masters of gong culture are the ethnic
groups of Bahnar, Sedang, Mnong. The Gong Festival is held annually in the Central Highlands. In the
festival, artists from these provinces give gong performances, highlighting the gong culture of their
own province. For the ethnic groups of the Central Highlands, gongs are musical instruments of
special power. It is believed that every gong is the symbol of a god who grows more powerful as the
gong gets older. Therefore, gongs are associated with special occasions in people’s lives, such as the
building of new houses, funerals, crop-praying ceremonies. The gong sound is a way to communicate
with the gods.
1. Where is gong culture found?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. How often is the Gong Festival held in the Central Highlands?
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. What do artists do in the Gong Festival?
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. Are gongs pieces of folk music?
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. Is the gong sound a way to communicate with the ancestors?
__________________________________________________________________________________
V. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true), F (false), or NM (not mentioned).
 Traditional Costumes of Ethnic Groups in Viet Nam
Traditional costumes of Hmong women are very complicated with many bright colours and
embroidered patterns. An outfit consists of a deep V-chest shirt, two square pieces covering the front
and the back, a big belt, a headscarf, and a cone-shaped skirt. Hmong women often wear jewelry such
as earrings, necklaces, bracelets, and rings. Hmong men wear a sleeveless shirt with four pockets, and
trousers.
The Thai woman often wears a blouse and a black long skirt. The cloth belt which connects the blouse
and the skirt is made of blue, green or pink cloth. Women always wear a brocade headscarf (Khan
Pieu), and a few items of silver jewelry. The interesting fact is that a Thai girl wears a blouse with an
even number of buttons, while a married woman wears a blouse shirt with an odd number of buttons.
Both Cham men and women wear long one-piece sarongs or cloth wrappers. Men wear shirts
fastened down the centre with buttons, while women wear long-sleeved blouses. The Cham women
wear the colourful and charming long dresses on important occasions like the Kate New Year festival.
1. Each ethnic group has their own features in traditional costumes. _____
2. Women of all the three ethnic groups wear items of jewelry with their traditional costumes. _____
3. Hmong women often wear several items of jewelry along with their traditional costumes. _____
4. Hmong men often wear long-sleeved shirts with four pockets. _____
5. We can know if a Thai woman is married or not by looking at the number of buttons on their blouse
shirt. _____
6. Thai men wear a cloth belt to connect the shirt and the trousers. _____
7. The headscarf is very common with Thai women’s costumes. _____
8. Both Cham men and women have the same basic outfit. _____
9. Both Cham men and women wear shirts and skirts. _____
10. The Cham women often put on the best costumes on important occasions. _____

E. Speaking
• Everyday English
I. Choose the correct response. Then practise the short exchanges in pairs.
1. A: Do ethnic groups live in mountainous B: a/ They live in many parts of our country.
regions only? b/ They live in the north, and the Central
Highland.
2. A: Which is the largest of 54 ethnic groups in B: a/ It’s the Vietnamese.
 our country?
b/ It’s the Kinh.
3. A: Which ethnic group has the second largest B: a/ It’s the ethnic group in the north.
population? b/ It’s the Tay, I think so.
4. A: Do ethnic groups have their own B: a/ I think most of them do.
languages? b/ I think they have their own traditions.
5. A: Why do the Hmong have terraced fields? B: a/ Because they live in higher parts.
b/ Because they are not good in agriculture.
6. A: Where can we find Gong culture? B: a/ Its festival is held annually in the Central
Highlands.
b/ It covers most of the Central Highlands.
7. A: Why are gongs very important to the B: a/ Because they are thought to have special
ethnic groups there? powers.
b/ Because they are thought to be pieces of folk
music.
8. A: Why do we call it Hoa Ban Festival? B: a/ It is a time for the Thai to express their
special thanks to the Gods and ancestors.
b/ It is named after a kind of beautiful flowers in
blossoms during the festival.
9. A: Is mua sap a typical dance of the Kinh? B: a/ No, it’s of the Thai people.
b/ No, it’s not very popular now.
10. A: Do you think Hung King Temple Festival is B: a/ It’s held annually on the 10 th of the third
for the Kinh only? lunar month.
b/ It’s for all 54 ethnic groups in our country.
• Talking about the type of house you live in
II. Make answers to the Wh-questions about the type of house you live in using the cues given.
Then practise the dialogue with your partner.
A: How many rooms are there in your house?
B: (nine) ___________________________________________________________________________
2. A: How many bedrooms are there in your house?
B: (four) ___________________________________________________________________________
3. A: Is there a prayer room in your house?
B: (yes)
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. A: What different types of room does your house have?
B: (a living room, a kitchen, four bedrooms, two bathrooms, and a prayer room)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. A: Does your house have a garage?
B: (no / not have a car) ________________________________________________________________
6. A: Does your house have a garden?
B: (yes / a garden in front / a yard behind)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
III. Make answers to the Wh-questions about the type of house you live in using the cues given.
Then practise the dialogue with your partner.
1. A: How many rooms are there in your house?
B: (four bedrooms, a living room, a kitchen, two bathrooms and a hall)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. A: Where is your room? Can you describe it?
B: (upstairs / in the front of the house / a desk near the window / a computer on the desk a bed, a
wardrobe and a bookshelf)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. A: Where is your parents’ room?
B: (on the first floor / a master bedroom / a big bed, two little tables, four chairs and a big wardrobe)
4. A: Where is your sister’s room?
B: (next to mine / a desk under the window / a big bookcase, a nice bed, and her wardrobe next to
the bed)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. A: What is the most important room in your house? Describe it.
B: (the kitchen next to my parents’ room / a TV, a fridge, a gas cooker, a sink, and a big table with six
chairs)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 Talking about ethnic groups and their ways of life
IV. Talk with a partner. One plays the role of a reporter asking the questions, and the other answers
with the questions below.

A: 1 _______________________________________________________________________________
B: The H’mong speak a language that belongs to the Hmong-Dao language family.
A: 2 _______________________________________________________________________________
B: They grow mainly corn, rice, and wheat.
A: 3 _______________________________________________________________________________
B: They also plant lotus, potato, vegetable, peanut, sesame, beans, etc.
A: 4 _______________________________________________________________________________
B: The Hmong raise water buffaloes, cows, pigs, chickens, and horses.
A: 5 _______________________________________________________________________________
B: The horse is the most effective source of transportation in these mountainous areas.
A: 6 _______________________________________________________________________________
B: The Hmong handicraft is famous for embroidery, blacksmithing, and the making of horse saddles,
wooden furniture, and silver jewelry.
A: 7 _______________________________________________________________________________
B: The Hmong's New Year is in December, about one month earlier than the Vietnamese Tet.
A: 8 _______________________________________________________________________________
B: During the New Year's Festival, villagers play shuttlecock, swing, Hute and sing and dance at public
areas around the villages.
 Giving opinions
V. Give opinions or responses to opinions, using the cues given. Then practice the short exchanges
with your partner.
1. A: I think online gaming should be banned.
B: (agree / it / distract / students / studying)
_______________________________________________________________________________
2. A: Smoking should be banned in public places.
B: (agree / smoking / banned / public places)
_______________________________________________________________________________
3. A: What do you think about folk music from ethnic groups?
B: (melodies / very fascinating and sweet)
_______________________________________________________________________________
4. A: I saw a TV documentary about mna sap.
B: (a popular folk dance / the Thai people / try it someday)
_______________________________________________________________________________
5. A: Do you think traditional costumes of the ethnic minorities very time-consuming, expensive and
inconvenient in modem times?
B: (only wear them I special occasions / during festivals)
_______________________________________________________________________________
6. A: What do you think about early marriage or child marriage in ethnic groups?
B: (That custom should be banned right now)
_______________________________________________________________________________
7. A: Some ethnic groups in remote areas lace a lot of difficulties.
B: (provide them / more help / improve their lives)
_______________________________________________________________________________
8. A: Only a few girls from ethnic groups can go to university.
B: (agree partly / situation I improved / more ethnic girls / get good education now)
_______________________________________________________________________________

F. Writing
• Writing a paragraph about the things you do to help your family.
I. Rearrange the sentences in the correct order to form a paragraph about the things you can do to
help your family.
_______ A. After school, we can help our mother to prepare meals, take out garbage, hang up wet
clothes and put away the laundry.
_______ B. At the weekend, we can help our father to fix devices around the house or wash the
motorbikes or cars.
_______ C. You should tidy up your own bedroom every day.
_______ D. If you have a pet such as a dog, you can feed it or take it for a walk.
_______ E. There are many things for you to help your family.
II. Write a paragraph about the things you can do to help your family, using the outline and the cues
given.
- purpose of daily household chores: maintain the family
- small children: simple chores / keeping our own neat bedroom every day / sweeping the floor /
tidying the items around the house
- older children: more complicated tasks / washing up, laying the table for dinner, cleaning windows
or taking out garbage
- weekly activity: all the family members / a family cleaning day every week
- goal: a sense of responsibility
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
III. Write a paragraph about the things you can do to help your family, using the outline and the
cues given.
- daily activities: wash dishes, feed the pets, do the laundry, prepare meals, and take out the garbage
- weekly activities: sweep and clean the floors, clean bathrooms, wash the motorbikes, and wash the
bedding / boys - help the father / mend devices around the house; girls - help the mother the
shopping
- monthly activities: washing the windows, cleaning the refrigerator, cleaning the garage, or growing
new plants and flowers in the garden
There are many things that we can share household chores daily, weekly, or monthly.
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST (UNIT 4)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. cellphone B. cool C. caught D. cup
2. A. school B. ache C. chair D. chorus
3. A. fix B. example C. box D. next
4. A. guess B. guest C. guerrilla D. dialogue
5. A. quiet B. question C. quick D. unique
II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. We want to make sure all _______________ have the same opportunities to succeed.
A. population B. festivals C. ethnic groups D. race groups
7. As a child, I loved walking around on _______________.
A. stilts B. pieces C. poles D. wood
8. Our hotel room _______________ the harbour.
A. looked B. looked at C. looked over D. overlooked
9. Most pupils learn how to play a _______________ instrument.
A. music B. musical C. voice D. sound
10. The farmers were at work in the _______________ fields.
A. steep B. terraced C. high D. row
11. This type of wool is _______________ into fabric which will make jackets.
A. done B. mixed C. combined D. woven
12. We each have a separate bedroom but share a(n) _______________ kitchen.
A. private B. communal C. individual D. public
13. Gong is considered a(n) _______________ musical instrument of ethnic groups in the Central
Highlands.
A. unique B. existing C. available D. one-string
14. The museumas _______________ a reminder of that period in recent history.
A. provides B. helps C. serves D. deals
15. They climbed the wooden _______________ into the communal house.
A. way B. path C. pole D. staircase
16. During the festival, they fly many _______________ kites in different shapes and sizes.
A. colour B. colourless C. colourful D. colouring
17. An old woman was _______________ the goats up the mountainside.
A. riding B. taking C. herding D. running
18. _______________ does Hoa Ban Festival take place? - In Lai Chau.
A. What B. Where C. When D. How
19. _______________ do the cattle provide for the nomads? - Dairy products, meat, and clothing.
A. What B. Where C. Why D. How
20. _______________ is the festival celebrated? - Every year.
A. When B. How often C. How D. What
III. Use the correct form of the words in brackets to complete the sentences.

21. Terraced rice fields in Sa Pa are slopes claimed for cultivation in hilly or _______________ areas.
(mountain)
22. For the Muong, rice is also the main _______________ crop. (agriculture)
23. The Muong call their _______________ calendar “sach doi”, which is made from 12 bamboo sticks
that represent the 12 months. (tradition)
24. _______________ herded the livestock to high ground to keep them safe during the floods.
(village)
25. The ethnic minority groups in Viet Nam have been living in _______________ co-existence.
(peace)
IV. Complete the passage with the words given below.
 ethnic for villages dress valleys
home at with provide their
26
The villages surrounding Sa Pa are _______________ to several of Viet Nam’s 54 ethnic minority
groups, each with their own distinctive 27 _______________, customs and dialects. These tribes can all
28 29
be seen _______________ the weekend market in Sa Pa town to trade _______________ one
30 31
another. Apart from its fascinating _______________ diversity, Sa Pa is also famous
_______________ its trekking. With Viet Nam’s highest peak, Mt. Fansipan (3,143m) only 9km away
32 33
the _______________ and mountains _______________ the perfect backdrop for some great
34
treks. Some of the _______________ now have local stays where you can stay overnight with a
family in 35 _______________ traditional home.
V. Make appropriate IFA-questions based on the answers.
36. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: My mother. (My mother bought me a new coat.)
37. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Tomorrow. (We’re going to the museum tomorrow.)
38. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Because I didn’t feel good. (I stayed at home yesterday because I didn’t feel good.)
39. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: A map of the world. (I’m looking at a map of the world.)
40. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: His problems. (Jack talked about his problems.)
41. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: At 3 pm. (The history class begins at 3 pm.)
42. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Mostly insects. (Frogs eat mostly insects.)
43. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Because I need to send the greeting cards. (I have to go to the post office because 1 need to send
the greeting cards.)
44. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: Mary. (Lan saw Mary at the supermarket yesterday.)
45. A: _____________________________________________________________________________?
B: The students making noise in class. (The teacher looked at the students making noise in class.)
VI. Read the text, and choose the correct answer for each gap.
The Edible House
EATHOUSE is a house that is a garden, or a garden in the shape of a house, if you prefer. It was the
46
idea of a group of Dutch architects, who are very proud _____________ the design. The basic
structure is a set of long thin metal poles that you put together to form a house. Then you fill the
spaces between the poles with special boxes called crates. The crates are the walls of the house and
they contain plants which, eventually,47 _____________ vegetables.
The house is 48 _____________, so you don’t damage the environment when you build it. And you can
take it down and build it in a different location whenever you want to. The good thing is that you
don’t leave 49 _____________ waste when you move it. The system is very simple, so anyone who is
50
keen _____________ growing vegetables can use it. However, you’ll probably need the help of
51
_____________ friends to hold the poles and carry the crates on your first day.
52
You only need sunshine, water and a lot of loving care to look _____________ Eathouse - it isn’t as
53
hard _____________ you might think. And it doesn’t cost much either, because plastic crates and
54
growbags are cheap _____________ for most people to afford. The watering system is probably
55
_____________ expensive part.
46. A. in B. for C. of
47. A. package B. produce C. recycle
48. A. eco-friendly B. energy-efficient C. open-plan
49. A. some B. any C. a few
50. A. on B. in C. of
51. A. a little B. much C. some
52. A. at B. after C. for
53. A. as B. than C. that
54. A. much B. enough C. too
55. A. a more and more B. a more C. the most
VII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.

The Muong 56 _____________ ethnic roots with the Vietnamese people and their language is classified
57
in the Vietnamese-Muong language branch. The Muong live in _____________ areas which have
58
abundant land for _____________ wet rice. In a Muong hamlet, stilt houses are located in the
59
shade of big trees, huddle against the mountain, and _____________ out on vast rice fields. A
Muong house is designed to maximize convenient use and air ventilation to counter the warm, humid
mountain climate.
The Muong’s 60 _____________ is special. Men often wear a round-neck shirt which opens in the front
and has two pockets. Their pants have large trouser legs. The Muong women wear a long, black dress
and a white or brown shirt with a line of buttons in the front and long sleeves. They wind a white or
indigo headscarf 61 _____________ their head.
62
The Muong have _____________ folk arts including folk songs and poems, sorcerer’s worshiping
63 64
songs, tales, and riddle songs. The gong is _____________ popular musical instrument
_____________ the flute, the 65 _____________ violin, the drum, and the panpipe.
56. A. have B. share C. divide D. cut
57. A. mountain B. mount C. mountainous D. hill
58. A. growing B. harvesting C. putting D. raising
59. A. watch B. see C. stare D. look
60. A. cloth B. material C. costume D. costumes
61. A. out B. around C. at D. above
62. A. diverse B. diversity C. variety D. range
63. A. most B. the most C. more D. the more
64. A. together B. as well C. along D. along with
65. A. two strings B. two-string C. two string D. second-string
VIII. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage.
Colourful Tet Festival of Northwestern Ethnic Minorities
The Hmong in Hoa Binh province celebrate Tet one month earlier than the usual Tet in Viet Nam. It is
a tradition that the New Year starts with the rooster sound on the first day of Tet. On the previous
night, people set up a full table of food and put it on the altar to worship the ancestors. After that,
they have a big meal with wine and wait until hearing the first rooster sound. Tet of Hmong people
are full of social activities, and traditional games like horse racing, bow shooting, blow cheerfully their
traditional woodwind instrument called ‘khen’ play swings and sing in the large yard. They eat ‘Day’
cake (a plain round sticky rice cake).
To the Muong, Tet is the most important event of the year. On Tet, each family prepares a big meal to
worship their ancestors and gods. A table often requires Chung cake, honey, wine, sticky rice, boiled
meat, some money, a bowl of water and some salt. The old often wish their children health and good
luck. To make the atmosphere warm and joyful, Muong people often sing traditional songs together
during the meal.
From January 25lh, after finishing cleaning and decorating the house, the Thai will go to local markets
to shop for Tet. Of many things they buy, two sugarcane trees are compulsory. It is a custom that they
bind the two trees on the two side edges of the altar, serving as a stick connecting land and the sky,
guiding their ancestors back to the ground for Tet. On New Year's Eve, Thai people will light up their
stoves to prepare the food welcoming the New Year. Drums and gongs spread out their cheerful
melodies, and when the clock strikes 12, people in the village will go to the stream to take some
water. The tradition is that if one uses the water from the source to drink and wash the face at the
first time of the New Year, that person and the family will be healthy and lucky for the rest of the
year.
66. For the Hmong in Hoa Binh province, the New Year starts from. A. the first of January B. the first
rooster sound on the first day of the Lunar Year C. the first rooster sound on the first day of Tet D. one
month earlier than the usual Tet
67. Hmong people celebrate Tet with _____________.
A. social activities, special food dishes and traditional games
B. laying the altar with food, taking some water from the stream
C. cutting two sugarcane trees, and binding them on both sides of the altar
D. having a big meal to wait for the first rooster sound
68. The Muong will do several things to celebrate Tet except _____________.
A. preparing a big meal to worship their ancestors and gods
B. laying a table full of many dishes to worship their ancestors
C. playing music and dancing to make the atmosphere more cheerful
D. expecting their ancestors to come back with them during Tet
69. The Thai believe that _____________.
A. they need water for the rest of the year
B. water can bring them good luck at the beginning of the year
C. they need a lot of water to prepare food to welcome the New Year
D. drinking and washing the face at the source of water will bring them good luck
70. All of the following are true about the role of music during the Tet festival of the ethnic groups
except _____________.
A. play their traditional musical instruments
B. sing during the festival to make the atmosphere cheerful
C. play traditional music to welcome the ancestors
D. perform songs and dancing to celebrate the Tet festival
IX. Make answers to the Wh-questions about the type of house you live in using the cues given.
Then practise the dialogue with your partner.
71. A: What type of home do you live in?
B: (a three-story house / a pointed roof)
___________________________________________________________________________________
72. A: What material is it made from?
B: (brick, cement and steel / and / tiles / the roof)
___________________________________________________________________________________
73. A: What is the most important part of your home?
B: (kitchen / because / have dinner together / have friendly talks / the meals there)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
74. A: What activities do you do with other family members?
B: (a lot of things / share household chores / also help each other / whenever / problems happen)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
75. A: Why do you like your house?
B: (there / trees around the house / grow many plants / live close to nature)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
X. Write a paragraph about the things you can do to help your family, using the cues given.
We can share household chores based on our age.
76. we / do the washing / clean the bathroom / toilet
___________________________________________________________________________________
77. we / also feed pets / water / garden / indoor plants
___________________________________________________________________________________
78. / kitchen / we / prepare meals / lay the table
___________________________________________________________________________________
79. older children / do the washing / hang up wet clothes / fold the washing
___________________________________________________________________________________
80. every week / we / sweep the floors / vacuum the carpets / clean the bathroom sink / clean the
floors
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 UNIT 5.
OUR CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS
A. Pronunciation: /n/ and /ŋ/
I. Put the words with the underlined part into the correct column.
bank drink knew pink count once
thank finger sink cancel dinner link
funny planet language function annual benefit
gone hungry uncle mine bring king
alone single return think woman anger
/n/ /ŋ/

II. Read aloud the minimal pairs of sounds: /n/ and /ŋ/.
band bang hand hang sun sung win wing
ran rang ton tongue ban bang tin ting
III. Underline the /n/ sound, and double underline the /ŋ/ sound. Then practise reading these
sentences.
1. I can sing English songs.
2. The dog is mine, and it’s hungry now.
3. The ring on your finger is nice.
4. The pink stick is long.
5. What is her name?
6. Bring your things alone.
7. The moon is round tonight.
8. What’s wrong with dinner tonight?
9. His English name is funny.
10. Do you know the name of the language center?

B. Vocabulary
• Customs and traditions
I. Complete the sentences with the words given.
celebrations decorative items lion dances dance performances ceremony
martial arts monks offerings whale worship family reunion
1. During the wedding _________________, the bride is given many wedding gifts.
2. Many people visit that Japanese shrine to make _________________ of fruit or rice to the gods.
3. She often practises _________________ in her free time, using some elements of ground lighting.
4. Christmas is a time of _________________.
5. He has composed music for _________________ and film soundtracks.
6. _________________ festival is part of the cultural identity of Central and Southern coastal regions
in Viet Nam, which has been preserved and passed down through the generations.
7. For the Chinese, _________________ are held to chase away evil spirits.
8. There were lively New Year _________________ all over the town.
9. _________________ tend to live a simple life of prayer and work, and they usually do not have
many belongings.
10. Christmas garlands are one of the most common _________________ that are associated with
Christmas.
II. Complete the sentences with the verbs given in the correct form.
admire ring place visit chase away
pray decorate throw bloom hang
1. We are going to _________________ the kitchen next week.
2. Walk around your house 13 times to _________________ evil spirits.
3. Let us _________________ for the victims of this terrible disaster.
4. I _________________ him for his courage.
5. She _________________ the letter in front of me.
6. These flowers will _________________ all through the summer.
7. We could _________________ this picture on the wall next to the door.
8. There are several places of interest to _________________ in the area.
9. Ann’s alarm clock _________________ for half an hour before she woke.
10. The kids were outside _________________ snowballs at each other.
III. Complete the sentences with the words / phrases below.
a tradition provider death gift
according to clocks cultural a temple
unlucky take off the custom of break with tradition
1. Always take your shoes off before you enter _________________ in India.
2. Feet are considered dirty in India, so _________________ your shoes before you step into
someone’s house.
3. In India, when the mother works in the fields or a factory, a grandmother commonly is the chief
_________________ of daytime care for a small child.
4. _________________ tradition, the arranged marriage is a traditional feature of every community in
India, but now in big cities young couples _________________ by following “love marriages”.
5. There is _________________ that Indian people never eat with their left hands, and never pass on
anything to an Indian with your left hand.
6. The lion dance is one of the most famous Chinese _________________ traditions.
7. When greeting, the Chinese have _________________ bowling, folding their hands on chest.
8. When the Chinese come on a visit, they usually give a small _________________, such as some
wine, tea or candy.
9. If you happen to visit a Chinese family, you should bear in mind not to give an odd number of
presents, because odd numbers are considered _________________ in China.
10. You should not give presents in number of 4 or in black-and-white color, which are considered as
symbols of _________________ in China.
11. The Chinese should not be presented with _________________ because they also symbolize
death and funerals.
IV. Complete the text with the words given below. There are two extra words that you do not need.
events holiday displays tradition contests
celebration performances legend festivals calendar
Tet
Tet, or the Lunar New Year, is the largest and most important traditional 1 _______________ in Viet
Nam. The Vietnamese celebrate Tet sometimes between late January and early February, depending
on the lunar 2 _______________. It’s a(n) national 3 _______________ and celebrations can last from
seven to ten days. All over the country, millions of people travel long distances to celebrate Tet with
4
their families. In big cities like Ho Chi Minh City, Ha Noi, Hue, etc., there are popular
5
_______________ including flower _______________, light shows, dragon dances, puppet shows,
book fairs, classical music 6 _______________ and even cake 7 _______________. There are also some
8
amazing firework _______________.
 Expressions with custom and tradition
V. Rewrite the sentences given about the Thai traditions and customs, using the following
expressions. You can add some words or make changes.

- there's a tradition that

- according to the tradition
- follow the tradition of
- break with tradition by
- have the custom of
1. Visitors should dress neatly in all religious shrines and temples, and never enter in shorts or
sleeveless shirts.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. Never climb onto a Buddha image to take a photograph or do anything that might indicate a lack of
respect.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. A monk is not allowed to touch money, so if a man wishes to give money to a monk, he must place
it in the bowl.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. The “wai” - a slight bow with the palms together and the fingertips touching the face - is a way of
showing respect or thanks, but you can smile or nod.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Shoes should be removed when entering a private Thai home as a sign of respect.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. You should never point your feet at someone or an object as this is considered disrespectful.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. It is considered very rude to touch people on the head, but now you can touch young children on
their heads.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
8. You can use the word “Khun” as the best way to address someone and it is used in front of the
name, usually the first name.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
• Prepositions
V. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. Let us pray ___________ those who are not so fortunate to survive as ourselves.
2. Our school is widely admired ___________ its excellent teaching.
3. At this time of the year, the flowers are ___________ bloom.
4. The monks made offerings ___________ the gods and maintained the temples.
5. The children were finally reunited ___________ their families.
6. This booklet gives information ___________ local customs.
7. There is a strong tradition ___________ sports at the school.
8. It’s the custom ___________ the groom’s father to pay for the wedding.
9. There are major cultural differences ___________ the west and the east.
10. The tradition has been passed ___________ from father to son ___________ generations.
C. Grammar
• Articles (a / an, the, and zero article)
I. Complete the sentences with a / an, the or ʘ (zero article).
1. My uncle is ___________ engineer at ___________ local garage.
2. ___________ Statue of Liberty is in ___________ New York.
3. ___________ happiness doesn’t come from ___________ money.
4. Call ___________ fire station! There’s ___________ fire!
5. Nobody saw ___________ shark as it swam past ___________ boat.
6. There’s ___________ mouse on ___________ table in ___________ kitchen.
7. I love these shoes. Are they made of ___________ leather?
8. Have you ever visited ___________ capital of Viet Nam? It’s beautiful.
II. Tick the correct sentences, and correct any errors by adding or removing the definite article.
1. Have you ever been to the Japan? ___________________________________
2. It was best pizza I’ve ever eaten. ___________________________________
3. She speaks French and Japanese. ___________________________________
4. How many countries belong to United Nations? ___________________________________
5. London is situated on the River Thames. ___________________________________
6. I really enjoyed book you gave me. ___________________________________
III. Complete the text with a, an. the or ʘ (zero article).
1 2 3 4
I live in ________ town in ________ east of England. ________ town is called ________.
Scarborough. It’s nearly 400 km from London. It’s on 5 ________ coast. It’s got 6 ________ population
7 8 9
of 50,000. It’s ________ interesting place to live. There’s ________ beautiful beach and in
10 11
________ summer there are lots of ________ tourists. I live in ________ suburbs. My house is
about ten minutes from 12 ________ town centre.
IV. Choose the correct article a /an, the or ʘ (zero article).
1. Sergio Arau is an / the artist, musician, and director.
2. He was born in the / ʘ Mexico City, a / the capital of a / ʘ Mexico.
3. In 2004, he made a / the film called A Day Without a Mexican.
4. A / The film is about a / ʘ Mexican immigrants in a / ʘ California.
5. About 31 % of a / the people who live in California are the / ʘ Mexican.
6. A Day Without a Mexican won an / ʘ award at a / the Cartagena Film Festival.
V. Complete the text with a, an, the or ʘ (no article).
1
________ plane carrying 2 ________ actor, 3 ________ politician, a monk and a cleaner is going to
4 5 6
crash. There are only ________ three parachutes. ________ actor says, I entertain ________
7 8
millions of people, so I should live.’ He takes one of ________ parachutes and jumps out of
________ plane. The politician says, ‘I’m 9 ________ most intelligent person in 10 ________ England, so
11 12
I should live.’ He also takes ________ parachute and jumps. The monk says, “I’m ________ old
13 14
man and I have lived ________ good long life. You take ________ last parachute.” The cleaner
15 16
says, ‘Don’t worry. The most intelligent man in ________ country just jumped out with my
________ rucksack on his back.’
VI. Complete the article about Central Park with a/an, the or ʘ (zero article)

Central Park
Central Park was 1 ________ first specially made public park in 2 ________ USA. 3 ________ park was
built between 1857 and 1873, right in 4 ________ centre of 5 ________ New York. Before that, the
area was home to around 1,600 immigrants, mainly 6 ________ Irish farmers, German gardeners and
African Americans. 7 ________ immigrants had to move, and their homes were destroyed to make
8
space for ________ park.
The city held 9 ________ competition to design the park. 10 ________ competition was won by Calvert
Vaux, 11 ________ British architect, and his business partner, Frederick Law Olmsted.
12
Then the city employed 20,000 workers, mainly immigrants from Ireland and ________ Germany
13
(perhaps the same people who homes were destroyed), to plant trees in ________ new park. By
14
1865, there were more than seven million visitors a year. The Central Park zoo opened in 1864, with
________ animals from all over 15 ________ world.
Nowadays, 16 ________ New Yorkers are not the only people who enjoy the park. It receives about 35
million visitors from outside the city every year and is 17 ________ important tourist attraction.

D. Reading
I. Read the information about customs in some countries, and then give the answers to the
questions.
Different Customs
Canada and the US: Don’t arrive early if you’re invited to someone’s home.
Indonesia: Never point to anything with your foot.
Korea: Don’t pass something to an older person or superior with only one hand.
Muslim countries: Don’t eat with your left hand.
Samoa: Don’t eat while you’re walking in public.
Thailand: Never touch anyone except a child on the head.
1. In which country is foot considered a dirty part of the body?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. In which country should we pay attention to eating in public?
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. In which country / countries should we eat with the right hand?
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. In which country / countries shouldn’t we arrive early at a party?
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. In which country should you show high respect to older people or superiors?
__________________________________________________________________________________
II. Read the text and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).
In Japan, take off your shoes at the entrance to all homes, and most businesses and hotels. Usually, a
rack will be provided to store your shoes, and pair of guest slippers will be put nearby; many Japanese
bring a pair of indoor slippers just in case, though.
Never wear slippers when you need to step onto a tatami mat (used in most Japanese homes and
hotels), and be careful to remove the toilet slippers waiting for you in the bathroom. It is extremely
bad form, for example, to reenter the main room of a house wearing slippers that have been running
across a dirty area.
Unlike in western cultures, the Japanese bath is used after you have washed and rinsed, and feel like
soaking in extra-hot water for 10, 20, 30 minutes. If you happen to be invited into a Japanese
household, you will be given the honor of using the bath first, usually before dinner. Be extra careful
so as not to dirty the water in any way because of its importance.
1. Only take off your shoes when you enter a Japanese house. ______
2. Be careful with your slippers when you come back to the main room. ______
3. You mustn’t wear slippers stepping onto a tatami mat. ______
4. The Japanese bath is also used for washing and rinsing. ______
5. The bath plays an important part in the Japanese life. ______
III. Read the text and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).
Deepavali - The Festival of Lights
Every year around late October or early November, Hindus all over the world celebrate Deepavali. It is
the most important festival in Hinduism. In Singapore it is called the ‘Festival of Lights in Singapore’
and it is a public holiday. People wear new clothes and paint their hands with temporary tattoos of
henna art. They also make and share a variety of special sweets and snacks.
In Little India in Singapore, the streets are lit up with bright lights and decorated with festive colours.
There are street bazaars, parades and concerts. The stalls sell flowers, traditional oil lamps, beautiful
saris, jewellery, traditional art and crafts, and traditional sweets. There are also a number of cultural
activities for people to take part in, such as the Indian Heritage and Craft Exhibition.
1. Deepavali is on the same day every year. ______
2. Only people in Singapore celebrate Deepavali. ______
3. Hindus don’t work during this festival. ______
4. People eat special food during Deepavali. ______
5. Deepavali is a colourful festival. ______
IV. Read the text about family traditions in Viet Nam, and do the tasks that follow.
Marriage and family are very important in Viet Nam. In the countryside, parents often arrange
marriages; divorce remains uncommon, though is more frequent in cities. In traditional Vietnamese
families, roles are rigid. The man of the house is primarily responsible for the family’s economic well-
being. Older children help to look after younger siblings. Discipline is viewed as a parental duty.
The woman of the house looks after her parents, husband and children. In rural areas, women also do
much agricultural work. Vietnamese women live by the “four virtues”: hard work, beauty, refined
speech and excellent conduct.
The Vietnamese attach great importance to two traditional family obligations: to care for their
parents in their old age and to worship them after death. In each Vietnamese family, there is at least
one altar on which there are the pictures of their ancestors. Family members worship their ancestors
because they think parents after death will go to live in another world and this altar is the place where
the ancestors’ souls live in. As a result, every day Vietnamese people lay flowers or sometimes fruits
on the altar for the belief that those ancestors will enjoy them.
Task 1: Match each word with its definition, writing the answer in each blank.
1. sibling (n) ______ A. the part of a person that is believed to continue exist after the
body is dead
2. virtue (n) ______ B. to pray to or to show respect for someone like a god
3. worship (v) ______ C. behaviour which shows high moral standards
4. altar (n) ______ D. the table used in ceremonies in a church, temple or family
5. soul (n) ______ E. a brother or a sister
Task 2. Read the passage again, and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).
6. In traditional Vietnamese families, the man has to support the family. ______
7. Children have to share housework with their parents. ______
8. Women in the countryside only looks after their families. ______
9. Children have to take care of their parents in their old age and to worship them after death.
______
10. Every day Vietnamese people lay flowers or sometimes fruits on the altar because they believe
those ancestors will eat the offerings. ______
V. Read the passage and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).

Culturally, in Thailand there are many practices and beliefs that are very different to those from other
countries.
The Royal Family of Thailand is held in very high respect. Making impolite remarks about any of the
royal family is against the law.
The traditional greeting is with two hands prayer-like palms together known as a “wai”. If a local gives
a “wai” to you, to be polite, it is nice to “wai” back. A “wai”, however, is always appreciated.
Thai culture places certain spiritual importance to certain parts of the body. You should not point your
feet at people, touch people with your feet, prop your feet up on seats or tables or step over people
sitting on the ground. The head, in contrast, has a much higher importance. Avoid touching people on
the head as this is considered very rude. You should also avoid sitting on pillows meant for head rests.
In some rural areas, food is often served while seated on the ground. Stepping over food on the
ground is another extremely rude gesture and will surely embarrass your Thai host.
Throughout all of Thailand, if you notice a pile of shoes at or near an entrance to a home, shop or
guesthouse, you should remove your shoes before entry; it is considered aide not to do so.
1. All people in Thailand respect the Royal Family highly. ______
2. A local person gives a “wai” to you, and you respond by saying “hello” if you are a foreigner.
 ______
3. The feet may be considered to be the dirtiest part of the body. ______
4. Never touch people on the head because the head is considered to rest on the pillow. ______
5. Remember to remove you shoes before entering a building. ______
VI. Read the text and answer the questions.

Etiquette in Thailand
Thai people are known for their friendliness and hospitality. However, if you visit Thailand there are a
few things you should know about Thai etiquette to make sure you don’t offend anyone by saying or
doing the wrong thing.
First of all, when you meet someone, the traditional greeting is to put your palms together in front of
you and bow your head slightly. This is called the Wai and it shows respect.
Secondly, you should always remove your shoes when you enter someone’s home or a temple. You
have to be very careful with your feet and never show the soles of them to anyone and keep them on
the floor at all times. Also, you should never touch anyone’s head or pass something over another
person’s head. This is disrespectful. Showing affection in public is also seen as rude and inappropriate
behaviour. Furthermore, you should avoid losing your temper or showing negative emotions in public
as this will reflect badly on you and it will embarrass your Thai friends.
Finally, you should wear smart and modest clothes. Shorts and revealing tops are not worn in public
except on the beach. Keep these social rules in mind whenever you visit Thailand and you can enjoy
your visit without offending anyone.
1. What is the traditional way for people to greet each other in Thailand?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. What is this greeting called?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. What should you do before you enter a temple in Thailand?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. Why should you avoid touching another person’s head?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. What sort of behaviour will embarrass your Thai friends?
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. How should you dress in Thailand?
___________________________________________________________________________________
VII. Read the passage about ancestor worship and do the tasks that follow.
Ancestor Worship
Ancestor worship is a religious practice based on the belief that one's ancestors possess supernatural
powers, such as gods, angels, saints, or demons.
Ancestor worship in some cultures honors the deeds, memories, and sacrifice of the dead. Much of
the worship includes visiting the ancestors at their graves, making offerings to them to provide for
their welfare in the afterlife.
Spirit money (also called Hell Notes) is sometimes burned as an offering to ancestors as well for the
afterlife. The living may regard the ancestors as "guardian angels" to them, perhaps in protecting
them from serious accidents, or guiding their path in life.
Families burned incense every day on the domestic ancestral altar. In China, the family altar houses
the family spirit tablets. On the outer surface of the spirit tablet is engraved the year of the death, his
full name, and the name of the son who erects the tablet.
Anniversary rites take place on the death date of each major deceased member of the family every
year. Sacrificial food is offered, and living members of the family participate in the ceremony in ritual
order based on age and generation.
Task 1. Match each word with its definition, writing the answer in each blank.
1. practice _________ A. the life which some people believe begins after death
2. deed _________ B. a substance that produces a sweet smell when burned,
especially in religious ceremonies
3. afterlife _________ C. an action
4. incense _________ D. a ceremony, often for religious purposes
5. rite _________ E. doing something many times
Task 2. Read the passage again, and then answer the following questions.
1. Why does ancestor worship become a religious practice?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. What are the activities of the worship?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Why do people bum spirit money for their dead ancestors?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. What can we see on the spirit tablet?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. When do anniversary rites for the major deceased member of the family take place?
___________________________________________________________________________________
VIII. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Melon Farmers
Do you like water melons? Well, after a week at the Water Melon Festival in Chinchilla, Australia, you
might not like them so much.
Chinchilla is the water melon capital of Australia and produces an amazing number of melons. This is
because the ground here is excellent for growing them. It holds water well and this is really important
for growing melons.
Every two years in the middle of February the people of Chinchilla hold a special festival and
participants come from far away. A visit to the festival is very entertaining. If you go this year, you’ll
see a crazy competition where people smash melons with their heads. There are easier competitions
too, such as melon throwing and melon skiing (where you put your feet in a melon and get pulled
along by a rope). Of course, there are cooking competitions for meals using melons and a lot of melon
eating too.
The festival started in 1994 and is getting bigger each year. If you want to go to the festival in
Chinchilla, you must book your ticket soon. This year they are expecting between six and seven
thousand people. That’s a lot of water melons.
1. All / Some of the events are difficult.
2. There has been a melon festival in Chinchilla for over / under 20 years.
3. There are some unusual people / competitions at the festival.
4. Melons grow well in Chinchilla because there is a lot of rain / good earth.
5. The festival is only for local people / open to everyone.
IX. Read the texts and do the tasks that follow.
The Boryeong Mud Festival
1 2
The Boryeong Mud Festival is a(n) __________ festival that takes __________ every summer in
Boryeong, South Korea. The festival began in 1998, after scientists discovered that the mud in the
3
area was full __________ beneficial minerals for the skin, and they developed several kinds of
cosmetics made from it. The festival is one of the most popular 4 __________ in South Korea.
5
__________ preparation for the festival, people bring mud in big trucks from nearby fields to a local
beach and deposit it in what they call a ‘mud experience land’. People come from all over South
Korea, and from as far as the USA, to experience the mud and to have fun. There is a range of
activities to choose from, including mud sliding, mud skiing, mud wrestling and mud massages. There
is 6 ________ coloured mud available for body painting, and a health centre where people can go for
7
massages and acupuncture. In the evenings, there are song contests and __________ concerts.
There is also a spectacular firework 8 __________. The Boryeong Mud Festival is a great festival that
contributes to developing the local economy.
Task 1. Fill in each blank with the correct answer A, B, or C.
1. A. year B. annual C. every
2. A. part B. action C. place
3. A. in B. from C. of
4. A. times B. events C. meetings
5. A. For B. On C. In
6. A. as well B. too C. also
7. A. live B. living C. alive
8. A. parade B. activity C. display
Task 2. Read the text, and mark the sentences true (T), false (F), or not mentioned (NM).
1. The Boryeong Mud Festival is an annual festival. __________
2. Only scientists can attend it. __________
3. The mud festival is only popular with South Koreans. __________
4. You can get health care at the mud festival. __________
5. There aren’t many things to do at night during the festival. __________
6. The festival lasts a week. __________
X. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true) or F (false).
If you travel around the world, you will learn that every country has different customs. It is what
makes travelling so interesting. If you visit Thailand in April, you will see the Songkran celebrations -
and you might get very wet. Songkran is the Thai New Year, and it is traditional to throw buckets of
water at passers-by on the street. If you did that in London, you might get arrested.
Different countries have different laws, so you have to be careful. Of course, stealing and murder are
illegal everywhere, but some laws are surprising. In England, if you buy a stamp with the Queen’s
head on it, you must make sure you stick it on your letter the right way up. It is illegal to stick the
stamp on a letter upside-down. It shows that you do not respect the Queen. Many laws in England
were made centuries ago. As time passes, they are not important any more, but they have not been
changed. For example, did you know that it is illegal to wear a top hat in the city of London? And in
the seventeenth century Oliver Cromwell banned eating mince pies on Christmas Day. Mince pies are
a traditional Christmas treat, so millions of people in the UK broke that law every Christmas then.
There are hundreds of laws like this, which seem stupid to US now. Since 1965 over 2,000 old laws
have been changed, but there are thousands more - so be careful.
1. Songkran is an annual festival in Thailand. __________
2. You mustn’t use stamps with the Queen’s head on envelopes. __________
3. Some laws are old-fashioned and out of date. __________
4. Many people commit a crime at Christmas in England now. __________
5. All the silly laws have been changed. __________
XI. Read the texts and do the tasks that follow.
A. Sand Sculpting Festival
“I’m here with my family at the Sand Sculpting Festival on Frankston Beach, Melbourne, Australia.
We’re staying for the weekend. The festival lasts from the end of December to the end of April and
the theme of the sculptures changes every year. This year the sculptures show creatures and scenes
from the age of the dinosaurs. There are several dozen huge dinosaurs made of 3,500 tons of sand.
You might think you are in Jurassic Park! You can watch the sculptors at work, too. It’s fascinating. I
fancy having a go myself. The exhibition opens every day at 10 am, so tomorrow I’m making my own
dinosaur at the Sand Workshop - with a little professional help.” Laura
B. Roswell UFO Festival
“My friends and I are having a fantastic time at this year’s Roswell UFO Festival in New Mexico, USA.
It’s a four-day event that takes place every year in early July. Some people believe that an alien
spaceship - a UFO - crashed in a field near Roswell in 1947 and the festival celebrates that event. Not
everyone believes this story, of course, but the festival is still a lot of fun. Everyone dresses up as
aliens for the Alien Costume Competition. The costumes are fabulous and even family pets take part.
There are dogs dyed blue and tortoises covered in aluminium foil. Today we’re watching the parade
down Main Street and tomorrow the firework display starts at 9 pm. They say it’s really amazing. So
are some of the aliens you meet.” Bruce
C. Winter Carnival
“Here in Saranac Lake, New York it’s -5°c and people are celebrating their Winter Carnival. The festival
takes place at the beginning of February each year and lasts 10 days. The local people build an
enormous ice palace as a home for Sara the Snowy Owl, the town mascot. The festival begins with the
crowning of the Winter Carnival King and Queen. Lots of fun events follow, including races and
treasure hunts. Right now, we are watching the parade. There are dozens of colourful floats carrying
people in fancy costumes. The whole town comes alive. Tonight we’re watching the firework display
over the Ice Palace. What a cool celebration!” Sue
Task 1. Which festival ...
1. offers a chance to see people and animals in weird costumes? ____________________
2. includes making something yourself? ____________________
3. celebrates me town's good luck symbol? ____________________
4. includes a display of sculptures? ____________________
5. has a competition? ____________________
Task 2. Answer the questions.
1. Why do people enjoy attending Roswell UFO Festival?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. How do people celebrate the Winter Carnival in Saranac Lake, New York?
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
Task 3. Find words or phrases in the texts which mean:
1. to continue for some time (text A) ____________________
2. to give it a try (text A) ____________________
3. to participate (text B) ____________________
4. huge (text C) ____________________
5. lots of (text C) ____________________

E. Speaking
• Everyday English
I. Choose the correct response. Then practise the short exchanges in pairs.
1. A: How can we greet people in England? B: a/ Can you speak English? b/ Simply say
‘hello’ when you meet a friend.
2. A: I think bowing for greetings in Japan is B: a/I don’t think so. It expresses your
ridiculous. appreciation and respect to the other. b/ The
longer and deeper the bow, the more respect
you are showing.
3. A: How do the Maori in New Zealand greet B: a/ When in Rome, do as the Romans do. b/
each other? They rub or touch each other’s noses.
4. A: When can we eat at the dining table in B: a/ We wait until the host says ‘Bon appétit’.
France? b/ We wait until the host invites US to the table.
5. A: Do ethnic people wear their traditional B: a/ They only wear them on special occasions.
costumes every day? b/ They wear ao dai on special occasions.
6. A: Is worshipping ancestors our good B: a/ That’s right. It’s our good tradition. b/ It’s a
tradition? great habit, I think.
7. A: Why don’t we have firecrackers on Lunar B: a/ We shouldn’t break the rules.
New Year’s Eve? b/ It’s dangerous and harmful.
8. A: I don’t know what to do when I am in a B: a/ You should watch other people or ask the
foreign country. host.
b/ You can follow your own way in your country.
9. A: Why is the xoe dance very important to the B: a/ It’s a spiritual tradition of Thai ethnic
Thai people? people.
b/ The importance of xoe is expressed in an old
Thai song.
10. A: Do you think it’s important to continue B: a/ Sure. All of us have our own customs and
 family customs and traditions? traditions.
b/ Certainly. They must be passed down from
generation to generation.
• Talking about a normal family event
II. Complete the dialogue with the responses below. There is one extra that you do not need.
A. My father invited the guests, my mother and my aunt went shopping and then cooked the
dishes. I helped to set up the tables and the chairs.
B. She is the first grandchild of my parents.
C. It is the party to welcome a new member of our family – the birth of my niece. My elder
sister gave birth to a healthy baby girl.
D. Everyone brought a lot of presents to the baby, and the parents of the baby thanks to the
guests.
E. It was really a day full of happiness. The arrival of the baby brought us all together. It was a
very happy event for our whole family, close relatives and neighbors.
F. My father said that it was a special occasion and we held a big party at our house when the
baby was one month old.
G. All the family members, the closest relatives and some of our neighbors.
Susan: What is the most memorable event in your life, Mai?
Mai: 1 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Susan: Where and when did it happen?
Mai: 2 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Susan: How is the baby special to your father?
Mai: 3 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Susan: Who joined with you in the party?
Mai: 4 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Susan: What were the preparations for the party?
Mai: 5 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Susan: Do you like it? Why?
Mai: 6 ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
• Giving advice
III. Match sentences 1-6 with responses a-g. There is one extra response.
 1. Whatever you do, don’t forget it. ______ a. I don’t want to talk about it.
2. I think you should tell your parents. ______ b. No, that’s cheating.
3. What should I do? ______ c. OK, I will.
4. Can I copy your homework, Hoa? ______ d. Yes, definitely.
5. What’s the matter? ______ e. What? I can’t do that!
6. Are you sure? ______ f. You should tell someone.
g. OK, I won’t.
IV. Match the problems 1-6 with the advice a-f.
1. I’m too tired to concentrate at school in the mornings. ______
2. I’m going to miss the final episode of my favourite TV programme. ______
3. A boy keeps phoning my mobile and I don’t want to talk to him. ______
4. I want to go on holiday in the summer but I haven’t got enough money. ______
5. I’ve offended my friend. I want to apologize, but he won’t talk to me. ______
6. I borrowed a T-shirt from a friend and now I’ve lost it. ______
a. I think you should buy her a new one.
b. I think you ought to tell the phone company.
c. Why don’t you ask a friend to record it?
d. If I were you, I’d send him a card to say sorry.
e. I don’t think you should stay up so late in the evenings.
f. In my opinion, you should get a part-time job.
V. Complete the dialogue with the sentences given below. There is one extra sentence.
a. I can’t do that.
b. What should I do, Mai?
c. What’s up?
d. I’m sure he’ll understand.
e. I don’t want to talk about it.
f. Whatever you do, don’t forget.
g. That’s for sure.
h. Are you sure?
Mai: You look upset, Nick. What’s the matter?
Nick: Nothing. 1 ___________________________
Mai: Come on. 2 ___________________________
Nick: Well, I’ve just got this text messages from a boy in my class. He wants me to take a photo of the
maths exam paper tomorrow and then send it to him. 3 ___________________________
Mai: Well, whatever you do, don’t cheat.4 ___________________________ They can expel you for
that.
Nick: Right.
Mai: And I think you should tell your teacher.
Nick: What? Tell on him? 5 ___________________________
Mai: OK, but you should tell him what you think.
Nick: 6 ___________________________
Mai: Yes, definitely. Don’t worry.7 ___________________________
Nick: Yes, you’re right. Thanks, Mai.

F. Writing
• Writing an email to give advice on taking part in a festival
Write an email to advise your pen friend about participating in the Huong Pagoda Festival, using the
cues given.
- wear appropriate clothes / shoes / because / not enter the pagoda / when / wear shorts or
miniskirts
- climb up many temples and pagodas / the high hills / so many steps
- bring along / food / mineral water / avoid buying necessities outside
- keep personal and valuable items / there / some thieves and robbers
- have appropriate behaviours / avoid / play games / cards / outside the official area
Dear Jack,
I hear you would like to participate in the Huong Pagoda Festival, and I want to give you some pieces
of advice for you to consider.
1. First, you should __________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. ________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. ________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. ________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. ________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
Best wishes
Nam
 TEST (UNIT 5)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. bamboo B. blooming C. wood D. tool
2. A. pagoda B. drop C. offering D. bonding
3. A. carp B. martial C. marvelous D. careful
4. A. drink B. income C. pink D. uncle
5. A. boss B. scissors C. blossoms D. assistant
II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. The ‘wai’ is the traditional __________ of people in Thailand.
A. goodbye B. hello C. greeting D. greetings
7. When two Maori people meet, they __________ each other’s noses.
A. touch B. feel C. take D. kiss
8. Do you know the __________ way to welcome people in Tibet?
A. custom B. customer C. customary D. tradition
9. The ‘xoe’ dance is a spiritual __________ of Thai ethnic people.
A. customs B. tradition C. habit D. dancing
10. In Viet Nam you shouldn’t use only the first name to __________ people older than you.
A. speak B. talk C. say D. Address
11. We are going to prepare __________ sticky rice served with grilled chicken for the celebration.
A. five colours B. five-colours C. five-colour D. five-coloured
12. A tradition is something special that is __________ through the generations.
A. passed B. passed to C. passed down D. passed out
13. The village festival helps to strengthen our community __________.
A. experiences B. bonds C. reactions D. agreements
14. We have to __________ our shoes when we go inside a pagoda.
A. take off B. give off C. turn off D. put on
15. In Australia, you shouldn’t __________ on a person’s accent.
A. comment B. criticize C. hate D. dislike
III. Fill in each blank of the passage with the correct word below.
activities presentation water-throwing tradition celebrations
 festival enjoyment heat wishes fortune

Thai New Year (Songkran Festival)

16
The traditional Thai New Year is celebrated in April each year. Thailand adopted this __________
with the belief that the sun re-entered Aries and finished its orbit round the earth on April 13. In
17 18
Thailand, this __________ is celebrated for three days from April 13 to April 15. Before the
__________, people will clean their houses in the hope of casting away any bad luck of the old year,
19
so that good __________ will enter their new lives instead. Food and sweets will be prepared in
advance for merit making and for treating guests.
20
The Songkran celebrations will begin with food __________ to the monks who will walk along the
21
streets in the early morning to receive food and other offerings. One of the most popular
22
__________ for young people is to convey their best __________ to their elders by pouring water
23
onto them or their palms. After this, it is time for children and young people to have full
__________ with water-throwing, dancing and folk games. Do not expect to escape the 24 __________
25
activities, these take place on every street in Thailand. They can be a welcome break to the
__________ of the dry season, but if you wish to stay dry it is best to stay indoors!
IV. Complete the gaps in the following short exchanges with a, an, the or ʘ (no article).
26. A: Where did you have __________ lunch?
B: We went to __________ restaurant.
27. A: Did you have __________ nice holiday?
B: Yes, it was __________ best holiday I’ve ever had.
28. A: Do you go to __________ cinema very often?
B: No, not very often. But I watch a lot of films on __________ television.
29. A: It was __________ nice day, wasn’t it?
B: Yes, it was beautiful. We went for a walk by __________ sea.
30. A: Can you tell me where __________ Room 205 is, please?
B: It’s on __________ second floor.
V. Complete the sentences with the words below and add a, an, the or ʘ (no article).
January doctor weather Viet Nam architect
camera right elephants noise sun
31. My house is on __________ of the road.
32. It’s so cold in Canada. They really hate __________.
33. During their safari in Namibia they saw a lot of __________.
34. He loved buildings and wanted to be __________.
35. I bought a camera and a bag. Then we went travelling and I dropped and broke __________.
36. When my dad was twenty, he travelled around __________.
37. He’s working in December, but he’ll be on holiday in __________.
38. Let me see the sick man! I can help. I’m __________.
39. We didn’t have a map to guide us, so we used __________.
40. I heard a small noise. After a while, __________ got louder.
VI. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Khau Vai Love Market Festival - Beauty of Love

41
Khau Vai Commune, located in Meo Vac District, is __________ to ethnic minority groups of Giay,
42
Nung and Muong. The love market festival is held __________ Lunar March 26th and 27th with the
participation of a large number of local people. The festival features food and drink culture, song
43
__________ and folk games. Ethnic 44 __________, jewelry, ethnic musical instruments, culture and
art publications are 45 __________ at the market, reflecting activities of the local people.
The story concerns two temples in the area of Khau Vai Market. Once upon a time, there was a boy
and a girl born from two different places of the Dong Van Plateau. Since forbidden to get married
46
__________ the two families, they decided 47 __________ home to come and settle down together
in Khau Vai, a prosperous land with green plants.
Since then, on every Lunar March 27th, Khau Vai has attracted couples of different ages, including
those who seek 48 __________ for the first time.49 __________, most of them are those who love each
other very much but cannot marry 50 __________ different reasons.
41. A. family B. home C. house D. hometown
42. A. in B. at C. on D. during
43. A. performances B. rituals C. ceremonies D. celebrations
44. A. cloth B. materials C. costume D. costumes
45. A. in show B. on display C. in display D. on stage
46. A. between B. on C. by D. because of
47. A. leave B. to leave C. leaving D. left
48. A. partners B. couples C. lover D. wives
49. A. Otherwise B. Therefore C. Moreover D. However
50. A. of B. for C. at D. from
VII. Read the articles about the two famous festivals in Viet Nam, and then decide whether the
statements are true (T) or false (F).
Nha Trang Sea Festival

Nha Trang Sea Festival takes place every two years for a week in around June in Nha Trang City,
Khanh Hoa Province. This is a colorful and dynamic sea festival which honors natural beauty of Nha
Trang – the charming city overlooking the sea. The first Nha Trang Sea Festival was held in 2003
when Nha Trang Beach was proclaimed as a member of the Most Beautiful Bays in the World Club.
Coming to Nha Trang at the time of festival, visitors will be able to take part in various cultural and
recreational events. First of all is an abundant opening ceremony by Vietnamese and international
art groups. Besides, many interesting activities also take place during the festival like seafood
competition, wine festival, beach volleyball, art kite flying festival, underwater group wedding, etC.
The festival is also a great chance for tourists to know more about Viet Nam through special events.
Nha Trang Sea Festival will definitely give you an unforgettable impression about Viet Nam’s
charming beauty as well as time-honored traditional values.
Ha Long Carnival

The festival is attended by thousands of actors, dancers, singers, musicians as well as students. Most
of them are the local residents of Ha Long Bay. The highlight of Ha Long Carnival is street parades with
variety of colorful costumes and dance on wide streets along the coast. Moreover, a laser, sound and
water performance combining with a sparkling aerial firework show is an amazing party of light and
colour which tourists shouldn’t miss at the festival. Ha Long Carnival is the heart of the series of
events within the schedule of Ha Long Tourism Week - a tourism promotional celebration which has
been held yearly for six years. It’s usually taken place in a week in late-April to early-May. On the
occasion of the 6th celebration in 2012, Ha Long Bay was officially recognized as one of New 7
Wonders of Nature of the world by the New 7 Wonder Organization.
51. Both festivals are held yearly at the two famous sea cities in Viet Nam. _______
52. Coming to the two festivals, visitors can take part in various cultural and recreational events.
_______
53. Only professional actors or actresses can take part in Ha Long Carnival. _______
54. Nha Trang and Ha Long are internationally well known for their natural beauty. _______
55. Ha Long Carnival is held in a week (late-April to early-May), and Nha Trang Sea Festival in June.
_______
56. Weddings can be held in both festivals. _______
57. Ha Long Carnival is older than Nha Trang Sea Festival. _______
58. There are several sports events held in both festivals. _______
59. Both festivals have the same purpose of promoting tourism. _______
60. Ha Long Bay was officially recognized as one of New 7 Wonders of Nature of the world on its first
celebration. _______
VIII. Read the passage about different customs for greetings around the world, and do the tasks that
follow.
Greeting Customs Around the World
USA
It is normal for men to shake hands when they meet, but it is quite unusual for men to kiss when they
greet each other. Greetings are casual - a handshake, a smile and a ‘hello’ will do just fine.
UK
The British often simply say ‘hello’ when they meet friends. They usually shake hands only when they
meet for the first time. Social kissing is common in an informal situation between men and women
and also between women who know each other very well.
France
The French, including children, shake hands with their friends and often kiss them on both cheeks,
both upon meeting and leaving.
Arab countries
In Arab countries, close male friends or colleagues hug and kiss both cheeks. They shake hands with
the right hand only, for longer but less firmly than in the West. Contact between the opposite genders
in public is considered obscene. Do not offer to shake hands with the opposite sex.
Hungary
Hungarians like to use the friendly greeting form of kissing each other on the cheeks. The most
common way is to kiss from your right to your left. When men meet for the first time, the casual
greeting is a firm handshake.
Belgium
People kiss on one cheek when they meet, regardless of the gender or how well they know each
other.
China
Chinese people tend to be more conservative. When meeting someone for the first time, they would
usually nod their heads and smile, or shake hands if in a formal situation.
Russia
The typical greeting is a very firm handshake while maintaining direct eye contact. When men shake
hands with women, the handshake is not firm. It is considered gallant to kiss women three times
while alternating cheeks, and even to kiss hands.
Task 1. Match each word in column A with its definition in column B, writing the answer in each
blank.
A B
61. hug _______ A. not liking change, traditional
62. obscene _______ B. happening one after the other
63. conservative _______ C. looking directly at each other
64. eye contact _______ D. to put your arms around somebody to show that you love or like
him / her
65. alternating _______ E. shocking and annoying
Task 2. Read the passage again, and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).
66. People in China and Arab countries seem to be more careful when greeting people for the first
time or the opposite sex.
______
67. Shaking hands is the most popular greeting in Britain. ______
68. Kissing is considered a popular way of greetings in France, Hungary, and Belgium. ______
69. In Russia, you should shake hands with your friend but never look into his/her eyes. ______
70. In Hungary, the most common greeting way is kissing and you should pay attention to the order.
______
IX. Complete the dialogue with the responses below. There is one extra that you do not need.
A. It was the Christmas dinner party on Christmas Eve at our grandparents’ house last year.
B. It was a wonderful event, so the memories are still lively in my mind.
C. We put up the Christmas tree and decorations. We also prepared presents for all family
members. We had a special big dinner and then we got nice presents.
D. We said that we would gather again next Christmas, and maintained it as our annual family
event.
E. It was the Christmas party last year.
F. All of my relatives gathered at my grandparents’ two days before Christmas Day. It was a
family reunion. Some of us only saw each other on this occasion.
Nick: What was the most memorable event to you?
Phong: 71 ___________________________________________________________________________
Nick: When and where did it happen?
Phong: 72 ___________________________________________________________________________
Nick: Who joined with you?
Phong: 73 ___________________________________________________________________________
Nick: What did you do at that event?
Phong: 74 ___________________________________________________________________________
Nick: Why was it a memorable event?
Phong: 75 ___________________________________________________________________________
X. Write an email to advise your pen friend about participating in the Hoi An Lantern Festival, using
the cues given.
- visit I February / the Hoi An Lantern Festival / the first full moon / the Lunar New Year / the biggest
celebration
- buy handmade lanterns / a cost / about 50,000 VND / ask the vendor / give you a long pole / lower /
lantern / water
- a popular event / local people and tourists / so / you / arrive early / a good place I have a good
view / the candle-lighted water
- escape the crowds / by / take a boat ride I the river / can watch the activities more clearly
- wear strong walking shoes / the crowd I step / your feet / busy streets
Dear Jack,
I hear you would like to participate in the Hoi An Lantern Festival, and I want to give you some pieces
of advice for you to consider.
76. You should ______________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
77. _______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
78. _______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
79. _______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
80. _______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
Best wishes
Phong
 UNIT 6.
LIFESTYLES
A. Pronunciation: /br/ and /pr/
I. Put the words with the underlined part into the correct column.
April broom branch footprints bread
prize present prince toothbrush brick
professor print bridge pretty bride
precious break problem pray bright
/br/ /pr/

II. Underline the letter with sound /br/, and double underline the letter with sound /pr/. Then
practise reading the sentences.
1. The principal is presenting the prizes to good students.
2. This clock is a present for my birthday from my close friend.
3. They took a photo of the bridge over the Mekong River.
4. It is the house in our neighborhood built of red brick.
5. Would you like some bread and butter for breakfast?
6. A bracelet is a piece of jewellery that you wear around your wrist or arm.
7. What is the price of petrol now?
8. In Britain, the eldest son of the king or queen get the title ‘Prince of Wales’.
9. She won the first prize in the competition.
10. The bride is wearing a bright-coloured dress, and precious bracelets.

B. Vocabulary
• Different lifestyles
I. Complete the sentences with the words given.
 leisure dish dogsled means lifestyle
mushers practice cuisine title craft
1. The city _______________ seems to suit her — she’s certainly looking very well.
2. ‘Ms’ was meant to be a _______________ that says nothing about a woman s marital status, unlike
‘Mrs’ and ‘Miss’.
3. What do you often do in your _______________ time?
4. People should avoid the _______________ of dumping Waste into the sea.
5. They learned the _______________ of weaving.
6. Another programme takes families for a _______________ adventure in the surrounding woods.
7. We need to find some other _______________ of transportation.
8. It’s a simple _______________ to prepare, consisting mainly of rice and vegetables.
9. The hotel restaurant is known for its excellent French _______________.
10. The 1,100-mile race from Anchorage to Nome allows _______________ to drop injured, sick or
tired dogs.
II. Complete the sentences with the adjectives given.
native unique alive traditional light
balanced common unusual best-known leisurely
1. They share a(n) _______________ interest in photography.
2. We enjoyed a(n) _______________ picnic lunch on the lawn.
3. I don’t eat much for lunch - just a(n) _______________ snack.
4. The Aborigines are the _______________ inhabitants of Australia.
5. They try to keep many traditions _______________.
6. I can recognise your handwriting anywhere - it’s _______________.
7. The novel was written by the _______________ local writer.
8. A(n) _______________ diet is essential for healthy growth.
9. The local people still use _______________ farming methods which have been used for hundreds
of years.
10. She didn’t notice anything _______________ about Susan’s behaviour.
III. Complete the sentences with the verbs given in the correct form.
notice weave press hug bow
greet maintain shake serve stick
1. The teacher _______________ each child with a friendly ‘Hello’.
2. He _______________ low to the assembled crowd.
3. The Prince was photographed _______________ hands with the fire fighters.
4. There was a handkerchief _______________ out of his jacket pocket.
5. Mary waved at the man but he didn’t seem to _______________.
6. They _______________ each other when they met at the station.
7. She _______________ her face against the window.
8. They _______________ delicious food in the cafeteria.
9. It takes great skill to _______________ a basket out of rushes.
10. Despite living in different countries, the two families have _______________ close links.
IV. Complete the text with the words given.
curry house tomatoes meat cuisine
chicken types homeland ingredients spices
Curry has belonged to the British 1 _______________ since the 18th century. When British people who
2
lived and worked in India came home, they wanted to enjoy curry in their _______________ too.
Therefore,3 _______________ houses became increasingly common. The basic 4 _______________ for
5
curry are fresh meat, such as pork, beef or _______________, garlic and ginger, peppers,
6
_______________, onions, curry 7 _______________, and a bit ofchili. Curry is very popular in the UK
now, and the country celebrates National Curry Week every October. You can enjoy spicy curry from a
casual curry 8 _______________ to a luxury restaurant. There are also curries for vegetarians with no
9 10
_______________ and there are various _______________ of curry in different countries around
the world.
 Prepositions
V. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. They had to bow _______________ the King.
2. There was a packet of something sticking _______________ of his pocket.
3. The strips of willow are woven _______________ baskets.
4. The car pulled _______________ the roadside.
5. They had no means _______________ communication.
6. He became internationally famous _______________ his novels.
7. Why don't you come _______________ to Nha Trang in the summer?
8. The two athletes are competing _______________ the gold medal.
9. Many of her pictures hang _______________ the National Gallery.
10. The building is being used _______________ a temporary hospital for the victims of the
earthquake in Turkey.

C. Grammar
• The future simple
I. Complete the sentences with the verbs given, using will for future predictions.
be do drive go grow
listen live speak wear win
In the year 2040...
1. people _______________ on Mars.
2. we _______________ flying cars.
3. people _______________ computers in their clothes.
4. robots _______________ all our housework.
5. families _______________ food in their homes.
6. the world _______________ a clean and happy place.
7. we _______________ every language in the world using special computers.
8. the USA _______________ the football world cup.
9. young people _______________ to strange music.
10. some people _______________ to the Moon for their holidays.
II. Look at the predictions and complete the questions.
In 20 years’ time
I will be a doctor.
Ann will speak live languages.
You will be a writer.
Fiona - be famous
Susan - live in the USA
Lisa - work in a bank
Mr David - stop teaching
Paul - write pop songs
Lucy - have two children
James - have grey hair
1. A: Who _______________ a doctor?
B: I will.
2. A: What _______________ be?
B: A writer.
3. A: Where _______________?
B: In the USA.
4. A: _______________ a teacher?
B: No, he won’t.
5. A: How many_______________?
B: Two.
6. A: Who _______________ languages?
B: Ann
7. A: _______________ famous?
B: Yes, she will.
8. A: Where _______________?
B: In a bank.
9. A: What _______________?
B: Pop songs.
10. A: _______________ grey hair?
B: Yes, he will.
III. Complete the text with will or won't and the verbs given below.
not buy be not come get have invite make
My sister, Linda, 1 _______________ 18 this year. It’s an important birthday in the UK, so I think she
2 3
_______________ a big present from us. I think we _______________ a big party and she
4
_______________ lots of friends and relatives. Dad 5 _______________ a big cake too. He’s good at
6
cooking so he _______________ one from the baker’s. Our dog is scared of loud music so he
7
_______________ to the party.
IV. Complete the text with the correct form of will and the verbs in brackets.
The Space Hotel 1 _______________ (open) in 2040. It 2 _______________ (have) 350 rooms, each
with a view of planet Earth from the window. Guests 3 _______________ (arrive) by spaceship, and
4
during their stay, they _______________ (enjoy) a wide variety of activities. They certainly
5 6
_______________ (not get) bored. But holidays at the Space Hotel _______________ (not be)
cheap. How much 7 _______________ (they / cost)? About £500,000 for two weeks!
• First conditional
V. Put the verbs in brackets into the present simple or future simple.
1. If I (have) _______________ problems, my mum (help) _______________ me.
2. If my father (go) _______________ to bed late, he (be) _______________ bad-tempered in the
morning.
3. If my sister (play) _______________ her music too loudly, my mum (shout) _______________ at
her.
4. If my brother (have) _______________ lots of homework, he (eat) _______________ his dinner in
his room.
5. If my brother (not have) _______________ any homework, he (practise) _______________ guitar
and (write) _______________ songs.
6. If my sister (get up) _______________ late, she (not have) _______________ breakfast.
7. If there (be) _______________ football on the TV, my father (watch) _______________ it.
8. If we (be) _______________ noisy, our teacher (give) _______________ us lots of homework.
VI. Complete the dialogue with the correct form of the verbs given below.
not be borrow lose go start take
Ann: What will you do if you 1 _______________ your key?
Tom: I 2 _______________ to the neighbours because they’ve got a spare key.
Ann: If they 3 _______________ in, where will you go?
Tom: I 4 _______________ the bus into town and go to the library.
Ann: 5 _______________ you a book if you go there?
Tom: No, I won’t. I 6 _______________ doing my homework.
VII. Complete the sentences using the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.
1. If you _______________ (not go) to bed early, you’ll be tired.
2. Marie _______________ (be) confused if we’re late for her party.
3. What will you do if you _______________ (not pass) your exams?
4. Cara _______________ (not become) a famous singer if she doesn’t practise.
5. If it rains today, we _______________ (not go) for a walk.
6. If I see their DVDs in the shops, I _______________ (buy) them.
VIII. Match the sentence halves. Write the answers in each blank.
1. We’ll go for a walk ______ a. I’ll get you a DVD.
2. If she passes her exams ______ b. if we make too much noise.
3. We’ll be there to meet you at the airport ______ c. when the plane arrives.
4. I’m sure he’ll make lots of new friends ______ d. if the weather gets better.
5. If you like the music ______ e. you’ll be fine.
6. If you’re very busy now ______ f. she’ll go to university.
7. They’ll hear us coming in ______ g. I’ll come back later.
8. If you plan your talk carefully ______ h. when he starts his course.
IX. Complete the sentences in the first conditional with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.
1. If I _____________ (be) late again, my teacher _____________ (be) angry.
2. I _____________ (call) you if there _____________ (be) a problem.
3. When I _____________ (see) Mai, I _____________ (tell) her you are here.
4. If the taxi _____________ (not come) soon, we _____________ (be) late.
5. If he _____________ (get) another job, he _____________ (earn) a bit more money.
6. I _____________ (buy) you some lunch if you _____________ (be) hungry.
7. They _____________ (change) their minds when they _____________ (see) the hotel.
8. What _____________ (you / do) if you _____________ (be) free today?
9. They _____________ (not go) on holiday if they _____________ (get) some more work.
10. If he _____________ (become) a professional footballer, _____________ (he/move) to another
town?
X. Write if clauses using the words given, then match them to the results a-f.
1. it / start / raining
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. we I not find / a taxi soon
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. it / be / hot
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. you / not visit me / later today
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. you I not go to bed / early
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. you / finish / the race
__________________________________________________________________________________
a. we’ll open the windows.
b. we won’t need to water the plants.
c. you’ll be tired.
d. I’ll give €5 to charity.
e. I’ll send you a text message tomorrow.
f. we’ll miss our plane.
XI. Write the questions for the answers, using the words given below.
1. Q: _________________________________________________________________? (What/do?)
A: If it rains, we’ll stay at home and watch TV.
2. Q: _________________________________________________________________? (What /
study?)
A: If I go to university, I’ll study English.
3. Q: _________________________________________________________________? (Where / go?)
A: If they go on holiday, they’ll go to Hoi An.
4. Q: _________________________________________________________________? (What/do?)
A: If his tooth still hurts tomorrow, he’ll go to the dentist.
5. Q: ______________________________________________________________? (How much /
give?)
A: If she finishes the run, I’ll give her €10.
6. Q: ________________________________________________________________? (Who i meet?)
A: If we go out tonight, we’ll meet Mai and Lan.
XII. Write the first conditional sentences using the words given below.
1. if/ Mai / get I good marks / her parents / be / very pleased
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. we / buy / some sandwiches / if / we / get / hungry
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. if / he / go / to Canada / he / speak I English
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. those children / be / sick / if / they I eat I all those green apples
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. if I you I not come / with me /I/ not go
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. Kate / not come / if / she / have / a lot of homework
__________________________________________________________________________________
XIII. Complete the sentences with your ideas. Use the first conditional.
1. If we all study very hard, ____________________________________________________________.
2. If I don’t tidy my room this evening, ___________________________________________________.
3. If my favourite team wins the match, __________________________________________________.
4. If I’m free today, __________________________________________________________________.
5. If she doesn’t pass her exams, _______________________________________________________.
• IF or UNLESS
XIV. Choose the correct word for each sentence.
1. I’m playing football tomorrow if /unless it’s raining.
2. When you come in late you’ll disturb everyone if /unless you come in quietly.
3. I’m going now if /unless you want me to stay.
4. Children are allowed to use the swimming pool if /unless they are with an adult.
5. We can meet tomorrow if / unless you have something else to do.
6. He will be able to borrow the money if /unless he pays it back as soon as possible.
7. You won’t know what to do if /unless you listen carefully.
8. He’ll speak to you if /unless you ask him a question.
9. I’d like to walk in the morning if /unless I’m not in a hurry.
10. He won’t be able to understand you if /unless you speak very slowly
XV. Complete each sentence with if or unless.
1. Most people you meet will be polite to you _________ you are polite to them.
2. I won’t buy a new bike _________ I save enough money.
3. I’ll give you a hand _________ you need it.
4. Children will be allowed to watch TV after dinner _________ they have finished their homework.
Homework must come first.
5. My sister can fall asleep under any conditions, but I can’t get to sleep _________ the light is off and
the room is perfectly quiet.

D. Reading
I. Read the lifestyle report and decide whether the sentences are true (T) or false (F).
MY LIFESTYLE by Ann
 DIET
I think my diet is good. I'm a vegetarian, so I never eat unhealthy food like burgers or hot dogs. I don’t
eat a lot of sweets either, but I eat a lot of cheese. I think I should eat less cheese. It has a lot of
calories.
 HEALTH
I think I’m healthy. I don’t get many colds or fevers. I sometimes get headaches, but that’s when I'm
very tired. I should go to bed earlier. I’m lucky because there isn’t any heart disease in my family.
 EXERCISE
I don’t follow any exercise programme, but I exercise a lot. I have to take four hours of PE every week
at school. I’m also in the school basketball team. On weekends, I usually ride my bicycle. In the
summer, I go swimming in the local outdoor pool. But I should do more exercise in the winter.
1. Ann eats a lot of sweets. ____________
2. She gets a lot of colds. ____________
3. She sometimes gets headaches. ____________
4. She exercises a lot at school. ____________
II. Read the text and answer the questions.
From Country to City
Chang is thrilled. He’s going home for the spring festival and he can’t wait to see his family again. The
last time he saw his parents and his brother was a year ago.
Chang is twenty-two-year-old worker in a Chinese shoe factory. He left his parents’ farm two years
ago and came to work in the city. At first, he found city life terrifying and he missed his family
desperately. But he was earning money for the first time in his life, and it felt wonderful. He wants to
help his parents to build a house in his home village.
Life in the Chinese countryside can be hard, so millions of young people leave and go to the cities to
look for work. Migrant workers like Chang built the amazing stadium for the Beijing Olympics in 2008.
They also pulled down the old buildings in the city and built the enormous modem office and
apartment buildings.
Chang starts work at 8.30 a.m. That isn’t so bad - on the farm he started work at 6.30 a.m. But work at
the factory finishes at midnight, so he is always exhausted. He sleeps in a freezing room with eleven
other men in a building next to the factory.
‘I don’t really want to go back to the countryside,’ says Chang. ‘But I don’t want to stay in the factory
either. I’m learning to use a computer because I want a job in an office. I want to have a better life in
the future.’
1. When did Chang last see his family?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. When did he leave his parents' farm?
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. What does Chang want to do with his money he earns?
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. How does Chang feel when he finishes work at the factory?
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. Where does he sleep?
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. Where does he want to work in the future?
__________________________________________________________________________________
III. Read the text and answer the questions.
The Tay ethnic group is the second largest ethnic group in Viet Nam, only after the Kinh. The Tay
ethnic group has 1,700,000 people. They live mainly in Northern and Northwestern provinces, such as
Cao Bang, Bac Kan, Lang Son, Ha Giang, Thai Nguyen and Lao Cai. The Tay live on farming. They plant
rice on terraced fields. Other crops and fruit trees can be grown besides rice. They raise cattle and
poultry. On festival occasions, they make many kinds of cakes, such as square rice cakes, round rice
cakes, black rice sesame cakes, lime-water dumpling, and so on. The Tay play a very important role in
the Vietnamese culture, customs and cuisine.
1. How big is the Tay ethnic group in the ethnic groups in Viet Nam?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. Where do they mainly live?
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. What do the Tay live on?
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. Which animals do they raise?
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. What are their specialities on festival occasions?
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
IV. Read the text and do the tasks that follow.
Da Bac (Đà Bắc), a mountainous district of Hoa Binh, is home to many ethnic groups, mainly Tay,
Muong, Kinh, and Dao. Each group has its own culture and tradition.
The district has carried out activities to protect traditional and cultural values together with a civilized
lifestyle at residential areas over the past years. By now, many hamlets and residential areas in Hien
Luong, Muong Chieng, Tien Phong and Cao Son have promoted ecotourism, and cultural values. Stilt
houses with wooden floors and palm-leaf roofs of ethnic groups are maintained for tourist
accommodation, and so are the annual festivals such as the New Year celebrations of Dao people in
Cao Son. As cultural values of ethnic groups have been protected, they have turned into typical
tourism products and development.
Task 1. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true) or F (false).
1. Many ethnic groups live in Da Bae District. _______
2. They have the same cultural values. _______
3. The local government has just carried out activities to protect traditional and cultural values.
_______
4. Homestay is available for tourists in Da Bac. _______
5. Stilt houses are rebuilt in modern style to provide tourist accommodation. _______
6. Maintaining traditional festivals belongs to the programme of cultural protection. _______
7. The New Year celebrations of Dao people are held yearly in Cao Son. _______
8. Cultural values of ethnic groups are an element of tourism development. _______
Task 2. Match the meanings below to the appropriate words in bold from the text.
1. ____________________ small villages
2. ____________________ having many mountains
3. ____________________ a place for someone to live or stay
4. ____________________ having houses rather than offices
5. ____________________ organising holidays without damaging the environment
V. Read the text and do the tasks that follow.
Discover Street Vendors in Viet Nam
Street vendors become the unique feature in Vietnamese community. Many tourists are attracted
and consider them as a beauty of the city. Street vendors are a symbol of the Vietnamese - hard-
working and kind. Women get a little income from selling the street food but they must save and feed
a big family. However, they are always friendly, happy and kind to all the customers.
We can buy nearly everything from street vendors. There are always men or women selling fruits, fast
food, vegetables, flowers, and so on. After work, workers can get things they need from street
vendors on the way they get home. People find it more convenient to find food there than in markets
or supermarkets.
Vietnamese people transport the food by bicycle, motorbike, carrying it on their heads, pushing a cart
or carrying food by a bamboo yoke.
Task 1. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true) or F (false).
1. Street vendors become very special in life. ________
2. Tourists find street vendors very disappointing. ________
3. Street vendors often get a big income to support their big family. ________
4. They don’t seem very friendly to customers because their hard life. ________
5. You can get food for dinner from street vendors on the way home. ________
6. There are only female street vendors. ________
7. Street vendors use various types of transport. ________
8. Sometimes street vendors don’t need anything to carry their goods.
Task 2. Match the meanings below to the appropriate words in bold from the text.
1. _____________ the money you receive as payment for your work
2. _____________ a piece of wood put on the shoulder to carry things
3. _____________ suitable for a particular purpose
4. _____________ a typical quality or an important part of something
5. _____________ a sign that is used to represent something else
VI. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
For 3,000 years, Mongolians have lived in the rural areas, moving to search new grassland for their
cattle. They depend on their livestock for a living. Today, about half of Mongolia’s population is living
in the ger and moving their camping equipment several times a year, nomadic life develops in
summer and survives in winter. When the weather is warm, they work hard on their farms to get milk
and make airag- a type of milk alcohol, consuming meat from their sheep and goats. Once winter
comes, temperatures drop quickly and they stay indoors and survive on horse meat.
With the rise of technology, changes in the Mongolian nomadic lifestyle are almost inevitable. Many
herders use motorbikes to herd cattle and horses. To move their homes, they use trucks instead of ox
carts. Solar panels are also becoming an addition to the ger, giving them access to electricity without
being confined to one place. The nomads use solar energy to power TV sets and mobile phones.
1. Mongolians regularly move from place to place in order to ___________.
A. look for food for their family B. find grassland for their livestock
C. herd their cattle and horses D. sell their animals and farm products
2. How many Mongolians still live a traditional nomadic life?
A. Close to 40 percent B. More than 50 percent
C. About 50 percent D. About 60 percent
3. What is the Mongolian’s main food in winter?
A. horse meat B. sheep meat C. goat meat D. airag
4. Today, Mongolian nomads ___________.
A. use solar energy to power electronic devices
B. don’t lead their lifestyles as herders any more
C. use ox carts to move their homes
D. have the advantage of city life
5. Which of the following is NOT true about Mongolian nomads?
A. They live in the countryside.
B. They live near and for their livestock.
C. They are now taking advantage of modern technology.
D. They work hard in winter when the temperatures are low.
VII. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
 The Wodaabe Tribe
 In the strong heat of the Sahara Desert, a celebration is getting started. It’s a competition - a
beauty contest, and the contestants - people taking part in it - consider it serious. Contestants are
wearing colourful clothes, putting their make-up and doing their hair. This is a beauty contest with a
difference. The contestants aren’t women, they’re men.
 The Wodaabe Tribe in Nigeria, a group of about 45,000 nomadic cattle herders, travel through the
Sahara Desert raising cows. They consider themselves the most beautiful people in the world.
 Every year the Wodaabe hold a beauty contest to celebrate the rainy season. Groups of young men
dance for hours in front of female judges - people deciding who are the winners. I can’t wait for it to
start. There’s nothing like it anywhere else.
 The men put on costumes with ostrich features, beads and brightly-coloured materials. They also
paint their faces, for example, a long line painted from the forehead to the chin. Soon the dance
begins. The men stand in a circle and move round as they dance. Dancing in circles for hours under
the desert sun can be very tiring.
 By the end of the dance there are three winners. The losers have to wait until next year’s contest
to try again. I hope that the Wodaabe continue this fantastic celebration for some time to come.
1. What is so unusual about the beauty contest?
A. The bright clothes B. The special face paint
C. The contestants’ hair D. The people who compete
2. What does the writer suggest about the Wodaabe people in the second paragraph?
A. They have a high opinion of themselves.
B. The men want to impress each other.
C. They get everything they need from their animals.
D. They pay most attention to the clothing they wear.
3. The writer is excited to see the festival because ___________.
A. he has waited for it to start for a long time
B. he has travelled a long way to see it
C. he thinks everyone else seems too serious
D. he wants to see a unique event
4. What is the purpose of paragraph 4?
A. to show how beautiful the contestants become
B. to give examples of Wodaabe beauty preparations
C. to express the difficulty of costume-making
D. to emphasise how stressful the Wodaabe feel about the contest
5. What do we learn about the writer’s feelings towards the festival?
A. He feels the competition isn’t fair on the losers.
B. He thinks the tradition should be continued.
C. He believes the competitions are nothing special.
D. He thinks it’s too tiring for the Wodaabe men.
VIII. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
Australian Aborigines
There are about 500 ethnic groups in Australia called Aboriginals. Before white people came.
Aboriginal people lived throughout Australia, and the highest population was along the coast.
They were traditionally hunters and gatherers who did not live in one place. They moved around their
country to search for food. Within the clan, all members had specific roles and responsibilities to
ensure the survival of their community. Men hunted animals, such as kangaroos, emus, birds, reptiles
and fish. Women collected fruits, honey, insects, eggs and plants. They had a steady supply of food
thanks to hunting and gathering. They were experts in finding sources of water.
Since the British first came to Australia, Aboriginals lost most of their land and a large number of
native people were killed due to huge waves of diseases. Today more than half of all Aboriginals live
in towns, often in the suburbs in bad living conditions.
Nowadays, there are laws to protect the rights of Aboriginals, and Aboriginal communities have their
own territory, and mining companies can’t have projects on their sacred land.
1. All of these are true about Aboriginals before white people came to Australia except ___________.
A. there were hundreds of ethnic groups
B. they lived throughout Australia
C. they were nomads - moving around the country
D. they lived inland mostly in order to find food
2. Aboriginals lived by ___________.
A. hunting and gathering B. farming and raising animals
C. growing fruits and raising animals D. selling water sources to white people
3. After the arrival of the British, the population of Aboriginals dropped sharply because of
_________.
A. wars B. loss of land C. diseases D. bad living conditions
4. The laws try to protect ___________.
A. the operation of mining companies
B. the survival of the Aboriginals on their own land
C. the rights of white people throughout Australia
D. the rights of mining companies on the territories of the Aboriginals
5. The word ‘clan’ in paragraph 2 is closest in meaning to ___________.
A. survival B. tradition C. community D. country

E. Speaking
• Everyday English
I. Choose the correct response. Then practise the short exchanges in pairs.
1. A: How do you greet your teachers in B: a/ We say ‘Good morning’ and their title and
England? surname.
b/ We exchange friendly talks.
2. A: Can we get food on the street here? B: a/ Sure. People sell a lot of street food.
b/ No. You can find a lot of street vendors.
3. A: Many adults only have a coffee for B: a/ Because they have breakfast outside.
breakfast. b/ Because they are in a hurry to work.
4. A: Which is the most common way of greeting B: a/ I think it’s the same way.
around the world? b/I think it’s shaking hands.
5. A: Are they moving around the fire? B: a/ Yes, it’s a tribal dance.
 b/ Yes, it’s folk music.
6. A: Is it their traditional craft? B: a/ Yes, it is passed from generation to
generation.
b/ Yes, it is passed from place to place.
7. A: Her voice of English is excellent. B: a/ But she is a native speaker.
b/ But English is not her native language.
8. A: Weaving takes a lot of time and work. B: a/ But we should maintain the traditional
craft.
b/ And it does not belong to traditional
lifestyles.
9. A: What do people do to maintain their B: a/ They enjoy having fast food when they are
traditional lifestyle? in a hurry.
b/ They hold their festivals every year.
10. A: I think Vietnamese people enjoy fresh B: a/ Sure. They prefer traditional dishes.
seafood. b/ No doubt. Viet Nam has a long coastline
• Talking about maintaining traditional lifestyles
II. Complete the dialogue with the responses below.
A. Yes. Conical hats have been present at many exhibitions and craft fairs.
B. You’re right. It takes much more time and skill to make flat palm hats instead of ordinary conical
hats.
C. Of course, here you are.
D. Hats made in factories are cheaper and more convenient but the craft has been passed from
generation to generation. Many young villagers in Chuong Village have become skilled workers.
E. It’s a conical hat or ‘non la’, Linda.
F. It was made in a village well-known for a long history of conical-hat making - it’s Chuong Village in
Thanh Oai District in Ha Noi.
Linda: What are you holding in your hands, Mai?
Mai: 1 _____________________________________________________________________________
Linda: It looks very nice and charming. Can I try it on?
Mai: 2 _____________________________________________________________________________
Linda: Wow, it’s fantastic to wear something like this on the head. Where was it made?
Mai: 3 _____________________________________________________________________________
Linda: I think each hat takes workers a lot of time.
Mai: 4 _____________________________________________________________________________
Linda: Do young people follow the traditional handicraft?
Mai: 5 _____________________________________________________________________________
Linda: Do you introduce this traditional hat to foreigners?
Mai: 6 _____________________________________________________________________________
III. Complete the dialogue with the sentences below. There is one extra sentence you do not need.
A. The festival starts with the worshipping ceremony to pray for a wealthy and happy life for the
whole year.
B. It’s held on the 12th day of the 1st lunar month.
C. It’s an essential part of the festival with performances of Boi singing.
D. Yes, I’m reading the notice of the Whale festival or Cau Ngu festival in Binh Thuan Province next
week.
E. Some fishermen set off a few days travelling long distances at sea to catch a big net offish.
F. Vietnamese people consider them as friendly companions during sea voyage, and they can bring
good luck to sailors, too. When they die, people build temples to honour them. G. You bet. There are
games of fish catching, net casting and raw' fish catching.
Nick: Are you reading the news, Phong?
Phong: 1 ___________________________________________________________________________
Nick: Why are there festivals for whales? Are they only ordinary mammals at sea?
Phong: 2 ___________________________________________________________________________
Nick: It’s very interesting. What are the activities of the Whale festival?
Phong: 3 ___________________________________________________________________________
Nick: Are there any games during the festival?
Phong: 4 ___________________________________________________________________________
Nick: How about music in the festival?
Phong: 5 ___________________________________________________________________________
Nick: And what is the time for the festival?
Phong: 6 ___________________________________________________________________________
Nick: Thank you for all the information about the festival. I hope to attend the festival in Binh Thuan
next week. It’s on Sunday and we don’t have to go to school.
• Expressing certainty & uncertainty
IV. Choose the correct option to complete the sentences.
1. I’m sure I Maybe / I wonder your mum will like your present. She always prefers yours.
2. Perhaps / No doubt / Maybe this is the Mona Lisa painting. You can see the name of the painter,
Leonardo de Vinci, on it.
3. Perhaps / I’m sure / I’m certain the teacher will punish you for the drawings you have done on the
walls or she’ll like them.
4. I wonder / I’m sure I No doubt that is the jacket that the captain wore when he arrived in the
South Pole.
5. I’m not sure I I’m certain I I’m sure that is the right place for the picture. What about the
bedroom?
6. Maybe / I’m not sure I I’m certain he will be ill. He has been sitting in the sun lor three hours.
7. Maybe / I’m not sure / I’m certain that you can help protect the environment by collecting the
garbage.
8. I’m sure / Maybe /I wonder which story Grandma is going to tell us.
9. The weather is lovely. I’m sure I Maybe / I wonder they are enjoying the picnic in the woods.
10. I'm sure I Maybe /I wonder she has a lot of work to do, and she will have to surf the net until a
late hour of the day.
11. No doubt I I’m not sure /I wonder he won’t be able to escape from that scary shark.
V. Complete the sentences with the words given.
may must probably think guess
certainly (x2) likely hopeful can
1. When he leaves school, he _______________ go to a university of science, or he _______________
even get a job at a laboratory.
2. This _______________ be a laboratory - there are instruments and products of scientific research.
3. I’ll _______________ come back to see the grandfather if I am free.
4. I _______________ they’ll offer me the job as I have the ideal profile.
5. They will _______________ interview him about his past experience as they usually do.
6. I _______________ their salaries are high as they have very good skills and qualifications.
7. She will _______________ enjoy herself working in that company of export. She likes foreign
trading.
8. Computers are _______________ to replace teachers in a few years’ time.
9. It’s _______________ that the problem of pollution will be solved if everyone tries to protect the
environment.

F. Writing
• Writing a paragraph about the advantages or disadvantages of online learning Write a paragraph
about the advantages and disadvantages of online learning, using the cues below.
- online classes / convenient and flexible // stay at home / have online lessons / instead of / come /
school or any classroom
- all you need / an Internet connection / a computer or a smartphone // easily record the lessons /
watch them later
- online classes / promote / more interaction / more learning opportunities // students / get over
their shyness / contribute more / online courses
- online learning / require / more self-discipline // without the direct guidance / the teacher /
students / good motivation / participate / lesson on their own
- they / turn off / the microphones I webcams / the teacher / other students / not know what they are
doing
- online learning / technical issues / the Internet connection // online learning I more screen time /
excessive screen time /lead / physical illnesses / poor eyesight or headache
There are advantages and disadvantages of online learning. For the advantages, firstly, online classes
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________.
Secondly, online classes promote ______________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________.
However, there are also disadvantages of online learning. To start with, online learning __________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________.
In addition, online learning may have __________________________________________________.
Furthermore, online learning means more ______________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________.
Online learning will become a trend in the near future, but we should have solutions to get over the
disadvantages in order to get a good result in our study.
 TEST (UNIT 6)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. dogsled B. nomadic C. online D. offline
2. A. staple B. maintain C. stay D. habit
3. A. leisure B. hurry C. musher D. summer
4. A. impact B. interact C. nomadic D. concentrate
5. A. pizza B. zoo C. zero D. zip
II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. It is his _____________ to read several books a week.
A. action B. activity C. practice D. training
7. Email is a highly effective _____________ of communication.
A. mean B. means C. equipment D. device
8. Knitting and weaving are popular _____________.
A. tasks B. skills C. positions D. crafts
9. What is her _____________? - Is she Professor or Doctor?
A. title B. career C. job D. salary
10. I don’t know how they manage to support their expensive _____________.
A. lifetime B. lifestyle C. lifespan D. life story
11. I had the most expensive _____________ on the menu - a choice fillet of fish.
A. dish B. food C. course D. plate
12. She composes and _____________ her own music.
A. makes B. plays C. performs D. puts on
13. We have received permission to go ahead with the music _____________ in the park next Sunday
in spite of opposition from local residents.
A. business B. occasion C. band D. festival
14. The men _____________ each other warmly with firm handshakes.
A. noticed B. greeted C. recognised D. reacted
15. They had the opportunity to _____________ life at sea.
A. do B. discover C. experience D. feel
III. Fill in each blank of the passage with the correct word below.
 dishes diet tradition cyclists seafood
environment head countryside values trains
Japanese people live in a crowded 16 _____________ in the downtown in tiny flats. Subways and sushi
17
restaurants are often full of people. _____________ and pedestrians compete for space on
sidewalks, especially on wet and rainy days.
18
Many Japanese people fall asleep in subways or _____________. At home, they spend a lot of time
sitting on a mat on the floor rather than on a comfortable chair.
Aside from sushi, rice is the main part in the Japanese 19 _____________, and it is used in a variety of
Japanese 20 _____________. Fresh 21 _____________ is an essential part of the Japanese diet, and it is
eaten live, sometimes still moving, or raw.
22 23
The Japanese are very proud of their family _____________. According to _____________, the
father is the 24 _____________ of the home, followed by the mother, the eldest child, and finally the
young child. Today, most Japanese families live in the city centre and visit their grandparents in the
25
_____________.
IV. Complete the dialogue with the correct form of the verbs below.
stay wait not know have spend
find go (x2) be look
26
A: We need to book our summer holiday. If we _____________ any longer, everything
27
_____________ fully booked.
B: You’re right. But we still haven’t decided where to go.
A: How about Nha Trang?
B: If we 28 _____________ to Nha Trang, I’m sure we 29
_____________ good weather. But we always
go there.
A: Hoi An?
B: We could try, but if we 30 _____________ in Hoi An, we 31 _____________ a lot of money. Hoi An is
a little bit expensive.
A: OK. How about Quang Ngai or Kon Turn?
B: We could try that. But if we 32 _____________ there, we 33 _____________ people and their tourist
attractions.
A: That’s doesn’t matter.
B: I know, and if we 34 _____________ on the Internet, we might 35 _____________ some cheap deals.
A: That’s a good idea.
V. Write the first conditional sentences using the cues given below. Use short forms where possible.
36. We / go / to the park / if / it / be / sunny tomorrow
__________________________________________________________________________________
37. If / Phong / get / good marks / his parents / be / pleased
__________________________________________________________________________________
38. We / buy / some sandwiches / if / we / get hungry
__________________________________________________________________________________
39. Those children / be / sick/ if / they / eat / all those biscuits
__________________________________________________________________________________
40. Kate / not come / if / she / have / a lot of homework
__________________________________________________________________________________
VI. Complete the sentences with your own ideas.
41. If I stay in this evening, ____________________________________________________________.
42. If I don’t finish my homework, ______________________________________________________.
43. If it rains tomorrow, ______________________________________________________________.
44. If my mother doesn’t feel well, ______________________________________________________.
45. If you help me with my maths,
_______________________________________________________.
VII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Kate Festival

46
Kate Festival is _____________ by the Cham people for 3 days at the beginning of October. This
event is held in a large space in the three Champa Towers (Po Nagar, Po Klong Garai and Po Rome).
47
The main purpose of the festivals is to _____________ their heroes like Po Klong Garai and Po
48
Rome. _____________, the festival is a chance for the local people to relax, to meet
and wish one another 49 _____________ in the future.
This is one of the biggest and most important events of the Cham people in Viet Nam.
50 51
_____________, it is a good opportunity for the visitors to explore the _____________ in the
Cham culture, from architecture to costumes, instruments and traditional songs that are used to
praise their kings in the past. The Kate festival in each tower starts at the same time on the same day,
52
and the day after, villages and families begin to hold their own rites. During the rite, the people
53
_____________ their ancestors and gods with the help of a shaman, and then pray _____________
54
health and prosperity. The actual festivals _____________ after the rites. It is a combination of
55
traditional music and dance, including some activities _____________ performances of Ginang
Drum and Saranai Flute or the traditional dance of Cham girls.
46. A. organize B. organized C. hold D. being held
47. A. commemorate B. see C. watch D. love
48. A. However B. Nevertheless C. Therefore D. Moreover
49. A. lucky B. happy C. fortune D. dream
50. A. However B. Therefore C. Because D. Although
51. A. beautiful B. beautifully C. charm D. charming
52. A. call B. ask C. shout D. speak
53. A. to B. about C. of D. for
54. A. take place B. take places C. take part D. take the place
55. A. such B. so C. like D. like as
VIII. Read the text and choose the correct answers for the questions.
The Hadza
 They don’t grow crops, they don’t raise animals and they don’t count the days or months - the
Hadza tribe of East Africa is probably the last hunter-gatherer tribe on Earth.
 People are sitting by the fire, and they are feeling hungry. The tribe leader tells the others he saw
some monkeys. They pick up their bows and go hunting.
 I have come to the Hadza land in Tanzania for a few days with the leader’s son. I am excited to get
close to the Hadza people. They live in the extreme heat, the soil is poor, and water is in short supply.
They don’t have any ideas about the time: hours, weeks, months and years have no meaning to them.
They have no crops, no animals and no houses. They live on what nature provides. I have come to
meet these hunter-gatherers in person.
 After a successful night hunting monkeys, they return to the camp. The women have collected
some fruits. The tribe shares everything. They are generous and easy-going. After that, nobody knows
when the next meal is. They wander the land taking food from it whenever they need.
 Free from belongings, jobs, money, and responsibilities, they don’t seem to have any worries. After
saying goodbye to them, I wonder about their future: it is only a matter of time before the days of
wandering the land are over for the Hadza. I hope not.
56. What is the writer doing in the text?
A. describing the way the Hadza live
B. promoting the hunter-gatherer lifestyle
C. helping protect the Hadza tribe
D. recommending a holiday experience
57. What does the writer say about himself?
A. He isn’t enjoying his visit.
B. He is happy to learn the language of the Hadza
C. He doesn’t want to say goodbye.
D. He is excited about meeting them.
58. What do we learn about the Hadza?
A. They consider the time important. B. They move from place to place.
C. They worry about their food. D. They have a fixed daily lifestyle.
59. How does the writer describe the Hadza in paragraph 4?
A. They are responsible. B. They are worried about their future.
C. They respect nature. D. They don’t get upset easily.
60. What might the writer say about the Hadza?
A. They seem happy with their lives. B. They need our help.
C. Their lifestyle is better than ours. D. They should have their own land.
IX. Read the texts, and mark the sentences T (true), F (false), or NM (not mentioned).
What a Strange Place to Live!
 The tree houses of the Korowai people, Indonesia

Imagine living high up among the tree tops. This is where most of the Korowai people of Papua,
Indonesia live. Their tree houses are as high up as 50 metres. They are made of wood and have got a
thatched roof. To get to their houses, the Korowai people climb up a very long piece of wood. They
live there to be safe from floods and wild animals. After nightfall, they chat and tell stories before
going to sleep.
 The ‘fairy chimneys’ of Gõreme, Turkey
How would you feel about living in a rock just like prehistoric people did? Believe it or not, that’s
exactly where some people in Cappadocia in Turkey live.
Over millions of years, nature created rocks in the area that look like upside-down ice cream cones.
Centuries ago, people carved in these rocks to make homes.
Today, people visit the area to admire one of the strangest landscapes in the world. Some say that it is
like the surface of the moon. The local people enjoy living in the ‘fairy chimneys’, as they call them,
because they are cool in the hot summers and warm in the cold winters. The caves are very cosy. They
have got small rooms with fireplaces and courtyards where people can relax and chat together. This
really is a fairytale place.
61. The tree houses of the Korowai people are made of wood. _____
62. They live high up among the tops of some particular trees. _____
63. They can get into their houses by using a ladder. _____
64. Their houses are so high because of the issue of safety. _____
65. The atmosphere in their houses at night is warm. _____
66. We call ‘the fairy chimneys’ in Cappadocia in Turkey because they look like chimneys. _____
67. People can live comfortably in their caves in Cappadocia in the hot summers or the cold winters.
_____
68. At night people often tell fairy tales to their children. _____
69. Although the rooms are small, there is also a common space for people to relax and chat together.
_____
70. The Korowai people of Papua, Indonesia and some people in Cappadocia in Turkey live in harmony
with nature. _____
X. Complete the dialogue with the sentences below. There is one extra that you do not need.
A. They can make different types of products and they work all year round.
B. The government have several programmes to promote traditional handicrafts in villages
throughout the country.
C. I think using some machines can bring a higher productivity and higher income for people.
D. We should buy some traditional toys for performances in the celebration.
E. Nowadays, the job has used cutting machines which helps save materials and time.
F. To make a drum, they have to buy cow and buffalo skin from other villages, the process the
material before putting into use.
Quan: The Mid-Autumn Festival is coming, and our school club will hold a celebration for it. Have you
got any preparation?
Phong: 71 ___________________________________________________________________________.
I’ve heard of Ong Hao craft village in Hung Yen Province.
Quan: I know it. We can buy toys like masks, lion heads made of paper. Some artisans can make
drums.
Phong: How can they make drums in traditional ways?
Quan: 72 ___________________________________________________________________________.
Phong: How can local people follow the craft in the market economy?
Quan: In recent years, there are high demands for their products, so more and more villagers in the
Ong Hao craft village have returned to the craft.73 _________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
Phong: It’s good news. Are there any changes in the craft besides the variety of products?
Quan: Oh, yes.74 ____________________________________________________________________.
But the toys for Mid-Autumn Festival are made from natural materials.
Phong: 75 __________________________________________________________________________.
XI. Write sentences about the advantages and disadvantages of online learning, using the cues
below.
76. online learning / offer / teachers / effective way I give lessons / students // online learning /
several tools / PDFs, podcasts / and / teachers / use all these tools / part / their lesson plans
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
77. another advantage / online courses / they I enable / students I attend classes / any location of
their choice // online lessons / be recorded, archived, and shared / future reference
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
78. moreover / as online courses / be attended / home or a location of choice / student attendance /
increase
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
79. in an online class / students and teachers / minimal physical interactions // this I often result / the
sense / isolation / the students
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
80. for many learners / they / make great efforts / maintain their attention / the screen / follow the
lessons / long periods
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 REVIEW 2 (UNITS 4-5-6)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. habit B. bamboo C. staple D. interact
2. A. nomadic B. offering C. longevity D. gong
3. A. folk B. monk C. post D. goer
4. A. monk B. contestant C. bonding D. maintain
5. A. raise B. staircase C. post D. release
II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. In the Central Highlands, the biggest and tallest house in the village is the ____________ house.
A. communication B. community C. communal D. commune
7. The Viet people have many ____________ customs and crafts.
A. tradition B. traditional C. culture D. customary
8. ____________ month is the Hoa Ban Festival of the Thai people held in?
A. When B. Which C. How many D. How often
9. The ____________ on display in Da Nang Museum of Cham Sculpture are very interesting.
A. items B. goods C. products D. shows
10. ____________ were you when you started the middle school?
A. How B. How much C. How often D. How old
11. ____________ did they get for her on her last birthday? - A nice clock.
A. What B. How many C. Why D. When
12. ____________ did you meet at the party yesterday? - Some of my old friends.
A. What B. Which C. When D. Who
13. ____________ to you first at school this morning?
A. Who speak B. What did speak C. Who spoke D. What spoke
14. I like playing ____________ football in ____________ playground.
A. the – the B. a – the C. 0-a D. a – a
15. I visited my aunt in ____________ hospital on ____________ Sunday.
A. 0-0 B. a – a C. the – the D. a-0
16. Would you like ____________ cream with your strawberries?
A. a B. any C. some D. many
17. There were too ____________ people on the underground.
A. much B. many C. lot D. some
18. We visited ____________ of places in the city.
A. a lot B. many C. much D. some
19. I promise that I ____________ you when I’ve got some money.
A. am paying B. am not paying C. will pay D. won’t pay
20. If I this book, I ____________ good marks in the exams.
A. study-get B. study - would get C. studied - will get D. study - will get
III. Complete each blank in the following passage with the correct word below. There are some
extra words that you do not need.
take designs colours slope
stream tribe mountain figure
Cat Cat Village - Sa Pa

21
Cat Cat Village is located on the Muong Hoa Valley, this is the village of the Hmong hill
____________. It’s not far from Sa Pa Town, about 3 km and it takes you 45 minutes to walk here. The
village is on the 22 ____________ of the hill and easy walking, rice and com are grown here.
23
Visiting Cat Cat Village, we can have a chance to visit a big waterfall on the ____________ and the
old Hydro-electric Power Station built by the French here.
We can also see the image of young women sitting by looms with colorful pieces of brocade
decorated with designs of flowers and birds. When these pieces of brocade are finished, they are
dyed and embroidered with beautiful 24 ____________. It is interesting that Hmong women use plants
and leaves to dye these brocade fabrics. And then they roll around and smooth section of wood
covered with wax on fabrics to polish them, making their 25 ____________ durable.
IV. Read the articles about the two famous festivals in Viet Nam, and then decide whether the
statements are true (T), false (F) or not mentioned (NM).
Cow Racing Festival

The purpose of Cow Racing Festival is to celebrate the last day of the year, according to the Khmer
calendar. The festival takes place within the region of Seven Mountains, An Giang Province, from the
29th day of the 8th lunar month to the 2nd day of the 9th lunar month.
Before the competition, from several villages of An Giang Province, best pairs of cows chosen for
joining the activity go under special treatment for months. They are well fed and traditionally taught.
On the racing day, pairs of cows perform their skills on a rice field which must be really muddy and in
a length of 120 meters.
When the race starts, with each pair of cows, the rider, holding a tow, will make them run as fast as
possible by slashing. However, within a pair, the cows must maintain the same speed. The race is a
circular track, including two laps. In the first round, pairs of cows are under control, while, in the
second one, there is no holding back. The pairs which remain until the end of the event and manage
to reach the finish line before their competitors will be the winners. The rider leading their cows to
the first position will be awarded the greatest honour - the bravest rider in the region.
Elephant Racing Festival
To local people in Central Highlands, the elephant has become a close friend with humans as they
help people in working, transporting, and traveling. To express the bond between human beings and
this friendly creature, Elephant Racing Festival, one of the biggest festivals in Central Highlands, is
held annually in the third lunar month.
As preparation for the festival, villagers feed their elephants with a wide range of food apart from
grass, including corn, sugar canes, sweet potatoes, papayas, and bananas. Also, in order to preserve
their strength, the elephants take a rest without hard work.
Attending the event, festival goers are in their most beautiful and colorful holiday clothes. On this day,
elephants from several villages gather at Don Village. Each time, ten elephants will run at the same
time for about one or two kilometers. Therefore, the track’s ground should be large enough. The
competition is guided by the sound of til va, a kind of horn. The first elephant which reaches the
appointed destination will receive a laurel wreath as a sign of victory, and it will enjoy the
achievement excitedly with sugar canes and bananas from surrounding people.
26. Both the festivals are of the ethnic minority groups. _______
27. These are the races for the animals that are considered close friends to local people. _______
28. For both festivals, the animals take part in the competitions in pairs. _______
29. Before the competition, the chosen animals are well fed. _______
30. The preparations for the festivals last several months. _______
31. There are different rules for the two rounds of the Cow Racing Festival. _______
32. The elephants taking part in the competition have a rest without hard work before the event.
_______
33. The rider leading their animals to the first position will be awarded the greatest honor in both
festivals. _______
34. The two festivals are held in the same lunar month. _______
35. A laurel wreath is often made of leaves. _______
V. Read the text, and choose the correct answers.
The Eskimo
Do you think you could live in a world with cold weather, dangerous animals and little daylight? Well,
the Eskimo have done so for thousands of years. Let’s take a look at how they live their lives.
Where do they live?
The Eskimo live in North of Canada, Russia and Alaska. In winter, temperatures can be as low as -50°C
so it’s difficult for plants to grow. Even in summer it rarely gets above zero. The Eskimo people have
been living in extreme conditions for centuries.
What do they look like?
The Eskimo are short and well-built with almond-shaped eyes and straight black hair. They wear large,
thick coats to keep warm during the cold winters. They also wear big boots and furry globes to protect
their hands and feet. The Eskimo are a cheerful and friendly people. Because they live in small groups,
they live in harmony and say 'no’ to arguments and fighting.
How do they live?
Eskimo men are hunters and they spend their days out on the ice looking for whales, seals and even
polar bears to catch and bring back home. In winter they cut holes in the ice and go ice fishing. On
hunting trips, they live in temporary houses called "igloos’ made from blocks of snow.
What are their traditions?
The Eskimo keep their history alive through a tradition of storytelling. The elders teach their children
about their history with stories and legends. A popular tradition is the ‘drum dance’, and the whole
community gets together, and performs songs and dances to the beat of a big drum.
36. What is the writer doing in this text?
A. describing a tribe’s habitat B. explaining a tribe’s traditions
C. giving information about a tribe D. giving details why the Eskimo have survived
37. What do we learn about the Eskimo from the text?
A. their lifestyle and customs B. how they spend their free time
C. how they build their houses D. what makes them special
38. According to the writer, the Eskimo are
A. good fighters B. peaceful C. artistic D. cold
39. What is NOT true about the Eskimo?
A. They are happy people. B. They respect their traditions.
C. They live together peacefully. D. They cannot survive in the cold
40. Which is the best title for the text?
A. Hunting for seals and polar bears B. The people of the North
C. The history of a people D. Living in the wild
VI. Complete the conversation between Nick and Mai about British table manners with the
sentences given (A-J). Practise the conversation with your partner.
A. Right. Hold your knife with the handle in your palm and your fork in the other hand with the prongs
pointing downwards.
B. Yeah, of course, Mai. First, we are expected to eat properly with cutlery, especially fork and knife.
C. You may eat chicken and pizza with your fingers if you are at a barbecue; otherwise, always use a
knife and fork.
D. Of course not. Rest the fork and knife on the plate between mouthfuls, or for a break for
conversation.
E. If you have a knife in one hand, it is wrong to have a fork in the other with the prongs pointed up.
F. Well, the fork is held in the left hand and the knife in the right.
Mai: Can you tell me a little bit about English table manners, Nick?
Nick: 41 ____________________________________________________________________________
Mai: How can we use the fork and the knife in the correct way?
Nick: 42 ____________________________________________________________________________
Mai: I see. But is there anything that we should not do?
Nick: 43 ____________________________________________________________________________
Mai: Our teacher has already mentioned it in the English lesson.
Nick: 44 ____________________________________________________________________________
Mai: Do we hold the knife and the fork all the time?
Nick: 45 ____________________________________________________________________________
VII. Write sentences about good habits to keep the home clean and tidy, using the words given.
Daily Chores to Keep the Home Clean
Teenagers can make the bed when they get up.
46. after that / they / put away clothes / sort dirty clothes / clean ones
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. in order / make / house tidy / they / put away / items / the house / such as / books / shelves /
remote controls with the TV
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. after school / when they get home / they I hang up coats / backpacks / put away / sports
equipment
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. after dinner / they / clear / table / wash and dry the dishes / sweep the kitchen floor / and before
bedtime / they / tidy up / bedroom
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. at the weekend / they / clean / the bathrooms / the corridors / the mirrors
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 UNIT 7.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
A. Pronunciation: /bl/ and /pl/
I. Underline the /bl/ sound, and double underline the /kl/ sound. Then practise reading these
sentences.
1. My father usually has a cup of black coffee for breakfast.
2. His eyes were bright blue.
3. Take a deep breath and blow out the candles on the birthday cake.
4. Today she is wearing a white silk blouse.
5. He became completely blind after the car accident.
6. She’s so clever with her hands.
7. Do you like classical music?
8. “Oh, dear! You blinked just as I took the photograph!”
9. He was climbing up the wall.
10. The apple tree is covered in blossom.
II. Read aloud the minimal pairs of sounds: /bl/ and /kl/.
block clock blue clue black clack blank clank
blouse clouds blip clip blog clog bluster cluster

B. Vocabulary
• Environmental protection
I. Complete the sentences with the words given.
protection littering corals species ecosystem
pollution habitat diversity footprint loss
1. Pollution can have serious effects on the balanced _______________.
2. Businesses have a major role in environmental _______________.
3. With so many areas of woodland being cut down, a lot of wildlife is losing its natural
_______________.
4. The sea turtle is an endangered _______________.
5. Habitat _______________ is occurring all around the world, and it’s damaging or destroying
ecosystems.
6. The company says it is responsible for the _______________ in the river.
7. Flying is the biggest contribution to our carbon _______________.
8. About 60-70 per cent of _______________ growing close to the shore were broken and carried
ashore.
9. He got a ticket and was fined for _______________.
10. The project has tried to maintain the biological _______________ of this rainforest.
II. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs given.
reduce raise practise play turn off
release avoid volunteer save pick up
1. We all need to do our part to _______________ the planet.
2. Try to _______________ foods which contain a lot of fat.
3. Please _______________ the television before you go to bed.
4. The factory had _______________ a quantity of toxic waste into the sea.
5. By _______________ the 3 Rs, we can save resources for the future, and reduce the amount of
waste.
6. They will require car makers to _______________ emissions of carbon dioxide by 30%.
7. I _______________ to help clean up the beach last week.
8. The volunteers tried to _______________ litter on the rivers.
9. The campaign has succeeded in _______________ public awareness of the issue.
10. Schools _______________ an important role in society.
III. Read the text and do the tasks that follow.
When we use 1 _______________ like coal and oil, we put 2 _______________ and other gases into
the atmosphere. These gases form a layer around the Earth and hold in the heat, so the land and the
sea gradually become warmer. This is called 3 _______________.
Most scientists believe that global warming causes 4 _______________. There are more storms, floods
and droughts. Sea levels rise and some 5 _______________may lose their natural habitats.
If we don’t stop global warming, then the problem will get worse. Many countries are trying to reduce
their carbon emissions. They are developing forms of 6 _______________, for example, wind and solar
power.
Task 1. Complete the environmental problems with the words given below.
 energy fuels change species dioxide warming
1. climate ________________ 2. carbon ________________ 3. renewable ______________
4. fossil ________________ 5. global ________________ 6. endangered ____________
Task 2. Complete the text with the correct words from Task 1.
Task 3. Find four more collocations in the text.
1. sea ________________ = how high or low the sea is
2. natural _____________ = where animals live in the wild
3. carbon _____________ = gases from fossil fuels
4. solar _______________ = energy from the sun
IV. Read the ad and choose the correct words.
Protect Our Environment
Join the National Environment Conservation Organisation in its efforts to 1 clean I wash up and 2raise I
rise money to protect the environment. Our campaign will take 3 place I part in Rockwood Forest on
April 20th. Activities will begin at 8 am and will 4 continue / keep until 8 pm. Just bring yourself and a
friend.
Activities you can participate in:
 5 Planting I Putting trees and flowers
 Picking up garbage
 Recycling
 Learning how to tight pollution and 6 protect / power natural habitats
V. Fill in the blanks with the correct words below.
save energy throw away power
containers landfill breaks down
A 1 ________________ is a deep hole in the ground. When we 2 ________________ our garbage, this
is often where it ends up. As this waste 3 ________________, it produces a mixture of gases known as
‘landfill gas’. Scientists are trying to find ways to use it as a(n) 4 ________________ source, but it is
still dangerous and harmful to US and to the Earth. Maybe one day we will be able to use this gas to
5
________________ our cars, but not yet. We should recycle all glass, plastic, and metal
6
________________. If we do this, we will 7 ________________ energy.
 Prepositions
VI. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. People are becoming more aware ________________ environmental issues.
2. The new road will cause a loss ________________ the beauty of landscape.
3. Coal power stations release sulphur dioxide ________________ the atmosphere.
4. Technology is already playing a key role ________________ environmental protection.
5. There is a nice play area ________________ the children.
6. The regions are home ________________ bears and mountain lions.
7. I’d like to emphasise the importance ________________ protecting endangered species.
8. Toxic chemicals continue to be dumped ________________ the river.
9. Orange juice is rich ________________ vitamin C.
10. The pools provide a rich habitat ________________ water plants.

C. Grammar
• Complex sentences with adverb clauses of time
I. Choose the correct word to complete each sentence.
1. Before I When / While she is ready, we will leave.
2. I’ll send you a text message until / as soon as / before I hear from Nam.
3. Before / After I While she goes, she will turn off all the computers.
4. I’ll go online while / as soon as / until I get home.
5. After / Before / While we receive your confirmation email, we will send you a link to download the
programme.
6. I have to wait while / before / until my mum comes home.
7. Before I Until / When Mr. Tan phones, please let me know.
8. Let’s play with the children after / until / while it is time to go.
9. He will send them an email before I until I as soon as he arrives in London.
10. I will give you my reply before / by / this time I leave this afternoon.
II. Match the clauses in the two columns to form complex sentences.
1. I'll phone you when _____ a. when you see him - he looks so different.
2. I want to see Mai _____ b. when she got the job.
3. I'll tell you about our holiday _____ c. when someone phones me.
4. You won’t recognise him _____ d. when I come back.
5. We must do something before _____ e. until the weather is nice.
6. You’ll feel better _____ f. I get home from school.
 7. I felt surprised _____ g. until you are ready - 1 can’t go without you.
8. We have to wait here _____ h. before she goes out.
9. Take a message _____ i. it is too late.
10. I will wait _____ j. when you have had something to eat.
III. Combine each pair of sentences, using the conjunction in brackets
1. You are in Ha Noi again. You must come and see us then. (when)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. He finds somewhere to live. Then he’ll give his parents the address. (when)
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. I do the shopping. Then 1 will come back home. (after)
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. It starts raining. Let’s go home before that. (before)
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. She must apologise to him first. He won’t speak to her until then. (until)
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. You leave. I will make you a cup of tea. (before)
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. She will stay at her aunt’s house. She is London. (while)
___________________________________________________________________________________
8. He has read the newspaper. I will borrow it from him. (as soon as)
___________________________________________________________________________________
9. I have decided the issue. I will let you know. (when)
___________________________________________________________________________________
10. They have built a new road. The traffic will be better. (when)
___________________________________________________________________________________
IV. Combine each pair of sentences, using the conjunction in brackets.
1. The other passengers will get on the bus. We will leave. (as soon as)
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. I left the room. I turned off the lights. (before)
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. I won’t return my book to the library. I’ll finish my project. (until)
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. He was making dinner. The frying pan caught on fire. (while)
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. I finish my study. I will take a walk in the park. (as soon as)
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. She was leaving the shop. She dropped a cartoon of eggs. (when)
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. He had never heard about Halloween. He took part in a Halloween party last year. (before)
___________________________________________________________________________________
8. Shakespeare died in 1616. He had written more than 37 plays. (before)
___________________________________________________________________________________
9. Ms. Hoa won’t answer your email. She has some free time. (until)
___________________________________________________________________________________
10. Susan chews her nails. She feels nervous. (whenever)
___________________________________________________________________________________

D. Reading
I. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
1 2
Light pollution is not _____________ serious as water or air pollution. _____________, it is the
type of pollution that 3 _____________ more in cities than in rural areas. In the past, we could sit out
at night and 4 _____________ at glittering stars in the sky and light from objects in the outer space.
Nowadays, cities are covered with lights from buildings, streets, advertising displays, many of which
5
direct the lights up into the sky and into many unwanted places. The real problem is that it is very
6
_____________ to apply light to almost everything at night. Millions of tons of oil and coal
_____________ to produce the power to light the sky. Eye strain, 7 _____________ of vision and stress
are what people may get from light pollution. 8 _____________ light at night can harm our eyes and
also harm the hormones that help US to see things properly.
1. A. more B. as C. much D. only
2. A. Moreover B. However C. Therefore D. Nevertheless
3. A. happen B. occur C. occurs D. is occurred
4. A. watch B. see C. spend D. gaze
5. A. waste B. wastes C. wasting D. wasteful
6. A. used B. using C. is used D. are used
7. A. lose B. lost C. loss D. losing
8. A. Very much B. Too much C. Too many D. So many
II. Read the text, and mark the sentences true (T), or false (F).
Switch to Green
In Australia it is now illegal to use traditional light bulbs. The whole country is changing to low energy
bulbs for their lights. This will reduce the amount of energy that each home uses and will obviously be
better for the environment. And Australia is not the only country doing this. Will your country be
next?
So, what are the advantages and disadvantages of using the new low energy bulbs? Of course, the
main advantage is for the environment. If all houses in Viet Nam used these bulbs, the effects on the
environment would be the same as taking three quarters of a million cars off the road. Cost is another
advantage. If we changed all the bulbs in our houses, we could cut our energy bills by fifty percent.
There are a few disadvantages, however. The light that these bulbs give is not exactly the same as
light from traditional bulbs. It’s colder and whiter. Some people don’t like it very much. Also, the light
doesn’t come on immediately. After switching on the light you have to wait a short time. Another
disadvantage for some people is that at the moment you can’t make these bulbs give a stronger or
weaker light by using a special switch. But scientists say this will soon be possible.
But if we can help the environment by using these bulbs, are the disadvantages really such a
problem?
1. In Australia you can choose which bulbs to use. ___________
2. It’s expensive to use low energy bulbs. ___________
3. It takes longer for the light to come on. ___________
4. The light from these bulbs is quite weak. ___________
5. The light from traditional bulbs is different. ___________
III. Read the text, and mark the sentences true (T), false (F), or not given (NG).
Let’s Save Planet Earth Now
Our planet is in danger, and we are responsible for this situation. But it’s not too late. We will have to
work together to help save our home.
Did you know that man destroys 50 acres of rainforest every minute? If you throw away two
aluminium cans, you waste more energy than one billion of the world’s poorest people use in one
day. Air conditioning uses 10 times more energy than a fan and so the pollution it creates is 10 times
greater. There are mountains of rubbish everywhere, the Arctic ice cap is melting, animals are
becoming extinct.
So, what can we do to help? Surprisingly, it’s very easy, but we have to do a little every day, otherwise
things will never change. Save electricity: turn off lights, computers, laptops, and TVs when you don’t
need them. Don’t use air conditioning, use a fan instead. One of the best ways to help the planet is to
ride a bike to school. This will help you save money, get more exercise and, more importantly, you
won’t pollute the air. Reuse and recycle and you will help the planet in a positive way.
1. Our planet is at risk. ___________
2. People waste a lot of energy. ___________
3. We use too many aluminium cans. ___________
4. Pollution from a fan is 10 times greater than pollution from air conditioning. ___________
5. People use air conditioners more than fans. ___________
6. Rubbish ends up on mountain tops. ___________
7. It’s too late to change the situation. ___________
8. Laptops waste electricity. ___________
IV. Read the text and fill in the gaps with the correct missing words.
The Ozone Layer
What is the ozone layer?
The ozone layer is like a blanket that surrounds the Earth. Ozone (O 3) is the main gas in this layer.
1
___________ filters out the harmful rays of the sun allowing only the good rays, which give us light
and heat, to reach the Earth.
The problem
2 3
___________ the 1980s, scientists discovered a large hole ___________ the ozone layer over
4
Antarctica. They found that some chemicals people used ___________ make aerosol sprays
destroyed the ozone layer very quickly.
The effects
5
As the hole in the ozone layer continues to grow, our planet ___________ be in danger. The
temperature will rise and the sun’s rays will become very harmful to our skin and eyes. Animals
6
___________ plants will die and some species may even become extinct.
The solution
Although a 7 ___________ of countries stopped using some of these harmful chemicals in 1987, the
ozone layer continues to be in danger. Scientists are trying to find ways to help the ozone layer fix
itself, 8 ___________ there is still a lot of work to do.
V. Read the text, and do the tasks that follow.
The Great Pacific Garbage Patch
 Question: Where’s the biggest garbage dump in the world?
Answer: It’s in the North Pacific Ocean.
Incredibly, the Great Pacific Garbage Patch is bigger than the US. It was discovered in 1997 by Captain
Charles Moore, who was sailing to California after a boat race. Moore told scientists that he’d seen
millions of plastic bottles, bags, and other trash in the water. He later published articles about his
experience, and even presented YouTube videos.
Scientists discovered that the plastic in the ‘Patch’ was kept together by collecting plastic in its centre
and stopping it from escaping. The plastic breaks into tiny parts, until it looks like ‘plastic soup’. Non-
biodegradable materials, like metal and most kinds of plastic, aren’t very environmentally friendly
because they can last for hundreds of years.
 Question: How was the Great Pacific Garbage Patch created?
Answer: It was made by people like you and me.
Look around. How many plastic objects can you see right now? The average American uses around
190 pounds (86 kilograms) of plastic every year. Only around half of all plastic trash is buried in
garbage dumps. Plastic trash which isn’t buried often ends up in rivers and streams, and eventually
reaches the ocean.
This plastic water pollution can hurt or kill sea animals, including endangered species. For example,
rare loggerhead sea turtles sometimes eat plastic bags because they look like their favourite food
jellyfish.
Plastic is dangerous for US, too. It’s eaten by fish, which we may then eat ourselves. Even more
worryingly, plastic stops sunlight from reaching algae, which then dies. Algae are very useful because
they absorb harmful carbon dioxide gases (a major cause of global warming), and they also make up
about 70 percent of all the oxygen we breathe.
 Question: How can we solve the problem?
Answer: We can’t!
Unfortunately, experts have said that it would be impossible to ‘clean’ the whole ocean. It’s too big.
What we can do is teach people about the dangers of ocean trash. In 2010, David de Rothschild sailed
from California to Australia in a boat which he called the Plastiki. It was made from 12,5000 plastic
bottles. The voyage was reported around the world and helped to publicize the problem.
You can help too, by making sure you always put your trash in a bin. Use less plastic if you can. For
example, use paper bags instead of plastic bags, and don't buy chewing gum. Not many people know
this, but it’s also made from plastic.
Task 1. In which section can you find these things or people? Write 1, 2 or 3, then write the name of
the thing or person.
Example: a vehicle which is made from plastic: 1, the Plastiki
1. a living thing which makes oxygen: _________________
2. a sailor who travelled from the us to Australia: _________________
3. a sailor who made an interesting scientific discovery: _________________
4. a food that is made from plastic: _________________
5. another non-biodegradable that isn’t plastic: _________________
6. an animal which looks like a plastic bag: _________________
Task 2. Read the article again. Answer the questions with full sentences.
1. Why was Captain Charles Moore sailing in the Pacific Ocean?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. How does our plastic trash reach the ocean?
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. What living things sometimes eat plastic trash?
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. How did the voyage on the Plastiki help?
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. How can student readers help?
__________________________________________________________________________________
VI. Read the texts, and do the tasks that follow.
 Clean Up Australia Day
Grace Rees has recently taken part in Clean Up Australia Day. She spent the day collecting drinks
containers, sweet wrappers and small pieces of paper from a beach near her home.
Grace has been involved in this event for about five years now. ‘I’ve always done it with my school,
but this year my friends and I decided to register as our own group. We think it’s good not only to pick
up the rubbish, but to bring people’s attention to the fact that there is a lot of rubbish out there. If
you do it with friends and family, then it means you can have fun and do something useful at the
same time. It’s an important thing to do. We have such a beautiful environment, and rubbish spoils it.’
The first Clean Up Day event took place in Sydney in 1989, when Australian Ian Kiernan, who had just
sailed around the world, decided to take action for something he felt strongly about: the amount of
plastic pollution in ocean 1 ____________. He was worried that the polluted seas were affecting sea
2
____________ and that this was leading to some of them becoming 3 ____________.
The following year, the day became known as Clean Up Australia Day, and people all over the
4
continent joined in to collect rubbish. Every year, more and more of the ____________ take part,
and today it is one of the most successful community events which improve the 5 ____________.
In 2000, the event became Clean Up The World and over 40 million volunteers from over 120
countries took pan IO change the look of the 6 ____________, getting rid of huge amounts of rubbish.
Task 1. Read the last three paragraphs of the text, and decide which answer A, B, C or D best fits
each gap.
1. A. places B. habitats C. locations D. societies
2. A. creatures B. bodies C. pets D. things
3. A. gone B. disappeared C. endangered D. warned
4. A. human B. person C. man D. population
5. A. environment B. climate C. situation D. location
6. A. view B. scenery C. landscape D. picture
Task 2. Read the text and choose the correct answers.
1. What is Grace’s attitude towards Clean Up Australia Day?
A. She doesn’t particularly enjoy the tasks she has to do.
B. She thinks schools should allow students time off to take part in it.
C. She sees it as an opportunity to tell other people about rubbish problems.
2. Ian Kiernan began the event because ____________.
A. he realised that some sea creatures had disappeared.
B. he thought people were using too much plastic
C. he noticed that other countries were much cleaner
3. Which comment best describes the Clean Up Australia Day event?
A. It’s a great day for the families to meet up to discuss their problems.
B. It’s a time when people listen to Ian Kiernan’s talk about the environment.
C. It’s a period of time when people work together to achieve something good.
Task 3. Match the bold words in the text to the definitions.
1. ____________ have clear opinions
2. ____________ groups of people with similar interests
3. ____________ having an influence on
4. ____________ go in a direction
5. ____________ do something to solve a problem
VII. Read the texts, and do the tasks that follow.
Talking about Green Cities Around the World
More than half the world’s population now lives in cities. The population of cities is getting bigger and
pollution is getting worse. So which cities are trying to solve this? We asked you which cities you think
are the greatest.
“I chose Barcelona because I 1 ____________ it’s a great example of a green city. There are lots of
buses here and people often ride their bike to school or walk. There is also a metro system and cable
2
cars. I think that the pollution from cars is a really big ____________, so Barcelona is a green city
because it encourages people to take other forms of 3 ____________instead of their cars. Also, there
are lots of parks in the 4 ____________of the city because it strongly believes in keeping the city green
5
and healthy. The parks have lots of grass and trees and the air ____________is very good. People
6
____________to them to relax, to have lunch or to play sport.” Calen
“Bogota in Colombia is an interesting city because in 2016 it had a week where no cars were allowed
into the city. There were buses but not many taxis. The city has also had ‘Cycle Sunday’ for over 30
years. The roads become bicycle paths. I think that’s really cool because then you really think about
the environment. The idea is that there is less pollution and everyone has to get into town in a ‘green’
way - walking, cycling, or bus. The idea was so successful that the mayor decided to create 300km of
bicycle lanes, which increased bicycle use by five times in the city. There's a good reason for it being
called ‘the greenest city in Latin America'!” Poppy
“Singapore is a green city in Asia. I think something like 30% of the city is covered by trees and green
spaces. The trees help to reduce the hot temperature and noise from traffic, giving people who live in
Singapore a better quality of life. Even the airport is green because there are gardens and a butterfly
farm. That’s so smart! In the past, there was a lot of pollution but now Singapore wants to be famous
for being green. I found a website about green things in Singapore and things you can do. You can pick
up the rubbish in your area with your friends. I think it’s great and people learn that it’s not good to
leave rubbish on the street.” Winston
“I didn’t think Australia had a lot of pollution, but it does. Adelaide in South Australia is a green city.
There are 29 parks and there’s a big hotel there which recycles its energy and water. Also, there are a
lot of cycle paths and you can hire a bike for free. That’s really good. There is a bus that doesn’t use
petrol: it is solar powered - you know, it uses energy from the sun! That’s awesome!” Kelly
Task 1. Write the topics mentioned in the correct columns. Sometimes more than one column is
correct.
animal life bicycle parks pollution public transport recycling rubbish
Barcelona Bagotá Singapore Adelaide

Task 2. Read the paragraph about Barcelona again. Choose the correct word for each space.
1. A. imagine B. guess C. think D. wonder
2. A. complication B. problem C. operation D. situation
3. A. transport B. vehicle C. travel D. movement
4. A. middle B. inside C. zone D. area
5. A. standard B. condition C. quality D. level
6. A. visit B. arrive C. go D. move
Task 3. Which writer...
1. was surprised by some information? ____________
2. thinks that one kind of transport should not cost any money? ____________
3. thinks an idea is intelligent? ____________
4. likes an idea because it makes people think about the environment? ____________
5. thinks people need to learn to be tidy? ____________
6. thinks it’s a good idea to reuse things? ____________
VIII. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage.

California has 8 national parks and 20 national forests, more than any other state. Yosemite National
Park is one of the most visited parks. It is famous for its waterfalls and granite cliffs. Many rock
climbers go to Yosemite to climb a rock wall named El Capitan. Point Reyes National Seashore is on a
peninsula north of San Francisco. It is a good place to see harbour seals, sea lions, and many kinds of
birds. Disneyland in Anaheim is another California tourist attraction. This large amusement park was
created by cartoonist Walt Disney. It features a fairyland castle, a haunted mansion, a jungle safari,
and many other attractions and rides.

San Diego has a world-famous zoo. As you wander through its Rain Forest Aviary, brightly coloured
tropical birds fly by. You will think you are on safari in its outdoor Wild Animal Park, north of San
Diego. Sea World in San Diego is a great place to watch whales and dolphins perform. California’s
sunny climate, long coastline, and natural beauty have made it the most popular tourist state in the
United States.
1. Yosemite National Park ____________.
A. is famous for its kinds of birds
B. is one of the 20 national parks in California
C. interests rock climbers with its El Capitan, a rock wall
D. is created by a cartoonist
2. San Francisco ____________.
A. is famous for its Point Reyes National Seashore
B. has its special waterfalls and granite cliffs
C. has more wildlife than anywhere else in California
D. attracts lots of young children
3. Anaheim attracts many tourists with its ____________.
A. El Capitan B. Wild Animal Park C. Sea World D. Disneyland
4. San Diego is worth visiting if you are ____________.
A. a newly-married couple B. an animal lover
C. an enthusiastic rock climber D. a movie fan
5. Which of the following statements is true about California?
A. It has the most national parks and forests of the US states.
B. Its Disneyland with the fairyland castle is the most famous national park.
C. It attracts lots of tourists with its modem life.
D. It is a peninsula north of the United States of America.
IX. Read the passage carefully, and then choose the correct answer.

Yellowstone National Park was established in 1872. Located in northwestern Wyoming and extending
into Montana and Idaho, the park is known for its spectacular geysers, hot springs, canyons, and fossil
forests. Yellowstone was the world’s first national park.
Yellowstone National Park encompasses a large area of unspoiled wilderness that is almost entirely
forested. The most common tree is the lodgepole pine, but other varieties of pine, as well as spruce,
fir, and juniper are also found in Yellowstone.
The park is one of the largest wildlife sanctuaries in the United States. Among the more than 300
animal species found here are grizzly bears, elk, deer, antelope, moose, bighorn sheep, coyotes, and
lynx. During summer, thousands of wapiti or American elk graze in the park. More than 1,300 bison,
which almost became extinct in the park, roam the eastern sections. Wolves, once thought to be a
menace, were reintroduced to the park in 1995 after being hunted and trapped to the brink of
extinction early in the 20th century. Nearly 300 species of birds, including bald eagles, osprey, white
pelicans, California gulls, and Canada geese, either live in or visit the park. The rare trumpeter swan
also frequents the area and is protected within the park.
1. Which statement is NOT true according to the passage?
A. Yellowstone was established in 1872.
B. Yellowstone was the world’s first national park.
C. Yellowstone is located totally in northwestern Wyoming.
D. Yellowstone is famous for its spectacular geysers, hot springs, canyons, and fossil forests.
2. What do wapiti do during summer?
A. They roam in the park. B. They visit the park.
C. They graze in the park. D. They frequent the park.
3. Which kind of animal almost became extinct early in the 20th century?
A. bison B. bald eagles C. trumpeter swan D. wolves
4. What is the purpose of the passage?
A. To discuss the dangers the flora of the park has to face
B. To discuss the dangers the fauna of the park has to face
C. To show the bad condition of the park
D. To give information about the park
5. What is the word ‘encompasses’ in paragraph 2 closest in meaning to?
A. surrounds B. includes C. has D. contains

E. Speaking
• Everyday English
I. Choose the correct response. Then practise the short exchanges in pairs.
1. A: Look at the river! The fish are dead. B: a/ I think it’s because of water pollution.
b/ The water is polluting. Right?
2. A: Why are we worried about the air B: a/ Because we can’t find the cause.
 pollution?
b/ Because more people will have breathing
problems.
3. A: Some factories dump waste into rivers. B: a/ The government must fine them heavily.
b/ We don’t use the water from the rivers.
4. A: Street lights are not very bright! B: a/ No problem. Bright street lights can cause
light pollution.
b/I think we need much brighter street lights.
It’s good for the environment.
5. A: Do you know the effects of the increase in B: a/ The water becomes warmer, and aquatic
water temperatures? animals will grow so fast.
b/ Some aquatic animals are unable to
reproduce, I think so.
6. A: We can use water as much as we want. It’s B: a/ Swimming pools need a lot of water.
very cheap! b/ We save water for other people, too.
7. A: Why do you keep the air conditioner at B: a/ Well, it can save electricity.
that temperature? b/ It’s good for the plants in the room.
8. A: How can we stop littering? B: a/ We should do something to make it
greener. b/ We can place dustbins in various
places.
9. A: Do you think graffiti is a good art? B: a/ We don’t know when and where it started.
b/ Too much graffiti can cause visual pollution.
10. A: Is acid rain harmful to us? B: a/ Certainly. It makes the water polluted.
b/ Those factories produce a lot of acid.
• Talking about a national park
II. Use the cues given to answer the following questions, then practise the dialogue with your
partner about Cue Phuong National Park.
- Cue Phuong National Park / located 160 km south west of Ha Noi
- the first national park in Viet Nam / in 1960
- Ninh Binh, Hoa Binh and Thanh Hoa provinces
- over 200 square kilometres of rainforest
- during the dry season, from October to April
- about 2,000 different species of flora and 450 species of fauna
- tourists / study butterflies, visit caves, hike mountains and look at the 1,000-year-old tree
- many others / see the work being done to protect endangered species
- Nguyen Hue’s army was stationed at Quen Voi (Quèn Voi) - a mountain pass in Cue Phuong, before it
made a surprise attack on Thang Long to defeat the Qing invaders in the spring of 1789
- the Muong ethnic minority / bee keeping and farming
1. Where is Cue Phuong National Park?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. When was it established?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. How many provinces does Cue Phuong National Park belong to?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. What is the area of the rainforest in Cue Phuong National Park?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. When is the best time to visit Cue Phuong National Park?
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. How many species of flora and fauna are there?
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. What do many tourists visit Cue Phuong National Park for?
___________________________________________________________________________________
8. What do many other people come to Cue Phuong for?
___________________________________________________________________________________
9. What place in Cue Phuong is related to the victory of King Nguyen Hue?
___________________________________________________________________________________
10. What do the Muong ethnic minority in Cue Phuong live mainly on?
___________________________________________________________________________________
• Asking for clarification
III. Match the answers to the following questions.
1. What do you mean by saying ‘endangered species loss’?
2. Do you mean by saying ‘carbon footprint’? Is it the mark made by a person’s foot?
3. Could you explain what you mean by ‘single-use’?
4. Could you give us an example of light pollution?
5. I wonder if you could say that in a different way about desertification.
6. I’m not quite sure what you mean that human activities may harm biodiversity?
7. Could you be more specific about green products?
8. I don’t quite see what you mean that planting trees can save our environment.
9. It sounds like what you’re saying is using a lot of street light is not good. Is that right?
10. When you say acid rain, do you mean?
_______ a. In other words, it can lead to light pollution, and we can’t see the stars in the sky.
_______ b. To put it differently, it’s rain that contains harmful chemicals from factories gases and it
can damage crops and trees.
_______ c. To say this differently, human activities can make the environment imbalanced with the
loss of some species.
_______ d. Sorry, let me explain that. Carbon footprint is a measurement of the amount of carbon
dioxide that a person produces.
_______ e. Let me give an example of that. Too much use of electric lights in cities may cause light
pollution.
_______ f. Let me explain that again. When we plant trees, we can make our environment clean and
reduce pollution.
_______ g. Let me explain that. Endangered species loss means that the number of species is
becoming smaller.
_______ h. Sorry, let me explain it again. They are produced with the minimum effects on the
environment.
_______ i. Let me explain that in more detail. ‘Single-use’ refers to something that is made to be used
once only.
_______ j. Let me put it in another way. When an area or a region becomes a desert, we call it
desertification.

F. Writing
• Writing a notice
I. Write meaningful sentences from the words given to complete the notice.
Quang Trung Middle School in Ha Noi
 NOTICE
March 10, 20...
The Painting Competition on World Environment Day
1. our school / organising / painting competition / because / very important / make our efforts /
protect / climate and environment
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. paintings / the ability / expand knowledge / change attitudes / behaviours
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. students who are interested / contest / contact the school organisers / March 20, 20...
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Contest details:
Time:
4. your paintings / handed in before April 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
Announcement of prizes: 8 am - 10 am Sunday April 15
Topic: Environmental protection
5. any questions / please contact / 024-823-1804 / email qthnmiddleschool@gmail.com
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Principal
Mr. Trung Nguyen
II. Write meaningful sentences from the words given to complete the notice.
Le Quy Don Middle School
NOTICE
April 10, 20...
POSTER CONTEST
1. students / submit a poster / communicate awareness / how plastic waste / harm / our environment
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. posters / made / large poster paper (30 cm X 45 cm) / and / student’s name / printed clearly / the
bottom / the poster
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. top three winning submissions / receive great prizes / and / issued / the school magazine
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Submission deadline: Friday, April 10, 20...
4. you I email I application form I and I description I poster /
postercontest_lequydonms@gmail.com.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. your poster / handed in the school’s art club / before / deadline
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Winners will be announced on Earth Day on April 22, 20...
• An article suggesting solutions to problems
III. Read the model article and answer the questions
For ages, people hunted animals for food and for their fur and skin, but now many of them are in
danger of extinction. If we don’t take action now, many of these animals will disappear forever.
The problem is that some people still hunt animals just for sport. This harms the animal populations
because many of the adult animals die. This leaves the smaller ones unprotected. Many of the babies
do not survive without their parents. In addition, many people still buy goods and souvenirs that are
made from endangered animals such as fur, leather, and ivory.
To protect these animals we must ask our governments to ban the hunting of endangered species in
our country. We should also stop buying products made from these animals and use other natural
materials for clothing or decorative items. If we all do our part, maybe hunting will stop completely
and the animals will no longer be in danger of extinction.
1. What is the problem?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. What are its effects?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. What are the possible solutions?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. In which paragraph is each of the above?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST (UNIT 7)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. coral B. ecosystem C. dugong D. oxygen
2. A. resident B. release C. extinction D. endangered
3. A. product B. substance C. number D. include
4. A. rivers B. carbon C. littering D. turn
5. A. release B. resident C. diverse D. ecosystem
II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. Awareness of environmental damage from ______________ bags is growing.
A. simple-use B. single-uses C. single-use D. single-used
7. They announced an analys is of the carbon ______________ of leading companies.
A. spaces B. contents C. emissions D. footprints
8. The CCTV cameras are intended to reduce ______________ in the area.
A. untidiness B. emptiness C. littering D. dropping
9. She studies mountain gorillas in their natural ______________.
A. habitual B. habitat C. living D. place
10. This region is the ______________ of many species of wild flowers.
A. home B. house C. household D. homework
11. The restaurant has a ______________ menu that includes dishes from all over the world.
A. different B. various C. diverse D. diversity
12. ______________ in the area includes deer, bears, and eagles.
A. Wildfire B. Wild life C. Wildly D. Wildlife
13. Their main goal is to promote environmental ______________.
A. loss B. problem C. issue D. protection
14. Unfortunately, fertilizers from surrounding farmland has reduced the ______________ life.
A. marine B. sea C. water D. lake
15. They were fined for illegally ______________ waste into the river.
A. treating B. dumping C. dealing with D. creating
III. Complete the text with the words below.
recycle efficient preserve climate change waste
 responsible simple reduce amount future
Our homes waste a lot of power. This is why many people are changing their homes into ‘smart’
16
homes. Smart homes use technology to become more ______________. Some devices you might
find in a smart home are smart thermostats, solar power, and smart water faucets. Smart thermostats
17
are used to ______________ the costs of heating and cooling. Solar power is created by the sun,
which means it is free and renewable. Smart faucets have new technologies to help you save water.
18
These are just a few devices we can use to be more energy efficient, reduce ______________, and
19
help protect and ______________ our planet. We can also help save our planet by making it our
20
duty to ______________ as much as possible. The simple thing can reduce the 21
22
______________ of garbage we create. Another ______________ thing is to take public
transportation to reduce how much energy we use and how much pollution we create. Pollution
23 24
causes ______________, which has become a serious threat to the ______________ of our
planet. We are all 25 ______________ for taking care of our Earth, and we must start taking care of it
now!
IV. Choose the correct word to complete each sentence.
26. I’ll stay here while / before I until Jack gets back and we’ll go together.
27. When / Before / Until you read his stories, you know that he’s a good writer.
28. You are too young to understand. I will explain it to you when / before I while you are older.
29. The children will want to go swimming before / as soon as / until they see the river.
30. The plane won’t take off after / until / while the clouds go off.
31. He will give you a job when / before / until you have enough qualifications.
32. I will finish my homework before / until / as soon as my father arrives home late this evening.
33. I will do the next task as soon as / before / by the time I have finished the first one.
34. Mother to her son: I won’t let you watch TV before / when / until you finish your homework.
35. He usually surfs the Internet on his smartphone before / after / while he is waiting for the bus.
V. Combine each pair of sentences, using the conjunction in brackets.
36. We will feel much older. We reach our 14th birthday. (when)
__________________________________________________________________________________
37. He left for work. He had a cup of tea. (before)
__________________________________________________________________________________
38. He likes to watch TV. He gets home from work. (after)
__________________________________________________________________________________
39. My cat hides under the sofa. It rains. (while)
__________________________________________________________________________________
40. We finish our training. We will get a job. (after)
__________________________________________________________________________________
41. The working conditions are good. Workers work better. (when)
__________________________________________________________________________________
42. The village will have no electricity. A new generator has been installed. (until)
__________________________________________________________________________________
43. I saw an accident. I was waiting for my bus. (while)
__________________________________________________________________________________
44. The lake is calm. You can catch a lot of fish. (when)
__________________________________________________________________________________
45. You learn to relax more. You won’t get good results. (until)
__________________________________________________________________________________
VI. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Tropical forests have 46 ___________ us with very many sorts of plants for food, 47
___________ and
industry. They could probably supply man more. They also reduce 48 ___________ and droughts, keep
49
water clean, and slow down the Greenhouse Effect, ___________ the tropical forests are
50 51
___________ destroyed to make ___________ for things like farms, ranches, mines and
hydroelectric 52 ___________. About 20 million hectares are lost each year - an area more than twice
the size of Austria. The World Wildlife Fund is working to 53 ___________ and save the forests that are
54
___________ danger; to plant new trees for fuel wood and to slow down the Greenhouse Effect;
55
and to ___________ governments to think about the forests and their importance when giving
international aid.
46. A. given B. brought C. supplied D. donated
47. A. medicine B. hospitals C. doctors D. surgeons
48. A. deserts B. floods C. heat D. hazards
49. A. so B. for C. because D. but
50. A. have B. been C. being D. be
51. A. room B. rooms C. place D. places
52. A. sources B. energy C. dams D. cables
53. A. keep B. protect C. maintain D. hold
54. A. at B. within C. on D. in
55. A. make B. let C. encourage D. influence
VII. Read the passage, and do the tasks that follow.
There are many causes that lead to water pollution. One main cause of this issue is waste water
coming from many factories and then being directly pulled out into water bodies, especially into rivers
or seas without any treatment because this is the most convenient way of disposing waste water.
Industrial waste consists of some kind of chemical substance such as sulphur, which is harmful to
marine life. Lead is known as the main reason for cancer disease. Cancer has become a popular
disease in several communes which are called “cancer villages”. Another cause is the awareness of
citizens, people always use water for many purposes and then they dump waste water or garbage
directly into rivers, canals, and ponds and so on. In 2004, because of bird flu outbreak in Viet Nam,
people threw poultry to water body that made water highly polluted.
Task 1. Read the passages again, and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).
56. Waste water from many factories which is dumped into water bodies directly causes water
pollution. _____
57. Dumping waste directly into water is the most convenient way of disposing waste water. _____
58. Sulphur is believed the main reason for cancer. _____
59. Cancer villages occurred in 2004. _____
60. Due to lack of awareness, people poisoned water with dead poultry when there was bird flu
outbreak in 2004. _____
Task 2. Match each underlined word in the text with the definition, writing the answer in each
blank.
61. convenient (adj) _____ A. birds, like hens, ducks, geese... that are kept for eggs and meat
62. marine (adj) _____ B. knowledge
63. awareness (n) _____ C. connected with the sea
64. outbreak (n) _____ D. suitable or practical for a particular purpose
65. poultry (n) _____ E. the sudden beginning of something unpleasant
VIII. Read the passage, and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each question.
 Saving the Environment: One Home at a Time
Pollution can be seen not only throughout the world, but also in our own homes. It comes from
household chemicals, the amount of water people use and the waste people produce and throw
away. What can be done to stop this pollution? Surprisingly, a person can help save the environment
by doing simple things.
First, we need to recycle, which allows products to be used over and over again. Recycling can also
reduce the number of trees cut down to produce paper products. It takes very little effort. It is not
hard to place plastic and glass bottles, aluminum cans and paper in a bin. Anyone can do it.
Second, we need to watch the amount of water used in the home. It can be conserved by taking short
showers instead of baths, repairing leaky faucets, using the dishwasher or washing machine only
when fully loaded, or simply turning the faucet off while brushing your teeth.
Third, we need to reduce waste. We need to recycle whenever possible, but should also try to use this
waste effectively. For example, grass clippings and food scraps can be made into compost for plants.
The average person produces 4.3 pounds of waste every day, but we can reduce that amount by
recycling and reusing.
If we do our part in our own homes, we can help keep the planet from becoming more polluted.
66. Pollution can be caused from the following sources except ____________.
A. house chemicals B. water from households
C. wastes D. water in rivers
67. Recycling can help us ____________.
A. never cut down trees
B. use products again and again
C. place garbage bins easily
D. produce more paper products following things except.
68. In order to save water, we can do all of the ____________.
A. take short showers instead of baths
B. repair leaky faucets
C. fully use the washing machine
D. turn the faucet off' while brushing your teeth
69. Recycling helps to reduce waste because ____________.
A. plants need to develop
B. a person can do it in his home
C. waste can be recycled and reused
D. an average man produces compost for plants
70. The word “It” in paragraph 2 refers to ____________.
A. recycling B. the number C. cutting down D. effort
IX. Use the cues given to answer the following questions, then practise the dialogue with your
partner about Yellowstone National Park in the USA.
- the world’s oldest national park / also the world's largest park
- famous for its geysers
- Old Faithful / hot water I shoot hundreds of feet into the air every hour
- 2.5 million people I visit I park / each year
- tourists / not allowed to pick the flowers / not feed or hunt animals
71. What is special about Yellowstone National Park in the USA?
__________________________________________________________________________________
72. What is Yellowstone famous for?
__________________________________________________________________________________
73. Why is Old Faithful the most famous geyser?
__________________________________________________________________________________
74. How many people visit the park each year?
__________________________________________________________________________________
75. What are the rules for tourists to Yellowstone?
__________________________________________________________________________________
X. Write meaningful sentences from the words given to complete the notice.
Hoang Mai Middle School
NOTICE
March 22, 20...
Creation for Environmental Protection
76. students / collect / recycled waste / bottles, jars, used paper / stars
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
77. every 3 kg / used paper / exchanged 11 star / 5 kg of cardboard / 1 star / 10 used batteries / 1 star
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
78. after exchanging stars / everyone / choose trees / 1 star / 10 stars.
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
79. if / do not have enough stars I people / pay more money / buy / tree / a rate I 10,000 VND / 1 star
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
80. volunteers / classify / waste / and / recycled waste / sent / a recycling factory nearby
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
 UNIT 8.
SHOPPING
A. Pronunciation: /sp/ and /st/
I. Read the following sentences aloud, and put the words with the cluster /sp/ or /st/ into the
correct column.
1. How do you spell your surname?
2. He is going to make a speech to city businessmen.
3. How much does your family spend on food each week?
4. John did a lot of sport when he was at school.
5. Could you speak more slowly?
6. My brother is a stamp collector.
7. The house was built of grey stone.
8. Potato crisps are my favourite snack.
9. hat is the best way to get to the museum from here?
10. Indonesian food is rather spicy.
11. The castle stands on a hill.
12. She always reads the children a bedtime story.
/sp/ /st/

II. Complete the following sentences with the correct words below with the cluster /sp/ or /st/, and
then read aloud the sentences.
space spicy stone station best speech
sport stadium speak stamps spend stood
1. The child lost the power of ____________ from birth.
2. I am going to ____________ the weekend at the grandparents’ house.
3. She used to play a lot of ____________ when she was younger.
4. Do you like ____________ food like Indian curry?
5. The boy picked up a ____________ and threw it into the river.
6. Are you sure this is the ____________ way of doing it?
7. My brother is a keen collector of ____________.
8. Does anyone here ____________ French?
9. Who was the first to go into ____________?
10. She said she ____________ up for a long time and her ankles hurt.
11. Thousands of fans in the ____________ were watching the match.
12. He has been working for a local television ____________ for 10 years.

B. Vocabulary
• Words about shopping
I. Complete the sentences with the words given.
market supermarket range price tag speciality
shopaholic produce seller convenience costumes
1. How much is it? I can’t find the ____________.
2. The shop sells only fresh local ____________.
3. The ____________ chain announced that it was cutting the cost of all its fresh and frozen meat.
4. The children were dressed in Halloween ____________.
5. The ____________ of the painting was kept secret.
6. All our fruit comes from the farmers’ ____________.
7. Most ____________ stores are located on busy street corners or at gas stations.
8. She used to be an absolute ____________ until she had a baby.
9. A ____________ shop is a shop that sells unusual or special products.
10. They sell a wide ____________ of skin-care products.
II. Complete the sentences with the adjectives given.
home-grown home-made well-lit free online
year-round open-air unhappy convenient fixed
1. Click on this link to visit our ____________ bookstore.
2. We had lunch at a(n) ____________ café in the city square.
3. The family sells their ____________ vegetables at the local market.
4. A bike is a very ____________ way of getting around.
5. Farmers’ markets are a traditional way of selling home-grown fruits and ____________ products
effectively.
6. These ____________ prices give farmers a good life.
7. Drivers should park in a(n) ____________ area to prevent theft at night.
8. All the parks in our city are open ____________.
9. The store has changed its image in an effort to win back ____________ customers.
10. They are offering a(n) ____________ gift with each product we buy.
III. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs given.
make wander try on hang out bargain
missed grow browse display return
1. I ____________ the start of the class because my bus was late.
2. The company is ____________ with growers over the price of coffee.
3. ____________ a shopping list to prevent buying unnecessary things.
4. The trip allows you plenty of time for around the shops.
5. Some people ____________ their goods on stalls, while others had just put them out on the
pavement.
6. ____________ the shoes to see if they fit.
7. Haven't you got anything better to do than ____________ with friends at the shopping centre?
8. We spent the morning ____________ around the old part of the city.
9. The new TV broke so they ____________ it to the shop.
10. The villagers ____________ coffee and maize to sell in the market.
IV. Complete the gaps in the text with the words given.
life point values goods villages
costumes atmosphere exchange visitors sellers
The Bac Ha Market Fair in the northwestern mountainous province of Lao Cai takes place at weekends
and serves as a goods 1 ____________ and a sales point of 14 ethnic groups living in Bac Ha District
and surrounding regions. 2 ____________ bring to the fair many kinds of 3 ____________ such as tea,
fruits, honey, silver jewellery, horses, oxen, pigs...
4 5
The busy, colourful ____________ at the fair reflects the community ____________ of the
northwestern mountainous ethnic groups with their unique traditional cultural 6 ____________. Men
and women go the market fair in their traditional brocade 7 ____________, forming an attraction to
many domestic and foreign 8 ____________. The market fair also serves as a meeting 9 ____________
10
for residents of remote ____________, and even for matchmaking among young people in the
region.
 Prepositions
V. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. When we bought this house, there were many homes ____________ sale.
2. Everything goes ____________ sale as soon as the doors open. Today is Black Friday.
3. He spent a lot of time listening to DVDs and just hanging out ____________ friends.
4. Would you prefer to pay ____________ cash, cheque or credit card?
5. He chose a shirt ____________ the many in the shop.
6. I tried ____________ six pairs of trousers before I found a pair that fitted.
7. Everything went according ____________ the schedule.
8. ____________ reasons of security, the door is always kept locked.
9. The restaurant charges high prices ____________ its food.
10. We wandered ____________ the beautifully decorated rooms of the Palace.

C. Grammar
• Adverbs of frequency
I. Look at the table about Ann’s week at school. Write sentences in the present simple with the
correct adverbs of frequency (always, usually, often, sometimes, rarely and never).
Ann’s week at school Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri
eat breakfast     
walk to school    
be late for school
play badminton after school   
watch TV 
have Maths lessons  
1. _________________________________________________________________________________
2. _________________________________________________________________________________
3. _________________________________________________________________________________
4. _________________________________________________________________________________
5. _________________________________________________________________________________
6. _________________________________________________________________________________
II. Rewrite the sentences. Change the underlined words to adverbs of frequency, and put them in
the correct order in the sentences.
1. Dad cooks two or three times a week.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. The cat is outside nearly all the time.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. We play football four or five times a week.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. I only see Ann twice a year.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Music lessons are interesting all the time.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. I don’t read French books at any time.
___________________________________________________________________________________
III. Complete the text with the adverbs of frequency given below.
always (x2) hardly never often sometimes usually (x2)
When I get up, I 1 ___________ have a shower (every day). I 2 ___________ have toast for breakfast
(nine times out of ten). I 3 ___________ coffee (I hate it). I 4 ___________ drink milk (four or five times
a week), but I 5 ___________ drink tea (two or three times a week). After school, I 6 ___________ go
7
home (almost every day). I ___________ go out on school days (about once a year) because our
teachers 8 ___________ give us lots of homework (every day).
• Present simple for future events
IV. Do these sentences refer to the habitual present (P) or the future events (F)? Write p or F at the
end of each question.
1. He leaves home at eight, walks to the station, and catches the 8.30 train. He always gets to the
office before nine.
_____
2. The manager leaves Ha Noi on Sunday morning, arrives in Australia next Monday and starts work
next Tuesday. _____
3. Your plane leaves Ho Chi Minh City at 8.30 and arrives in Ha Noi at 10.30. _____
4. I travel by the 8.30 train because it gets to the city before ten o’clock. _____
5. You take the 1.30 train from London which connects with the night ferry from Brighton. You arrive
in Paris an hour before your appointment. _____
6. She always takes the night train from Edinburgh which arrives in London at half past six. _____
7. The Prime Minister arrives in India on Tuesday, spends a couple of hours in Delhi, then goes on to
Malaysia. _____
8. The bus leaves at four o’clock, we get to Ha Noi at seven, and we have to register at the hotel
before half past eight. _____
9. The local train is very slow and stops at all the stations between here and Ha Noi. _____
10. The ship leaves the port at 12.00. It takes an hour, so you get there at 14.00 French time. _____
V. Put the verb in brackets into the correct form, present simple or present continuous for future
events.
1. I ____________ (go) to the theatre this evening.
2. ____________ (the film I begin) at 7.30 pm or 8.30 pm?
3. We____________ (have) a party next Saturday. Would you like to come?
4. The art exhibition ____________ (open) on 10 May and ____________ (finish) on 15 June.
5. I ____________ (not go) out this evening. I ____________ (stay) at home.
6. We ____________ (go) to a concert tonight. It ____________ (begin) at 7.30 pm.
7. You are on the train to London and you ask another passenger:
“Excuse me. What time ____________ (this train / get) to London?”
8. You and a friend are watching television.
You say: “I’m bored with this programme. When ____________ (it / finish?)”
9. My brother ____________ (not use) his bicycle this afternoon, so I can have it.
10. Mai ____________ (come) to see us tomorrow. She ____________ (travel) by train and her train
____________ (arrive) at 10.15 am. I ____________ (meet) her at the station.
VI. Rewrite the sentences about the future event happening according to the timetable, using the
present simple tense of the verbs in italics and omitting the unnecessary words.
1. The art gallery is due to close next Friday.
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. The new concert hall is scheduled to begin next month.
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. I don’t have time to talk more about it. My bus is due to leave in twenty minutes.
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. It has been fixed that the new regulations should come into force from next year.
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. What time is the concert due to end this evening?
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. The arrangements are that the exhibition should open at the museum next Sunday.
__________________________________________________________________________________
7. The ship is scheduled to make her maiden voyage next month.
__________________________________________________________________________________
8. Next year, the first term is due to finish on 10th January, and the second term to start on 12lh
January.
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
9. When has it been arranged for him to take up his new duties?
__________________________________________________________________________________
10. The new highway is due to open to traffic tomorrow.
__________________________________________________________________________________

D. Reading
I. Read the text and write the word which best fits each gap.
Central Mall
There 1 ____________ more than 100 shops in Central Mall and it’s 2 ____________ great place to go
shopping. You 3 ____________ find all the famous brands 4
____________ and also stop to have a
coffee or a meal in the cafes or fast food restaurants. There’s a multiplex cinema 5 ____________ the
top floor. It opened ten years 6 ____________ and I think it’s still 7 ____________ best in the city. I
usually meet 8 ____________ friends there on Saturday evenings.
II. Read the text and do the tasks that follow.
MALL OF AMERICA
The USA is famous for its skyscrapers that appear in most big cities and its huge shopping malls.
Americans love shopping there.
The Mall of America, or MOA, in Minnesota with over 520 stores is the biggest mall in the USA. About
40 million people from many countries visit it every year. You can find everything there from
accessories and books to electronics, toys, and travel. When you get tired of shopping, you can eat in
two big food courts. 20 fast food restaurants serve a variety of dishes and snacks. After that you can
watch a movie in a 14-screen movie theatre, visit a dinosaur museum, have fun at the indoor
amusement park with roller coasters, or play golf. There is even an aquarium with over 4,500 sea
creatures including sharks. MOA has something for everyone.
Task 1. Mark the sentences true (T), false (F), or not given (NG).
1. Americans love shopping in skyscrapers in cities. ____________
2. The Mall of America is the biggest mall in the world. ____________
3. MOA offers shoppers a wide range of goods and services. ____________
4. There are 20 fast food restaurants in two big food courts. ____________
5. There aren’t any types of entertainment for children in MOA. ____________
6. People can see marine creatures there. ____________
Task 2. Read the text again and complete the chart below.
Name: _____________________________________________________________________
Location: _____________________________________________________________________
Stores: _____________________________________________________________________
Things to do: _____________________________________________________________________
III. Read the text about the two markets. Write the name of the market, Chatuchak, Chichi or both.
The Chatuchak Weekend Market in Bangkok in Thailand has got 15,000 stalls. You must follow a map
when you walk around because it is easy to get lost. You can find everything here: clothes, books,
jewelry, shoes, flowers, pottery, pets, and many other things. There are a lot of delicacies to choose
from, even fried insects. You can enjoy fresh fruit juices or buy many souvenirs in Thailand.
The Chichi Market in Guatemala is in the mountains and it’s very colourful. Sunday is market day
there. A lot of people are walking past the stalls and buy things. Most of them are local people in their
traditional costumes. You can find all sorts of things like clothes, tools, animals, and pottery as well as
fruits and vegetables.
1. People don’t wear their everyday clothes there. ____________
2. This market is open one day a week. ____________
3. Most people from the neighbourhood do their shopping there. ____________
4. You can lose your way easily there. ____________
5. This market has got so many stalls. ____________
6. You can buy many things there. ____________
7. This market is high above the sea level. ____________
8. You can buy pottery there. ____________
IV. Read the text and do the tasks that follow.
One of the most popular markets in England is in Walthamstow, East London. The market is about a
1
mile long, making it the longest market in Europe. You can find many ____________ here in
hundreds of stalls, including 2 ____________ fruits and vegetables, cheap clothes, and furniture. For
3
those who are interested in something a little more ____________, Walthamstow Market offers
Asian food and Caribbean music. If you get 4____________, enjoy a cup of coffee at one of the 5

____________. Walthamstow Market is 6 ____________ Tuesday through Saturday, from 8:00 am to

5:00 pm.
Task 1. Complete the text with the words given below.
exotic tired products cafés open fresh
Task 2. Read the text again and answer the questions.
1. Where is Walthamstow Market located?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. How long is it?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. What can you find there?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. When is Walthamstow Market open?
___________________________________________________________________________________
V. Complete the text with the phrases below. There is one extra that you do not need.
A. I’ll meet you in town
B. Watch out for Internet crime!
C. It's all there on the web
D. Saving time and money
E. Is this what I ordered?
F. More and more customers
One-click Shopping
1. _____________
What can you buy online? These days you can buy food, cars, holidays and even a house with a few
clicks and a credit card. In fact, it might be quicker to list the things that you can’t buy on the Internet.
2. _____________
According to the statistics, 85% of Internet users have bought something online. In 2006, only 10% of
the world’s population shopped on the Internet. Two years later the figure was 40% - that’s nearly
900 million shoppers.
3. _____________
It’s easy to see why people are choosing their computer instead of the high street. With city centres
getting more and more crowded, and things like petrol and parking getting so expensive, it makes
sense to avoid the crowds and shop from home. There are often great deals on the internet, too.
4. _____________
Of course, there are disadvantages to shopping for things online. You can’t try clothes on before you
buy, so they can sometimes be the wrong size, or disappointing when they arrive. And of course,
Internet shoppers have to be patient and wait for the goods to arrive.
5. _____________
So will Internet shopping replace shopping in town completely? It’s hard to say, but most people think
it won’t, even with more and more Internet offers and possibilities. In the UK shopping with friends or
family has become one of the most popular leisure activities. Many people simply enjoy going
shopping.
VI. Read the text about a shopping centre called the Dubai Mall and do the tasks that follow.
The Biggest Shopping Centre in the World

Dubai is an amazing place to go shopping and if you love fashion, this is the place to come. My
favourite place is the Dubai Mall. It’s the largest shopping centre in the world by total area and there
are about 1,200 shops. There are different ‘districts’ in the mall. For example, there’s one whole
section which sells shoes, and another which sells jewelry. I often spend time walking up and down
Fashion Avenue with my friends - that’s where the designer shops are, like Dolce & Gabbana and Dior.
1
_____________ It’s great to look in the windows at the luxury items, though.
Some people think shopping malls are boring, but the Dubai Mall isn’t. Of course, there are a lot of
shops, but there are plenty of other things to see and do there. There’s an aquarium and underwater
zoo, and we go to the cinema or ice-skating there, as well. 2 _____________ You need them because
it’s pretty easy to get lost.
There are a lot of places to eat in the mall. 3 _____________ There’s fast food, many different kinds of
international food, and healthy stuff, too. I love going to the Rainforest Cafes. We usually get fruit
smoothies and burgers. There’s one called the ‘Jungle Chicken Burger’, which is delicious. The
desserts are great. I love seeing little kids’ faces when the ‘Sparkling Volcano’ dessert arrives at their
table. It’s a huge chocolate thing! 4 _____________
Next to the mall is the Burj Khalifa - the tallest building in the world. You can travel up to the
observation deck at the top of the building from the mall. From there you can look down on Dubai. I
don’t go up there very often because everything looks so small from above that you can’t see it very
well. I go to the Dubai Fountain several times a year, though. 5 _____________ It’s the world’s largest
musical fountain and it’s free to watch. It’s fun.
Task 1. Five sentences have been removed from the text. Choose the correct answer for each gap.
There are three extra sentences which you do not need to use.
A. You can get everything you like.
B. They charge a lot of money to do this.
C. We can’t afford to buy much there, even when there are discounts or promotions.
D. That’s just outside the mall, too.
E. Sometimes my friends and I share one.
F. My favourite one is a new skirt I bought.
G. I don’t but my friends sometimes do.
H. There are customer service desks, too, where you can ask for directions.
Task 2. Match the words in bold in the text to the meanings.
1. _____________ expensive, comfortable or beautiful
2. _____________ one of the parts that something is divided into
3. _____________ an area that has a special character which makes it different from others
4. _____________ the size of a surface
5. _____________ another word for a shopping centre
6. _____________ how big something is

E. Speaking
• Everyday English
I. Choose the correct response. Then practise the short exchanges in pairs.
1. A: Why do people often go shopping at street B: a/ Because they have to park their cars.
markets? b/ Because it’s convenient.
2. A: Is it right that people not only go to a B: a/ Yes, it’s a place to meet and exchange
traditional market to get food? information.
b/ Yes, we can get a wide range of food.
3. A: I think retailers in Viet Nam are good at B: a/ Oh, yes. They have much experience.
calculation. b/ Oh, yes. They have no math skills.
4. A: Where can I get shopping experience? B: a/ From online shopping.
b/ From a traditional market.
5. A: Why is he a shopaholic? B: a/ Because he often bargains.
b/ Because he buys a lot of junk.
6. A: Can we bargain in a supermarket? B: a/ Certainly not. They offer fixed prices.
b/ Certainly. You can see the price tags.
7. A: Why do visitors go to convenience shops? B: a/ Because they are open all the time.
b/ Because they offer fresher goods.
8. A: Why do the whole family go shopping at a B: a/ Because they don’t want to leave anyone
supermarket? at home alone.
b/ Because there are goods and
entertainment for all ages.
9. A: Why don’t you bring your credit card? B: a/ Credit cards are not convenient now.
b/I can’t use it at an open-air market.
10. A: Is it necessary to make a shopping list? B: a/ Yes, it helps us to save time.
b/ No, we buy many unnecessary things.
• Talking about a shopping place
II. Answer the following questions, using the cues below.
Macy’s Incorporation - one of the major retailers in the USA
Headquarters: in New York City.
History: 162 years in business
Size: 722 stores - 43 states in the USA
Qualities: customers / shop / the way they live / also use e-commerce business
Employees: 90,000
Management team: a group of experts in technology and retail
1. What is Macy’s Incorporation?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. Where is its headquarters?
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. How long has it been in business?
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. How many Macy’s stores are there in the USA?
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. What are the benefits of going shopping at Macy’s?
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. How many employees are there at Macy’s?
__________________________________________________________________________________
7. How good is the management team?
__________________________________________________________________________________
III. Answer the following questions, using the cues below.
Vincom Centre Landmark 81 Shopping Mall - Restaurants
- more than 30 restaurants covering an area of 7,000 square metres
- offer menus of Vietnamese, Asian and American styles
- Ganh, Di Mai, Hue Delights restaurants: Vietnamese dishes in the warm atmosphere
- Peach Garden restaurant: Chinese cuisine, Hong Kong dessert
- Marukame: Japanese noodles
- Capricciosa: Italian cuisine; MK: Thai hot pot
1. How many restaurants are there in Vincom Centre Landmark 81 Shopping Mall?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. What do the restaurants offer?
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. What do Ganh, Di Mai, Hue Delights restaurants serve?
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. What does Peach Garden restaurant serve?
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. What does Marukame serve?
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. What do Capricciosa and MK serve?
__________________________________________________________________________________
• Making a complaint
IV. Complete the dialogue with the words below, and then practise it with your partner.
device instructions replace receipt middle
possible soon connect repair properly
Assistant: Good morning. Can I help you?
Nick: Yes. I bought this Sony MP4 player from here last week, but it doesn’t work 1 ____________.
Assistant: What’s the problem?
Nick: Well, it sometimes stops in the 2 ____________ of a song.
Assistant: Are the songs just from your computer?
Nick: Yes. And when I 3 ____________it to my PC I always follow 4 ____________.
Assistant: I see. Have you got the 5 ____________?
Nick: Yes, here you are. Can you 6 ____________it?
Assistant: I’ll send the 7 ____________ to the company today.
Nick: And if they can’t repair it?
Assistant: If it’s not 8 ____________ to repair it, we’ll 9 ____________ it. Now, can I have your name
and telephone number, please?
Nick: Yes. It’s Nick Walton and the telephone number is 0901 638 145.
Assistant: Thank you, Nick. We’ll phone you as 10 ____________ as they return it.
V. Complete the dialogues with the words given below.
give you Do you have the receipt anything wrong It doesn't
bought cakes Could I you are can I help You see
 Waiter: How 1 __________________?
Mai: 2 __________________ return this coffee?
Waiter: Is there anything wrong with it?
Mai: 3 __________________ look right.
 Jane: Excuse me. I’d like to return this shirt.4__________________, there’s a mark on it.
Assistant: OK, I can 5 __________________a discount.
Jane: No, thank you. I’d like a refund.
Assistant: That’s fine. Do you have 6 __________________?
Jane: Here you are.
 Laura: I’m afraid I’d like to return these cakes.
Assistant: Is there 7 __________________ with them?
Laura: Well, they all have holes in them.
Assistant: Um, I think they’re supposed to have holes. They’re a kind of doughnut.
Laura: Well, I’ve 8 __________________. I’d like a refund, please.
Assistant: OK. 9 __________________ your receipt?
Laura: Yes, here 10 __________________.
VI. Complete the dialogue with the shop assistant’s responses.
A. OK. Have you got the receipt?
B. Oh - what’s the problem?
C. OK. There you go.
D. Good morning. How can I help you?
E. That’s fine. Would you like to exchange it?
Assistant: 1 _____________________________________________________
Ms. Brown: I bought this camera here last week, and I’m afraid there’s something wrong with it.
Assistant: 2 _____________________________________________________
Ms. Brown: This switch doesn’t work. I think it’s broken.
Assistant: 3 _____________________________________________________
Ms. Brown: Here you are.
Assistant: 4 _____________________________________________________
Ms. Brown: No, thank you. I’d like a refund, please.
Assistant: 5 _____________________________________________________
Ms. Brown: Thank you very much.

F. Writing
• Writing a paragraph about the advantages and disadvantages of a
shopping place
I. Write a paragraph about the advantages and disadvantages of online shopping, using the cues
given below. Use the words showing the sequence: firstly, secondly, next, finally, to begin with, in
addition, furthermore.
Nowadays most prefer online shopping. Online shopping offers a lot of benefits.
1. buy items / their homes and workplace in comfort
2. in online shopping /customers / not have to stand in lines / pay / the goods /save time
3. big discounts / website sellers to attract more customers / save money
4. the buyer / many options and many brands / choose / a place / because / a large volume of stock
available
However, there are also some disadvantages of online shopping.
5. in online shopping / a product / go / through different places / meet the product / the wrong
colour, the wrong size, or damage
6. not easy / the customer / exchange the product / the customer / complete several forms
7. a risk of hacking/ identity theft or credit card fraud
Nowadays we have to use online shopping in a good way, but we can also go to a supermarket or an
open-air market.
Online Shopping
Nowadays most prefer online shopping. Online shopping offers a lot of benefits.
1. Firstly, __________________________________________________________________________.
2. Secondly, in online shopping, customers _______________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
3. Next, there _______________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
4. Finally, the buyer __________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
However, there are also some disadvantages of online shopping.
5. To begin with, in online shopping _____________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
6. In addition, it _____________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
7. Furthermore, there ________________________________________________________________.
Nowadays we have to use online shopping in a good way, but we can also go to a supermarket or an
open-air market.
II. Write a paragraph about the advantages and disadvantages of open-air markets, using the cues
given below. Use the words showing the sequence: firstly, secondly, next, to begin with, in addition.
Open-air markets are still popular nowadays. There are some advantages of an open-air market.
1. bargain and buy goods / reasonable prices
2. fruits and vegetables / that market / often fresher / a better taste / those in supermarkets
3. get shopping experience there / sellers / often share advice / buying things However, there are
some disadvantages of open-air markets.
4. shorter opening hours / daily shopping in an open-air market
5. not use their credit cards / depend on weather
Open-air Markets
Open-air markets are still popular nowadays. There are some advantages of an open-air market.
1. Firstly, you _______________________________________________________________________.
2. Secondly, ________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
3. Next, you ________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
However, there are some disadvantages of open-air markets.
4. To begin with, we _________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
5. In addition, customers _____________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________.
III. Read the sample essay and answer the questions.
 These days, online shopping is an everyday activity for many people, ft is a quick and convenient
way to purchase things and it is becoming more and more popular, but can it replace the real thing?
 Without a doubt, there are a number of advantages to shopping online. Firstly, you can buy
everything you want, anytime, without leaving the comfort of your house. This is especially
convenient if you are in a hurry or if you live in an isolated area. Secondly, the choice of goods
available is extensive, as almost all the high street shops have online stores. Also, many online
retailers offer free delivery, saving you any extra costs. Finally, you don’t have to carry any heavy bags
or boxes home. Everything is delivered to your doorstep.
 On the other hand, there are a number of disadvantages to shopping online. To start with, people
worry about being exposed to hackers and become victims of identity theft fraud, ft is very easy for
someone to steal personal information. Secondly, you can’t examine, feel or try on items until they
arrive at your house, and sometimes they may be different from what you were expecting. Online
shopping takes away a lot of the pleasure people get from shopping.
 To sum up, there are both positive and negative aspects to online shopping. Although some people
may not feel safe giving out personal information over the Internet, online shopping is very easy and
convenient, as it offers a variety of choice any time of the day.
1. What are the advantages of online shopping and their supporting idea?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. What are the disadvantages of online shopping and their supporting idea?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Is the writer for or against online shopping? Why?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________

TEST (UNIT 8)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. access B. centre C. market D. well-lit
2. A. sale B. tag C. speciality D. attract
3. A. produce B. product C. lucky D. much
4. A. fixed B. fix C. example D. excellent
5. A. store B. costume C. florist D. speciality
II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. We sell cups of coffee from our stall at the farmers’ _____________.
A. market B. town C. trader D. economy
7. They aim to respond to all customer _____________ within 24 hours.
A. illness B. dissatisfaction C. complains D. complaints
8. We bought some snacks at the _____________ store at midnight. It serves us all the time.
A. retail B. department C. convenience D. online
9. As a _____________, Jane loved looking for new clothes with her two daughters.
A. shopaholic B. shopkeeper C. shop assistant D. retailer
10. It has a _____________ of more than $2,000.
A. price control B. price tag C. price war D. priceless
11. We often go to an _____________ swimming pool to enjoy sunlight.
A. open day B. open-ended C. open air D. open-air
12. She picked up some real bargains _____________.
A. for sale B. on sale C. in sale D. on a sale or return
13. The market is full of farm _____________.
A. produce B. product C. production D. productivity
14. Students are from a wide _____________ of backgrounds.
A. limit B. distance C. range D. group
15. They offer a ten percent _____________ on travel for students.
A. discount B. cut C. decrease D. drop
III. Choose the correct answers.
16. Mum never costs / spends / rents any money on herself.
17. He managed to spend / cost / save enough to buy a small house.
18. We can’t promote / afford / spend to go on holiday this year.
19. Do you know how much the ring is worth / afforded / cost?
20. There will be a meeting to promote / advertise I save trade between Viet Nam and the UK.
21. Some farmers cost / rent / afford their land from the council.
22. Second-hand clothes don’t save / rent / cost much.
23. They no longer advertise / spend / afford alcohol or cigarettes at sporting events.
24. He didn’t spend / afford / offer to pay me for the ticket.
25. Exchange / Deliver / Try on the shoes to see if they return / fit / keep.
IV. Complete the gaps in the text with the words given. There are three extra words that you do not
need to use.
supermarkets custom products produce
vendors habit range businessmen
Despite the changes in society, most of Vietnamese mothers and grandmothers still go to the
traditional markets for daily fresh 26 _____________. They are always fond of freshness, and have the
27
_____________of going shopping every day to prepare meals for the whole family. Some young
28
ladies love shopping at _____________, but they often complain about the freshness of seafood
there.
People often stop their motorbikes at a street-side market as it is much quicker than parking their
motorbike in the supermarket basement. They can sit on their motorbike and get food from the street
29
_____________. Sellers in these markets often have really quick calculation without using any
calculator in hand.
Big markets are like the trading hub of the region or wholesale markets, so everything can be found
30
there with a wide _____________ of goods. Wandering around a market, a tourist can experience
the lives of local people.
V. Read Phong’s daily routine. Make questions with “How often” about Phong, and write the
questions with the correct adverbs of frequency: always, often, sometimes, or never. Practise the
exchanges in pairs.
Phong gets up early every morning, and he isn’t late for class. He eats breakfast before going to
school, and he also eats breakfast on Saturday and Sunday. He tidies his room on Tuesday, Thursday,
Saturday, and Sunday. In the evening he does his homework every weekday, so he doesn’t miss his
homework during the week. At the weekend he plays football with his classmates or plays badminton
with his younger sister. On Sunday morning he watches TV or he plays computer games. He reads his
lessons every Sunday afternoon. He doesn’t go to bed late every day.
31. (get up early)
A: How often ______________________________________________________________________?
B: ________________________________________________________________________________
32. (be late for class)
A: How often ______________________________________________________________________?
B: ________________________________________________________________________________
33. (eat breakfast in the morning)
A: How often ______________________________________________________________________?
B: ________________________________________________________________________________
34. (tidy his room)
A: How often ______________________________________________________________________?
B: ________________________________________________________________________________
35. (do homework on weekday)
A: How often ______________________________________________________________________?
B: ________________________________________________________________________________
36. (miss homework during the week)
A: How often ______________________________________________________________________?
B: ________________________________________________________________________________
37. (play football/ play badminton/ at the weekend)
A: How often ______________________________________________________________________?
B: ________________________________________________________________________________
38. (watch TV/ play computer games/ Sunday morning)
A: How often ______________________________________________________________________?
B: ________________________________________________________________________________
39. (read lessons/ Sunday afternoon)
A: How often ______________________________________________________________________?
B: ________________________________________________________________________________
40. (go to bed late)
A: How often ______________________________________________________________________?
B: ________________________________________________________________________________
VI. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets: present simple or
present continuous for future events.
41. I’ve seen the notice. The game ______________ (start) at one o’clock tomorrow afternoon.
42. We ______________ (have) boiled chicken and rice for dinner tonight.
43. I ______________ (walk) to school tomorrow morning. I need the exercise.
44. The bus ______________ (leave) at 8.15 tomorrow morning.
45. The exam ______________ (begin) at 9.00 tomorrow morning and ______________ (end) at
11.00.
46. Tomorrow the museum ______________ (open) at 10.00 am and ______________ (close) at 5.00
pm. Let’s go around 2.30 pm, okay?
47. Have you heard the news? Laura and David ______________ (get) married in August.
48. I ______________ (watch) the new Marvel film at Nam’s house tomorrow.
49. My uncle’s plane ______________ (arrive) at 10.10 tomorrow morning. My father can’t pick him
up, so he ______________ (take) the airport bus into the city center.
50. “There ______________ (be) a flight to Ha Noi at 5.30 am, sir,” the receptionist said.
VII. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true), F (false), or NM (not mentioned).
Cai Rang Floating Market in the Mekong Delta
51. Cai Rang floating market is not very far from the centre of Can Tho. _____
52. The floating market was established to supply a convenient way of selling and buying. _____
53. Visitors can buy fruits and specialities of the Mekong Delta there. _____
54. Each boat sells a type of fruit or vegetables. _____
55. You can find only small or medium boats there because there are so many boats at the floating
market. _____
56. From there, farm produce from the Mekong Delta can be carried to many places, even to
Cambodia.
_____

57. Sellers can spend their lives on their boats. _____

58. Besides fruits and farm produce, visitors can get several services at the floating market. _____
59. It is one of the tourist attractions in Can Tho in particular, and in the Mekong Delta in general.
_____
60. Foreign visitors rarely go to this floating market. _____
VIII. Read the article and do the tasks that follow.
Shopping Online
Lots of people enjoy the benefits of online shopping. You don’t have to sit in traffic jams or wait at bus
stops or at train stations. Because online stores are open 24 hours, seven days a week, you can sit at
your computer and shop at your leisure. And you don’t have to collect your product because they
deliver it right to your door.
But shopping online isn’t all great - you need to be very careful when deciding what to buy and where
to buy it. Here are some tips for shopping safely online.
Use a secure connection
The easiest way of making sure the connection is secure is to look for the lock sign in the address bar.
Another is to look at the start of the website address. If this starts with “https”, there is a secure
connection because the letter “s” means “secure”. If you see ‘http’ with no “s”, don’t enter the
website or give your personal or bank details. It could be a false website that is trying to steal your
money or personal information.
Use a secure payment method
Only shop on sites that offer secure payment methods, like credit cards and other payment systems.
This gives you protection in a situation where you and the shop disagree - the shop can’t say you did
anything illegal, like using another person’s credit card to pay. Banks usually contact you if they think
something is wrong.
Create a strong password
A strong password is very important. It’s usually a good idea to change your passwords every few
months, just in case someone finds out what they are. Also, try to use a different password for
different online shopping sites: once someone guesses one password, they can get access to
everything you do online.
Check other customers' comments
Always check the seller’s history when using online sites. You can get an idea by looking at other
buyers’ comments. If you are not sure about a product, you can always send the seller a question and
the good sellers will reply fairly quickly.
Task 1. Choose the correct answers.
61. What is the purpose of the article?
A. to stop people shopping online
B. to help people save money when shopping online
C. to make people think twice before shopping online
D. to help people stay safe when shopping online
62. According to the author, what are the benefits of shopping online?
A. It’s much cheaper. B. There is less travelling involved.
C. Payment time is much quicker. D. There are more choices.
63. What does the author say you can do to make sure the connection is safe?
A. go to a website where you can check the address.
B. contact the website by sending them a message.
C. look for a special icon on the screen.
D. look for the word ‘secure’ in the website address.
64. According to the author, why is it important to create a strong password?
A. so only you and the shop know your password.
B. so no one can guess your password and see everything you do.
C. so you can shop happily online with no worries.
D. so only you and the bank know your password.
65. Why does the author suggest you check other customers’ comments?
A. so we can see if the seller is honest.
B. because they explain everything about the product.
C. because the seller might not tell the truth about the product.
D. so we can talk to them about the product or seller.
Task 2. Match the words in bold in the text to their meanings.
66. ____________ when you want to and when you have time to
67. ____________ someone who sells something
68. ____________ the thing that you see when you close a door, window, etc. that needs a key to
open it
69. ____________ not true, incorrect
70. ____________ more than ‘quite’, but less than ‘very’
IX. Answer the following questions, using the cues below.
Vincom Centre Landmark 81 Shopping Mall
Vincom Centre Landmark 81 Shopping Mall is one of the biggest and most luxurious places to go
shopping, entertain, eat and drink in Ho Chi Minh City.
Location: Vincom Centre Landmark 81 Skyscraper, in Ward 22, Binh Thanh District,
Ho Chi Minh City
Opening hours: 9.30 - 22.00
Grand opening: 26th July, 2018
Total area: 59,000 m2
Number of floors: 5 floors overground and 1 basement
71. What is the location of Vincom Centre Landmark 81 Shopping Mall?
__________________________________________________________________________________
72. What are its opening hours?
__________________________________________________________________________________
73. When was it opened?
__________________________________________________________________________________
74. What is its total area?
__________________________________________________________________________________
75. How many floors are there in Vincom Centre Landmark 81 Shopping Mall?
__________________________________________________________________________________
X. Write a paragraph about the advantages and disadvantages of supermarkets, using the cues
given below. Use the words showing the sequence: firstly, secondly, moreover, to begin with, in
addition.
76. get all goods / one roof / save a lot of time
77. get different options / the same product / choose the best product
78. offer discounts, cash backs or contests / give us a rewarding experience
79. when / we / in a hurry / not convenient / do shopping / a supermarket
80. often buy unnecessary goods / overspend / see so many items / display / supermarkets
Supermarkets
76. Firstly, _________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
77. Secondly, _______________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
78. Morever, _______________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
However, they also have some disadvantages.
79. To begin with, when ______________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
80. In addition, _____________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
 UNIT 9.
NATURAL DISASTERS
A. Pronunciation
• Stress in words ending in -al and -ous
I. Write the words ending in -al below in the correct group of stress.
medical approval special economical survival
magical electrical historical social classical
agricultural official local central political
international comical industrial general natural
Oo _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Ooo _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
oOo _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
oOoo _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
ooOoo _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
II. Write the words ending in -ous below in the correct group of stress.
dangerous infectious adventurous continuous famous
poisonous suspicious ridiculous mountainous various
joyous numerous cautious mysterious furious
Oo _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Ooo _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
oOo _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
oOoo _______________________________________________________________________
 _______________________________________________________________________
III. Mark (') in front of the stressed syllable in the words ending in -al or -ous. Then practise saying
the sentences.
1. She wants to learn classical music.
2. An economical car consumes a small amount of gas.
3. I’m looking for a shop selling electrical appliances.
4. I enjoy reading historical novels.
5. The scandal damaged his political career.
6. There are some dangerous ants, and they are poisonous.
7. This barrel is hazardous because it contains poisonous snakes.
8. The flu is very infectious, so we should have shots of vaccine.
9. His story is ridiculous, and I can’t believe it.
10. He became furious when he heard the news.

B. Vocabulary
• Types of natural disasters
I. Match a type of natural disasters with the description.
1. thunderstorm _____ A. the sudden fall of earth, rocks down the side of a mountain
2. tornado _____ B. a sudden violent movement of the earth’s surface
3. hurricane _____ C. a large amount of water that covers an area
4. earthquake _____ D. an extremely large wave caused by a violent movement of the
earth under the sea
5. volcano _____ E. a violent storm with a very strong wind that blows in a circle
6. tsunami _____ F. a mountain with a hole at the top through which hot rocks (lava),
fire, etc. sometimes come out
7. landslide _____ G. a storm with the loud noise and lightning
8. flood _____ H. a storm with very strong winds
 Words describing natural disasters
II. Complete each sentence with the correct word below.
drought flood hurricane landslide tornado
1. When there is a _____________, a lot of water covers an area where there usually isn’t water.
2. A _____________ refers to a long time without rain.
3. When there is a _____________, a lot of rocks and earth fall down a hill.
4. A _____________ is a storm with a lot of wind that moves over water.
5. A _____________ is a storm in which the air moves very quickly in a circle.
III. Match the verbs with the nouns given.
the building cigarettes goods ash
debris supplement a fire protection
electricity pieces a flame passengers
scatter _______________________________________________________________________
evacuate _______________________________________________________________________
provide _______________________________________________________________________
put out
_______________________________________________________________________
IV. Complete the sentences with the words given.
property landslide residents emergency tornado
funnels warning rescue damage ashes
1. The social workers need to know what to do in a(n) ________________.
2. He had ignored their ________________ to stay in the house during the earthquake.
3. Investigators examined the ________________ to find the cause of the fire.
4. Storms delayed the ________________ of the crash victims.
5. The local ________________ were angry at the lack of water supply for a few days.
6. The earthquake caused severe ________________ to a number of buildings.
7. The fire resulted in damage to their ________________.
8. The building was badly damaged in a(n) ________________.
9. We saw big ________________ of wind moving down these narrow streets.
10. The house was buried under a(n) ________________.
V. Complete the sentences with the adjectives given.
personal natural dangerous safe practical
serious destructive missing violent volcanic
1. Residents were worried by the earthquake’s ________________ force.
2. The fire resulted in damage to their ________________ property.
3. Scientists understand many of the factors that cause ________________ eruptions.
4. The storm caused ________________ damage to farm buildings.
5. Floods and earthquakes are ________________ disasters.
6. The winds in the ________________ storm reach the speed of over 400 km per hour.
7. After three days lost in the mountains, all the climbers arrived home ________________ and
sound.
8. He disappeared on his way to school and has been ________________ for over a month.
9. Thick fog has made driving conditions ________________.
10. They offer ________________ help for people in the flooded areas.
VI. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs given.
cause damage erupt shake destroy
move warn strike affect predict
1. Many important historical documents were ________________ in the fire.
2. My mother always ________________ me not to talk to strangers.
3. The flood really ________________ the lives of thousands of people in Central Viet Nam last week.
4. Smoking is likely to ________________ your health permanently.
5. Strong winds had ________________ serious damage to the roof of the house.
6. We can ________________ changes in climate with a surprising degree of accuracy.
7. Temperatures will drop as the cold front ________________ down across Northern Viet Nam next
week.
8. Since the volcano last ________________, many houses have been built in a dangerous position on
its slopes.
9. The floor began to ________________ from a distant explosion.
10. They predict that a large earthquake will ________________ the east coast before the end of the
decade.
VII. Fill each of the numbered blanks in the following passage, using the appropriate words or
phrases given below.
a because of blown causes normal
dry suffer irrigated wells drops
Drought is a condition that results when the average rainfall for a fertile area 1 ________________ far
2
below the normal amount for ________________ long period of time. In areas that are not
3
________________, the lack of rain 4 ________________ farm crops to wither and die. Higher than
5
________________ temperatures usually accompany periods of droughts. The soil of a drought area
becomes 6 ________________ and crumbles. Often the rich topsoil is 7 ________________ away by
8
the hot, dry winds. Streams, ponds, and ________________ often dry up during a drought, and
9
animals ________________ and may even die 10 ________________ the lack of water.
VIII. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs below.
blow fall pour rise shake
1. I think there was an earthquake yesterday because the ground ________________ for a few
seconds.
2. The rain ________________ for hours yesterday. I thought there might be a flood.
3. The big tree in our garden ________________ down in the storms.
4. The level of the water in the river always ________________ when it rains a lot.
5. The wind ________________ so hard. I think the roof might come off our house!
IX. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words below.
blow rise lightning pour tornado flood
1. Have you got an umbrella? It’s going to ________________ with rain later today.
2. I hate it when there’s a ________________ — there’s water everywhere.
3. The ________________ was like something out of a film - the wind was lifting everything up.
4. Oh, look! That girl’s hat is going to ________________ away.
5. My grandfather loves watching the ________________ in the sky during a storm.
6. Look at this line. It shows how high the river can ________________ when it rains a lot.
X. Choose the correct word to complete the sentences.
1. It’s blowing / pouring with rain. Let’s stay in and watch a film.
2. That lightning / tornado during the storm last night was amazing. I could see the whole street even
though it was dark.
3. There was a terrible flood / lightening last year. The whole village was under water.
4. Have you ever seen a tornado / flood moving across the desert? It’s amazing how fast they can go.
5. The wind’s pouring / blowing quite strongly. I don’t think we should go climbing today.
6. The level of the river rose / poured quickly because it was raining so hard.
XI. Fill in each blank with ONE suitable word.
El Nino and La Nina
The tropical Pacific Ocean 1 ________________ a warming and cooling cycle. This cycle is a completely
natural event and usually 2 ________________ between three to seven years.
When the waters become 3 ________________, it is called El Nino, and when they become cooler it is
4
called La Nina. During the cycle, the ________________ of the ocean can change by around 3°C
between the warmest and coolest times.
5
________________ off the South American coast have known about this 6 ________________ event
7
for hundreds of years. When it ________________, they see a huge fall in the numbers of fish
8
caught. But scientists are only just beginning to ________________ how the event affects Earth’s
weather and climate.
 Prepositions
XII. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. We provide information ________________ parents.
2. A fire had broken out and caused severe damage ________________ the roof.
3. After the storm we were ________________ electricity for five days.
4. The areas were affected ________________ the hurricane.
5. The fire at the house was the result ________________ a dropped cigarette.
6. We need to deal ________________ problems like pollution and climate change.
7. Surely, they must be familiar ________________ his writing.
8. There will be a new set of guidelines ________________ teachers.
9. They lived ________________ constant fear of losing their jobs.
10. The police searched the woods ________________ the missing boy.

C. Grammar
• Past continuous
I. Complete the sentences using the past continuous form of the verbs in brackets.
1. How long ________________ (they / wait) for the bus after school yesterday?
2. My mum ________________ (not drive) home at six o’clock yesterday.
3. Where ________________ (they / go) at 1 p.m. yesterday afternoon?
4. ________________ (she / talk) to us when she arrived at work?
5. We ________________ (not watch) TV at five-thirty.
6. I saw you at four o’clock. Where ________________ (you / go)?
7. I ________________ (not read) my book at ten o’clock last night.
8. He ________________ (read) a book when I came in.
II. Complete the sentences using the past continuous. Use the information below.
Yesterday afternoon at 5 o’clock ...
 Phong and Quan: watch a game show
 Nick: buy a new camera
 Hoa and Lan: run in the park
 My dad: listen to the news
 My brother: do his homework
 I: not do anything
 My mum: cook dinner and watch the weather forecast on TV
 My cousins: not watching the TV
At 5 o’clock ...
1. Phong and Quan
___________________________________________________________________.
2. Nick
_____________________________________________________________________________.
3. Hoa and Lan ______________________________________________________________________.
4. My dad __________________________________________________________________________.
5. My brother _______________________________________________________________________.
6. I
________________________________________________________________________________.
7. My mum _________________________________________________________________________.
8. My cousins _______________________________________________________________________.
III. Look at the picture. What were the people doing at 2 pm yesterday? Write sentences; then ask
and answer with a partner.

Example: Dad / chat I on the phone

Was Dad chatting on the phone?
— No, he wasn’t. He was reading the newspaper.
1. Grandma / listen to music
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. Mum / watch / a film on TV
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. The dog / eat / under the table
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. Tom and Jen / fight for the remote control
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. Granddad and the cat / sleep
__________________________________________________________________________________
• Past simple and past continuous
IV. Put the verbs into the correct form, the Past Continuous or Past Simple.
1. When I last (see) _____________ them, they (try) _____________ to find a new flat near the office.
2. I (walk) _____________ along the street when I suddenly (feel) _____________ something hit me
in the back.
3. When we (drive) _____________ down the hill, a strange object (appear) _____________ in the
sky.
4. How fast (she/drive) _____________ when the accident (happen) _____________?
5. My mother (wait) _____________ for me when I (come) _____________ home.
6. Mrs. Smith (invite) _____________ Mrs. Quyen to have dinner while Mrs. Quyen (visit)
_____________ the USA.
7. I (not want) _____________ to go with him because I (wait) _____________ for a phone call.
8. The doorbell (ring) _____________ while Tom (watch) _____________ TV.
9. It suddenly (begin) _____________ to rain while Linda (sit) _____________ in the garden.
10. The lights (go) _____________ out while we (have) _____________ dinner.
V. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Simple or Past Progressive tense.
1. When my uncle (come) _____________, we (water) _____________ the plants and flowers in the
garden.
2. Thu (talk) _____________ to her friend, Hoa, on the phone at 8 o’clock last night.
3. Lan (practise) _____________ the piano while her sister (read) _____________ comics at 7 o’clock
last night.
4. The monkeys (climb) _____________ up the trees when we (visit) _____________ the zoo
yesterday morning.
5. Ba (talk) _____________ with his classmate when the principal (enter) _____________ their
classroom.
6. Last night I (make) _____________ a cake when the lights (go) _____________ out.
7. While I (cross) _____________ the street, I (step) _____________ on a banana skin and (fall)
_____________ heavily.
8. It (begin) _____________ to rain when I (plant) _____________ some flowers in the garden.
9. When I (arrive) _____________, the teacher (write) _____________ on the blackboard.
10. When they (walk) _____________ down the stairs, they (hear) _____________ a strange noise.
VI. Write the words in the correct order to make correct sentences.
1. when / computer / was / games / rang / phone / Peter / the / playing
________________________________________________________________________________
2. you / visiting / texted / Were / I / grandparents / you? / your / when
________________________________________________________________________________
3. arms / cat / I / when / from / it / jumped / the / carrying / my / was
________________________________________________________________________________
4. bedroom / found / I / cleaning / diary / was / my / when / old / my / I
________________________________________________________________________________
5. football / We / rained / going / match / were / the / but / to / it / watch
________________________________________________________________________________
6. exams / music / while / listening / revising / to / for / They / their / were
________________________________________________________________________________
7. talking / Were / Phong / maths / the / you / about / to / test?
________________________________________________________________________________
8. was / you / thinking / called / you / when /I / about / just
________________________________________________________________________________
VII. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.
1. John _____________ in the sea when he saw a dolphin. (swim)
2. We _____________ to make you feel bad! (not try)
3. I _____________ a film when my sister arrived. (watch)
4. _______you ______ to the sports centre when I saw you yesterday? (go)
5. When I went into the classroom, the teacher _____________ for me. (wait)
6. The DJ _____________ some great music at the party. (play)
7. Everybody _____________ during the comedy show. (laugh)
8. Nam _____________ in Ha Noi when he passed his driving test. (live)
9. My brother _____________ his homework when Mum phoned. (do)
10. Helen _____________ for a big tennis competition yesterday. (prepare)
VIII. Complete the conversation, using the past continuous of the verbs in brackets. Practise the
conversation with your partner.
Nick: Hi, Hoa. What 1 _____________ (you I do) yesterday afternoon? I tried to chat, but you didn’t
reply.2 _____________ (you / play) badminton?
Hoa: Hello, Nick. No, I 3 _____________ (not play) badminton. It 4 _____________ (rain) all afternoon.
Nick: Really? The sun 5 _____________ (shine) here.
6
Hoa: Well, it _____________ (not shine) here. I didn’t turn on my computer because I
7
_____________ (watch) TV. There was a great film on. Did you see it?
Nick: No. I 8 _____________ (help) my parents. They 9 _____________ (clean) the house for a party.
Hoa: My dad 10 _____________ (clean) the house, too.
Nick: 11 _____________ (he / get) ready for a party?
Hoa: No, we’re going to sell the house. We’re going to the countryside.
Nick: What! When? You can’t...
Hoa: Nick...
Nick: Yes? Hoa: I 12 _____________ (wind) you up!
Note: to wind someone up = to annoy or upset someone (trêu chọc ai)

D. Reading
I. Read the following brochure, and then tick () the statements that the article recommends.
A Family Emergency Plan
The best way to deal with an emergency or a disaster is to prepare for it before it happens. You can
do this by making a family emergency plan. Here are some tips on how to prepare one.
 Put a list of emergency phone numbers, including the police, fire, and emergency medical
departments, near every phone.
 Make an emergency supplies kit. This should include canned food, bottled water, flashlights,
matches, batteries, blankets, a battery-operated radio, a first-aid kit, etc.
 Teach responsible family members how arid when to shut off water and electricity sources in the
house.
 Learn basic first aid.
 Decide what you will take and where you will go if you have to evacuate.
 Decide what to do if your family is separated. Choose a place to meet in case you can’t return to
your home.
 Regularly review and practise your plans.
1. Have a plan in case there is an emergency or disaster. ______
2. Write down emergency telephone numbers. ______
3. Gather together some things you might need in an emergency. ______
4. Show young children how to turn on and off the water and electricity. ______
5. Know how to use the items in a first-aid kit. ______
6. Decide when to evacuate. ______
7. Find a place for everyone in your family to go if you aren’t together. ______
8. Practise your plans one time. ______
II. Read the environmental facts and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).
Ocean Levels
 oceans are rising 1.7 milimeters each year
 the temperature of the oceans is getting hotter, which is bad for animals that live there
Water Use
 save water by taking quick showers
 save water by turning off the tap while brushing your teeth
Climate Change
 the average global temperature has gone up about 1 degree Celsius since 1880
 includes rising sea levels, melting ice caps, and other weather events such as floods and huge storms
1. You can save water by taking short baths. ______
2. The average global temperature began going up in 1980. ______
3. Ocean levels are rising 1.7 milimeters every year. ______
4. Climate change is causing floods and huge storms. ______
III. Read the text and do the tasks that follow.
KAPITI MINI TORNADO
At about 2 pm yesterday, high winds destroyed houses and trees as bad weather hit the Kapiti coast
in New Zealand.
The mini tornado was a frightening event that started with rain and wind. The wind blew
1
_____________, the sky went a strange colour and huge balls of ice 2 _____________ from the sky.
This 3 _____________ a lot of cars and buildings, and the wind began to 4 _____________ the roofs off
the houses. One girl, whose grandfather is the owner of a shop selling things for the garden, was
helping her grandmother to 5 _____________ plants back inside the main building when she was hit
by the tornado. Fortunately, she was not hurt, though she was very scared by what happened. The
whole area was 6 _____________ with no power for a long time, and many buildings needed repairs
afterwards.
Task 1. Choose the correct answer for each gap.
1. A. heavier B. thicker C. harder D. darker
2. A. pulled B. broke C. passed D. fell
3. A. damaged B. hurt C. injured D. lost
4. A. hold B. lift C. climb D. rise
5. A. turn B. stay C. move D. keep
6. A. left B. remained C. held D. Dropped
Task 2. Match the words and phrases in bold in the text to the meanings.
1. ___________________ damaged so much that it does not exist or cannot be used
2. ___________________ strong
3. ___________________ something you do to fix something that is broken or damaged
4. ___________________ making you feel nervous or afraid
IV. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
El Nino is a weather phenomenon of the Pacific Ocean which is 1 ________________ by an abnormal
2 3
________________ of water on the surface of the ocean. It has the ________________ to
4
influence global weather patterns as it brings drought to some continents and ________________
rain to others. It was first 5 ________________ by fishermen coming from Spanish ports in the Pacific
in the 17th century. It got its name (Spanish for ‘boy child’) because it usually takes 6

________________ near Christmas time. It can cause catastrophic 7 ________________. The 1982 El
8 9
Nino ________________ in 1,500 deaths, but it can be a lot worse than that. Sea animals,
10
________________ fish and birds, also die in large numbers. It is ________________ that sailors in
the Pacific can smell the dead sea-life during El Nino.
1. A. happened B. caused C. origin D. done
2. A. increase B. extra C. heater D. warming
3. A. proficiency B. power C. practice D. performance
4. A. wet B. shower C. plenty D. heavy
5. A. saw B. noticed C. caught D. time
6. A. away B. care C. part D. place
7. A. damage B. difficulty C. hurt D. problem
8. A. resulted B. led C. caused D. gave
9. A. containing B. holding C. including D. involving
10. A. said B. felt C. told D. mistaken
V. Read the text carefully, and then do the tasks that follow.
In April 2010, a group of 14- and 15-year-old students from Loughborough, in the UK, went to Iceland
on a school trip. They wanted to see things they studied in their Geography lessons at school so they
visited an area which has a lot of active volcanoes. However, in the middle of the night on Tuesday
13th April the Eyjafjallajokull volcano began to erupt.
Emergency services woke up the students and their teachers in their hotel at 4 am. They didn’t have
time to get dressed and left in their pyjamas. A bus took them to Reykjavik, the capital of Iceland,
where they were safe.
When Eyjafjallajokull erupted, it affected people all over the world. In the local area 800 people left
their homes immediately because of floods from local rivers and dangerous smoke and gases. The
volcano also sent a big cloud of ash 8 kilometres up into the air. This was dangerous for planes
because the pilots couldn’t see in the ash cloud.
Many countries in Europe, including the UK, France, Sweden and Norway, closed their airports for
many days in April. Thousands of travellers around the world couldn’t get home. They slept in airports
or tried to get to their destinations by car, train, bus or even taxi.
Icelandic volcanoes are very active. When the volcano Laki erupted for eight months in 1783, almost
two million people died around the world. It was the worst volcanic eruptions in history. The students
from Loughborough were lucky!
Task 1. Choose the best title for the text.
1. Geography Lessons in Iceland
2. Thousands of People Can’t Fly to Iceland
3. Students Escape when the Volcano Erupts
Task 2. Read the text again, and identify whether the statements are true (T), false (F), or not
mentioned (NM).
1. The students learned about volcanoes before they went to Iceland. _______
2. They stayed near the Eyjafjallajokull volcano. _______
3. The volcano woke up the students. _______
4. The students enjoyed their trip to Iceland. _______
5. The eruption of Eyjafjallajokull didn’t affect local people. _______
6. In April 2010 many airports closed in Europe. _______
7. Volcanoes in Iceland do not erupt very often. _______
8. The eruption of Laki in 1783 wasn’t very big. _______
VI. Read Mary Ann’s story, and answer the questions.
In 1969, Hurricane Camille hit my three-storey blocks of flats near the Gulf of Mexico. First, the sea hit
the building and all the windows broke. Then the rooms flooded. Five minutes later, my bed was
floating near the ceiling. Then it floated out of the window. It was dark and the wind was howling. I
was terrified. The building was falling down all around me. The wind was awful. It reached a speed of
234 miles per hour. I was cut and bleeding from head to toe. Finally, someone found me 8 km from
my house and they took me to hospital.
1. When did Hurricane Camille hit the Gulf of Mexico?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. What happened after the rooms flooded?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. What happened to the building?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. How fast was the wind?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. How far did the water carry Mary Ann?
___________________________________________________________________________________
VII. Read the following passage carefully, then write True (T) or False (F) for each statement.
The people of Kiribati are afraid that one day their country in the not-too-distant future will disappear
from the surface of the earth. Several times this year, the Pacific island nation has been flooded by a
sudden high tide. These tides, which swept across the island and destroyed houses, came when there
was neither wind nor rain. This never happened before.
What is causing these mysterious high tides? The answer may be global warming. When fuels like oil
and coal are being burned, pollutants are released; these pollutants hold heat in the earth’s
atmosphere. Warmer temperatures cause water to expand and also create more water by melting
glaciers and polar ice caps.
If the situation continues, scientists say that many countries will suffer, Bangladesh, for example,
might lose one-fifth of its land. The coral island nations of the Pacific like Kiribati and the Marshall
Islands, however, would face an even worse fate - they would be swallowed by the sea. The loss of
these coral islands would be everyone’s loss. Coral formations are home to more species than any
other place on the earth.
1. In Kiribati there were sudden high tides coming when there was no wind or rain. _____
2. High tides without wind or rain often happen in Kiribati. _____
3. Global warming is definitely the cause of those mysterious high tides. _____
4. The loss of coral islands doesn’t affect people on the earth. _____
5. Coral reefs play an essential role in marine life. _____
VIII. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the story.
I often hear or read about ‘natural disasters’ - the eruption of Mount St. Helen, a volcano in the state
of Washington, Hurricane Andrew in Florida, the floods in the American Midwest, terrible
earthquakes all over the world, huge fires, and so on. But I’ll never forget my first personal experience
with the strangeness of nature - ‘the London Killer Fog’ of 1952. It began on Thursday, December 4,
when a high-pressure system of warm air covered southern England. With the freezing-cold air below,
heavy fog formed. Pollution from factories, cars and coal stoves mixed with the fog. The humidity was
terribly high, there was no breeze at all. Traffic such as cars, trains, boats stopped. People couldn’t
see, and some walked onto the railroad tracks or into the river. It was hard to breathe, and many
people got sick. Finally, on Tuesday, December 9, the wind came and the fog went away. But after
that, even more people got sick. Many of them died.
1. Which ‘natural disaster’ isn’t mentioned in the passage?
A. a volcano B. a tornado C. a flood D. a hurricane
2. What is the writer’s unforgettable personal experience?
A. the London killer B. the heavy fog in London in 1952
C. a high-pressure system D. the strangeness of nature
3. How long did the ‘London Killer Fog’ last?
A. for four days B. for five days C. for six days D. for a week
4. What didn’t happen during the time of the ‘London Killer Fog’?
A. pollution B. heavy rain C. humidity D. heavy fog
5. Why did the traffic stop?
A. because of the rain B. because of the windy weather
C. because of the humid weather D. because of the heavy fog
IX. Read the article, and do the tasks that follow.
Extreme Earth
1. ______________________
Every year, there are more than a million earthquakes. Don’t worry! A lot of them are small.
Earthquakes happen when the Earth’s plates under the sea bed move. One of the world’s largest
earthquakes happened on 26th December 2004 in the Indian Ocean near Indonesia. More than
230,000 people died from the earthquake and the resulting tsunami. More recently, on 11 th March
2011, more than 16,000 died when a huge earthquake started 72 kilometres under the sea in the
north-east of Japan. Here’s how to be prepared.
2. ______________________
There isn’t much time before an earthquake so it’s a good idea to have a survival kit. For example, put
a torch, a radio, a first-aid kit, a blanket, some money, a few clothes and enough food and water for
two or three days into a bag ready to use.
3. ______________________
When an earthquake starts, find a place to hide. For instance, tables and desks are good, but make
sure you hide under them. Try to protect your head and neck with your arms. It’s better to stay
indoors during an earthquake, but if you’re outside, try and protect yourself from things like glass
from windows or falling objects. If possible, try and move to a hilly area. Stay calm and don’t panic!
4. ______________________
The Earth often continues moving and shaking for a few minutes after an earthquake. These are the
aftershocks. Don’t leave your house or school for about ten minutes afterwards.
Task 1. Match headings A-D with paragraphs 1-4.
A. After an Earthquake
B. Earthquake Facts
C. During an Earthquake
D. Before an Earthquake
Task 2. Read the article again, and find words that match the definitions.
1. this describes what helps us stay alive in difficult situations ______
2. what happens when the Earth’s surface moves and shakes ______
3. an enormous wave in the sea resulting from the earth moving and shaking ______
4. a small light you carry in your hand or use on your mobile phone ______
Task 3. Answer the questions.
1. What causes an earthquake?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. When and where did one of the world’s largest earthquakes happen?
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. Where did the Japanese earthquake start?
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. Name a good place to hide if you are indoors during an earthquake?
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. What are the dangers of you are outside during an earthquake?
__________________________________________________________________________________
X. Read the text and decide whether the sentences T (true) or F (false). Correct the false sentences.
THE ENVIRONMENT
This week, four experts share with us what they think the key challenges for the world’s environment
will be in the future. As always, we are curious to get our readers’ reactions. So tell us what you think.
 Endangered species
The black rhino in Africa is in serious danger of becoming extinct. This is because some people think
rhino horn has special powers. They pay enormous sums of money for it. So people kill rhinos and sell
their horns. Tigers are in serious danger, too. At the beginning of the 20 th century, there were about
100,000 tigers. Now there are only about 3,000 left. In a few years’ time, there might not be any tigers
left at all. These are just two examples. Many other animals are endangered, too. Some of them may
be gone forever very soon.
 Overfishing
It’s not looking good for the fish population. Certain species are in danger, and there aren’t many of
them in the sea where fishermen usually go. Fishing ships are therefore going further and further out
into the oceans. They try to get the rare species because they can get better prices for them. If things
go on like this, 40 years from now there won’t be any fish left in the seas. It’s not too late yet, but it
may be soon. The oceans need much stricter laws and a fishing industry that keeps to them.
 Deforestation
About 30% of the world’s land is still covered with forests. But every year, we lose areas as big as the
country of Panama. Big companies earn millions from producing wood, paper, and cardboard from
the trees. Forests are also cut down to make more space for growing crops such as soya or creating
huge cattle farms. The consequences of deforestation are dramatic and partly responsible for climate
change. About 70% of the world’s land animals and plants live in forests. If we lose the forests, we will
lose millions of species.
 Rising levels of sea water
Over the last 20 years or so, sea water temperatures have been going up. As a consequence, the ice
caps around the poles have started to melt, and sea levels have started to rise. If this doesn’t stop, the
water will rise further and may flood many islands. Then some countries like the Maldives won’t be
there anymore. There is also a danger that some huge low-lying coastal cities might end up below the
sea. It’s hard to imagine what the consequences of such changes might be.
1. Black rhinos are far more endangered than tigers.
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. At the beginning of the last century there were ten times more tigers than now.
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. The fishing industry gets more money for fish that are in danger than for the ones that are not.
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. The fishing laws are very strict, and the fishing industry keeps to them.
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. Financial interests play a big role in deforestation.
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. Sea levels rise as sea temperatures fall.
__________________________________________________________________________________
XI. Read the texts, and mark the sentences true (T), false (F), or not given (NG).
HAITI EARTHQUAKE (Sue’s diary)
 January 16th, 2010
I just arrived in Port-au-Prince, Haiti with the Lend-A-Hand volunteer team and I can’t believe my
eyes! The earthquake that happened four days ago has destroyed most of the buildings. The
earthquake has affected three million people. Thousands have lost their lives or have temporary
injuries, and even more have lost their homes. Haiti suffers from hurricanes and floods every year, but
this is something else. Our team’s first challenge is cleaning the rubble - pieces of broken brick, stone,
which is everywhere.
 January 22nd, 2010
On Tuesday a rescue team pulled a five-year-old boy out of the rubble. He was still alive after four
days. The United Nations has offered a small wage to the people of Haiti for helping to clean up the
streets. This helps them to buy food. Conditions are terrible, though. Thousands of people are living in
tents with no toilets or running water. The earthquake has also caused tsunamis in nearby fishing
villages that have damaged beaches and even swept homes out to sea.
 February 1st, 2010
The whole world is helping Haiti. Rescue teams have come from places as far as Iceland and China.
We have cleared the main roads of Port-au-Prince, though, so food and medical supplies should get
through soon. More volunteers have just arrived. Together, hopefully, we can rebuild Haiti after this
awful disaster.
1. Sue is volunteering in Haiti with friends. ______
2. Three million people are now homeless. ______
3. Natural disasters don’t happen often in Haiti. ______
4. The rescue team took five days to rescue the boy. ______
5. The earthquake only hit Port-au-Prince. ______
6. Sue’s team is helping to give out food. ______
7. Sue thinks rebuilding will take a long time. ______
XII. Read the text and choose the correct answer.
Earthquakes: A Common Phenomenon
Earthquakes are actually more common than most people think. In fact, in some places around the
world, like California, earthquakes can occur every day. Most of these earthquakes are not that
strong. The location of an earthquake is a big factor in whether or not it will cause damage. When an
earthquake occurs a long way from the earth’s surface, it doesn’t do any harm to people or buildings.
However, when an earthquake occurs near or on the surface, there will be problems. An earthquake
doesn’t have to be high on the Richter scale to cause damage; it just has to happen at the right place.
The best thing you can do in an earthquake is stay calm and know how to protect yourself.
1. Earthquakes take place _______________.
A. rarely in the world
B. occur daily in the world
C. more often than most people think
2. In places like California, earthquakes _______________.
A. can happen daily B. don’t happen daily C. happen every week
3. When an earthquake happens far from the surface, _______________.
A. there is a lot of damage B. there is no damage C. it does harm to people
4. An earthquake causes damage when _______________.
A. it’s high on the Richter scale
B. it’s low on the Richter scale
C. it happens at the right place
5. The best thing you can do in an earthquake is _______________.
A. to be protective B. not panic C. stay still
XIII. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true), or F (false)
Earthquakes
Every year there are over 150,000 earthquakes around the world. Many are very small and people
don’t notice them. Others, like the ones in Haiti in 2010, or Japan in 2011, caused terrible damage and
can destroy whole towns and cities.
Scientists study the Earth and know where earthquakes are likely to happen. Some countries have a
much higher risk than others. Japan has, on average, 1,500 earthquakes every year. In Britain there
are 140. The earthquakes in Britain are usually very small and don’t cause damage to people’s houses.
In Japan there are much bigger earthquakes, and many modem buildings are specially built so that
they don’t get damaged by the movement of the Earth.
One of the big problems with earthquakes is that we don’t know when they are going to happen.
Scientists can tell us where a big earthquake will probably happen, but they can’t tell US the date or
the time. If we could predict earthquakes, we could prepare for them. If we were prepared, we could
save lives by moving people away from the earthquake area.
In the future things may be different, however. In the 1970s, Chinese scientists noticed something
interesting about the behaviour of animals. In the winter of 1974 lots of snakes woke up from their
winter sleep and came out into the cold. That winter there were several earthquakes in the north of
China. In January the following year, people around the city of Haicheng noticed that lots of farm
animals like cows and horses were nervous and refused to go into buildings at night. In February there
was a large earthquake in the area. Its centre was in Haicheng.
1. There are over 150,000 serious earthquakes annually. ______
2. Japan has over ten times more earthquakes annually than Britain. ______
3. All new buildings are safe in earthquakes. ______
4. If we could say where earthquakes will happen, we could rescue more people. ______
5. Scientists think that animals may know that an earthquake is coming. ______
XIV. Read the texts, and do the tasks that follow.
Incredible Tornadoes
Nobody really says it anymore, but you’ve probably heard the old-fashioned English 1 _____________
“It’s raining cats and dogs” to describe very heavy rain. The 2 _____________ of this idiom is obscure,
and it has almost certainly never happened in real life. However, many other surprising things have
been 3 _____________ to rain down from the clouds. One morning in 1981, the citizens of Naphlion,
in Greece, saw small green frogs falling from the sky. They landed in trees, on roofs and on the
streets. The 4 _____________ of frog came from North Africa, hundreds of kilometres away!
5
The phenomenon is quite easy to _____________: small whirlwinds or tornadoes may form in
certain weather conditions, which can 6 _____________ up small things - creatures or objects — when
they pass over water. These can then be carried for many kilometres, and 7 _____________, they will
be dropped by the clouds carrying them. There have been reports of fish, tomatoes, and
8
_____________rocks, being dropped from the sky.
However, it seems that fish are the most common thing to fall from the clouds (apart from rain). They
are the lightest and most common inhabitants of water, after all. In one town in Honduras, a “Rain of
Fish” happens every year. The people of the area even have a festival to celebrate the occasion.
These stories tend to make light of the true nature of tornadoes, though. They are a force of nature
that can be truly terrifying. There are many types of tornadoes and while most are relatively
harmless, like the ones described above, every year parts of the world experience huge tornadoes,
which can bring extreme destruction. They have been known to destroy whole towns, and kill
thousands of people. And worse, some of them can be made of fire.
Known as “fire tornadoes,” they usually occur when a large wildfire is in progress. These fires are so
hot that they can create their own wind, which can turn into a spinning whirlwind of flame. Under the
right conditions, they can grow to over ten metres wide and 300 metres tall. Although fire tornadoes
usually move quite slowly, they can cause an incredible amount of destruction. They will set anything
in their way on fire and throw burning objects into the surrounding areas. Sometimes they can last for
more than an hour, and it is impossible to put them out. You just have to wait.
Glen Mason is one man who saw a fire tornado close up. He watched it for over half an hour before it
finally died. “It was about 500 metres away and it sounded just like a jet plane,” he said. “It was
terrifying, but also the most amazing and exciting thing I’ve ever seen. I’m a very lucky man - both to
have seen it and to have survived it!”
Task 1. Read the first two paragraphs of the text, and decide which answer A, B, C or D best fits
each gap.
1. A. word B. sentence C. statement D. expression
2. A. origin B. start C. birth D. beginning
3. A. thought B. known C. believed D. understood
4. A. brand B. kind C. species D. sort
5. A. explain B. express C. excuse D. expose
6. A. take B. bring C. hold D. pick
7. A. actually B. directly C. immediately D. eventually
8. A. still B. even C. more D. yet
Task 2. Read the whole text again and decide whether the sentences are true (T), false (F) or not
mentioned (NM). Correct the false sentences.
1. It is not known where the phrase ‘It’s raining cats and dogs’ comes from. ______________
2. In Naphlion, people were surprised to see rocks falling from the sky. ______________
3. Objects are picked up from the water by clouds. ______________
4. People have been killed by rocks falling from the sky. ______________
5. Fire tornadoes are not so dangerous when they move slowly. ______________
6. Glen Mason is glad that he experienced a fire tornado. ______________
Task 3. Match the bold words in the text to the definitions.
1. ______________ people or animals that live in a particular place
2. ______________ in a position around something
3. ______________ something that exists or happens, usually something unusual
4. ______________ not able or not likely to cause danger or damage
5. ______________ turning around very quickly

E. Speaking
• Everyday English
I. Choose the correct response. Then practise the short exchanges in pairs.
1. A: An earthquake struck the north-east of B: a/ The ground starts moving and shaking in an
Japan yesterday evening. earthquake.
b/ Really? Was there any early warning for that?
2. A: Many people were injured in the storm. B: a/ That’s shocking.
b/ Well done!
3. A: Mary’s house was destroyed in the B: a/ I hope she’s okay.
hurricane.
 b/ I wasn’t sure!
4. A: How can we foresee a landslide? B: a/ The ground became unstable, and it
moved. b/ It happens after a few days of heavy
rain.
5. A: I think there are more natural disasters B: a/ Certainly, because of human activities.
than there used to be. b/ That’s awful. It does nothing to me.
6. A: I don’t think we can prepare for natural B: a/ I agree with you. People should be
disasters at all. informed about them in advance.
b/ I don’t think so. We have the advance
warning systems.
7. A: The storm had not weakened when it hit B: a/ Right. The area will be rain-free over the
the region yesterday. next few days.
b/ And there wasn’t any damage to property.
8. A: Strong winds will come to our region soon. B: a/ I think we should fix water pipes first.
b/ I think we should fix the roofs first.
9. A: The local government provided shelter for B: a/ Permanent accommodation is good.
the victims. b/ Good news. They need a helping hand.
10. A: Why is the death toll in the earthquake is B: a/ Debris were cleared by rescue teams at
high? once.
b/ Rescue workers did not arrive in time.
• Talking about a natural disaster
II. Answer the following questions about floods in Pakistan in 2022 based on the words given. Then
practise the dialogue with your partner.
Floods in Pakistan - 2022
- more than 1,500 people died / 33 million left their houses
- rained very heavily / 11 and 19 June, 2022
- heavy rainfall / spread / diseases / destroyed 45% of the country’s cotton crop / made many farm
workers jobless
- climate change / the floods worse I three times the rainfall in Pakistan after 30 years
- deforestation, urbanization and road building / contribute / disaster
1. A: What was the damage of the floods in Pakistan in 2022?
 B: _____________________________________________________________________________
2. A: How long did it rain heavily?
B: _____________________________________________________________________________
3. A: What were the effects of heavy rainfall?
B: _____________________________________________________________________________
4. A: What was the cause of the disaster?
B:
5. A: Which factors also contributed to the disaster?
B: _____________________________________________________________________________
III. Answer the following questions about heatwave and drought in China in 2022 based on the
words given. Then practise the dialogue with your partner.
Heatwave and Drought in China
- China / experienced / worst heatwave / 60 years I from June to August 2022
- temperatures / over 40°C / several provinces
- severe drought / make / some rivers dry up / the Yangtze, Asia’s longest river
- drought / result in / power cuts I industrial areas, wheat-producing areas, and millions of homes
- climate change / main factor / causing the heatwave / drought
1. A: What did China experience in the summer of 2022?
B: __________________________________________________________________________
2. A: What were the temperatures during the heatwave?
B: __________________________________________________________________________
3. A: What were the effects of the severe drought?
B: __________________________________________________________________________
4. A: What did the drought result in?
B: __________________________________________________________________________
5. A: What was the main factor causing the heatwave and drought?
B: __________________________________________________________________________
• Giving and responding to bad news
IV. Read the dialogue between two students on the phone. Underline the phrases giving bad news
and circle the phrases responding to it.
A: Hi, Jane. I can’t make the presentation today. I had an accident last night.
B: That’s awful! Are you OK? Where are you?
A: I’m at home now. I got a motorcycle downtown last night and another rider hit us.
B: How frightening! Are you hurt?
A: I’m OK, thanks. The ambulance took the cyclist to hospital. I think he’s OK.
B: That’s good news. Why don’t you try to relax now and get some sleep? I’ll take care of the
presentation. Call me if you need anything?
A: Yeah, I will. Thanks, Jane. What about you? Did you pass your English test?
B: I failed my English test. I can’t believe it.
A: Oh, I’m sorry. What happened?
B: I made some mistakes in the reading test, and I was nervous during my speaking test.
A: Oh, dear. I think everyone feels nervous before taking their test.
B: I feel upset. All my friends have passed.
A: Cheer up. It’s not the end of the world.
B: I suppose so. I can take the test again soon.
A: You’re right. It’s not that bad.
V. Choose the correct responses to the following situations.
1. My father has lost his job!
A. No, I’m afraid it isn’t.
B. It doesn’t matter.
C. I’m so sorry to hear that!
2. I’ve lost my dog during my walk in the park.
A. What does it mean?
B. What awful news! I’m sorry.
C. Is there anything more interesting?
3. My sister had an accident yesterday.
A. Well, that’s very surprising.
B. I’m sorry, but I can’t agree more. You’re right.
C. I really don’t know what to say. I can’t believe it.
4. My house has been burgled!
A. I’m so sorry. If there’s anything I can do, just let me know.
B. You must be kidding me. It’s not easy.
C. Not really. I couldn’t follow the story. I’m sorry.
5. The high water damaged the furniture in my house last night.
A. Oh, sorry. I’m busy at the moment.
B. I’m sorry. Is there anything I can do to help?
C. It is very kind of you to say so. Thank you so much.

F. Writing
• Writing about a natural disaster
I. Write instructions about things to do before, during, and after a typhoon, using the words given.
A Typhoon
Before:
1. prepare / emergency kits / medicine, extra clothes, cash / important documents
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. also prepare / candles, flashlights / extra batteries / in case / power / go out
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. store / food / clean water enough / three days
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. listen / the radio / watch TV / news updates
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
During:
5. stay indoors / listen / the news / weather updates / flood warnings
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. if I you I need I evacuate / you / close / windows / turn off the main electricity switch / bring your
survival kit
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
After:
7. only return home / after / authorities / say / the area / safe
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
8. check your surrounding areas / damaged electricity cables / fallen posts
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
II. Write instructions about things to do before, during, and after a landslide, using the words given.
Landslides
Before:
1. make sure / everyone / know / how to get emergency warnings / local officials via phone
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. choose an emergency meeting place / the family / meet to reunite
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. review / your emergency plan / practise landslide safety procedures / you / live I an area I where
landslides / common
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
During:
4. watch / listen / warning signs / a nearby landslide / including / sounds / falling debris
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. listen / a local news station for updates / leave your home / before / landslide / strike / it
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. landslides / move / faster / you can walk or run / so / move out of the path I the landslide / as
quickly as you can
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
After:
7. go / a public shelter / if / your home / not safe
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
8. report any damage / electricity lines, roadways / the authorities
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
9. landslides / often destroy I vegetation I you / replant / trees I the affected area I prevent future
landslides
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
III. Write instructions about things to do before, during, and after an earthquake, using the words
given.
Earthquakes
Before:
1. find out / warnings / earthquakes / the local television station
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. prepare / an emergency kit / food, water, medicine, and personal items
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. if / you / live / a high-risk area / strengthen your house
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
During:
4. stay away / hanging heavy items / avoid injury
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. move / a safe place / try / communicate / other family members
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
After:
6. check / your home / damage / stay away / damaged buildings
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
7. when I you / enter any buildings / carefully watch I every step you take / because I damage /
happen without expectation
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
8. help your neighbours / especially / elderly people / small children / if you can
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST (UNIT 9)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. damage B. shake C. tornado D. safe
2. A. tsunami B. disaster C. landslide D. large
3. A. erupt B. predict C. destroy D. tremble
4. A. volcanic B. emergency C. rescue D. victim
5. A. tsunami B. disaster C. storm D. missing
II. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others.
6. A. rescue B. supply C. erupt D. damage
7. A. landslide B. earthquake C. typhoon D. warning
8. A. hurricane B. tornado C. volcano D. eruption
9. A. disaster B. injury C. tsunami D. provision
10. A. tropical B. natural C. terrible D. destructive
III. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
11. A ____________ is sudden flooding that occurs when water rises quickly within several hours of a
heavy rain.
A. quick flood B. rapid flood C. flash flood D. hot flood
12. Monsoon rains across Thailand ____________ millions of people in 16 of its provinces.
A. has affected B. have affected C. have effect D. have influenced
13. Typhoon Haiyan made the damage, and ____________ of life became great in the Philippines.
A. lose B. loses C. losing D. loss
14. Thanks to the extensive ____________ measures taken, the loss of life in Typhoon Xangsane in Da
Nang and other provinces seemed to be relatively low.
A. prevent B. preventive C. prevention D. preventing
15. A number of other provinces will declare drought ____________ in the coming weeks.
A. accident B. emergency C. event D. situation
16. In some areas, human ____________ can be a contributing factor in causing landslides.
A. acts B. actions C. acting D. activities
17. The Pacific Ring of Fire is an area of frequent ____________ and volcanic ____________,
encircling the basin of the Pacific Ocean.
A. floods - eruptions B. earthquake – flood
C. flood - eruption D. earthquakes - eruptions
18. Magma is the liquid rock inside a volcano, but lava is magma that ____________ a volcano.
A. flows B. flows into C. flows out D. flows out of
19. A soft, loose soil may ____________ more intensely than hard rock at the same distance from the
same earthquake.
A. erupt B. rage C. shake D. collapse
20. During the next 24 hours, the storm will be moving north, around 10 km per hour and is expected
to ____________ the southeastern part of China’s Guangdong Province.
A. strike B. scatter C. bury D. struck
IV. Complete the sentences, using the correct form of the words in brackets.
21. Tsunami is a Japanese term for an unusually large ocean wave caused by undersea earthquake,
landslide, or volcanic ____________. (erupt)
22. During a volcano, you should follow the ____________ order issued by authorities. (evacuate)
23. Thunderstorms can be ____________, while tornadoes, and lightning can be life threatening.
(destroy)
24. ____________ of the deadly Nepal earthquake have told the horror of the moment when it
struck, leaving more than 3,000 dead. (survive)
25. The tents will be used for medical camps and temporary ____________ after the earthquake in
Nepal. (accommodate)
V. Fill in each blank with the correct word / phrase below.
property emergency tsunami ash assistance
warnings damage climate changes deforestation officials
26. Due to the high loss of both human lives and property, the Government of Viet Nam issued an
appeal for international ___________________.
27. Serious floods caused loss of human lives, as well as significant material ___________________.
28. On March 23, 2011, Japan suffered a huge ___________________ caused by an earthquake.
29. Local people asked weather ___________________to issue an hourly update for the disaster.
30. Natural disasters can also result in the tremendous destruction of ___________________, and
financial loss.
31. ___________________ is destroying large areas of tropical rainforest.
32. The National Hurricane Center issues ___________________, forecasts, and analyses of hazardous
tropical weather.
33. When volcanoes erupt, clouds of ___________________ cover plants making them inedible.
34. On June 9, authorities in Ninh Thuan Province declared a drought ___________________ for the
first time after five months of lacking rains.
35. ___________________ such as El Nino can also have a dramatic effect on the risk of wildfires.
VI. Fill in each blank with ONE suitable word.
Drought
Drought occurs when there is a lack of rainfall over a long period of time, resulting in water shortages
36
for groups of people, activities or the ______________. Droughts have a significant effect
37
______________ agriculture and can harm the economy.
38
Water vapour needs to rise high through the atmosphere in order to form ______________.
However, in 39 ______________of high pressure, water vapour does not rise and no rain or clouds will
form. When the high pressure stays in an area for a prolonged length of 40 ______________, the result
is drought.
VII. Complete the sentences with verbs in brackets in the past continuous.
Last Saturday, we were very busy. In the morning, ...
41. I (do) ______________ my homework.
42. my parents (shop) ______________.
43. my sister (chat) ______________ to her friends online.
44. my grandparents (drive) ______________ to our house.
At two o’clock in the afternoon, ...
45. I (make) ______________ tea for everyone.
46. my sister and my mum (cook) ______________ dinner.
47. my grandmother (sleep) ______________ in front of the TV.
At five o’clock in the afternoon, ...
48. we (have) ______________ a snack.
At six o’clock in the evening, ...
49. my parents and my grandmother (drink) ______________ tea.
50. my grandfather (try) ______________ to send an e-mail on my computer.
VIII. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Simple or Past Continuous tense.
51. Last night I (read) ______________ when suddenly I (hear) ______________ a shout.
52. The postman (come) ______________ while I (have) ______________ lunch.
53. When we (go) ______________ out, it (rain) ______________.
54. ______________ (you / watch) TV when I (phone) ______________ you?
55. We (meet) ______________ Ann at the party yesterday, she (wear) ______________ a lovely
white dress.
56. The boys (break) ______________ the window while they (play) ______________ football.
57. I was home late, but my friends (wait) ______________ when I (arrive) ______________.
58. He said that he (not drive) ______________ fast when the accident (happen) ______________.
59. Tom (fall) ______________ off the ladder while he (paint) ______________ the ceiling.
60. What (you / do) ______________ at this time yesterday?
IX. Read the text and choose the best words to fill in the blanks.
Professor Thea Williams is 61 ______________ for teaching students about climate change. She has a lot
62 63
of ______________ about current environmental issues. She uses this knowledge to
______________ her students about the effects of climate change. One major environmental issue that
Professor Williams is teaching her students about is the rising number of wildfires. Wildfires are
serious threats to our 64 ______________ environment. They destroy homes and 65 ______________ the
amount of farmland and forests, which causes problems for plants and animals.
61. A. responsible B. inform C. reduce
62. A. natural B. recycle C. knowledge
63. A. preserve B. protect C. inform
64. A. recycle B. natural C. responsible
65. A. reduce B. knowledge C. protect
X. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage.
The large movement of the earth under the water causes a very large and powerful tsunami. That
tsunami was called the Asian Tsunami in most of the world. It was called the Boxing Day Tsunami in
England, Australia, South Africa and Canada because it happened on the holiday which they call
Boxing Day. The tsunami caused a lot of damage to countries such as the Philippines, Thailand,
Indonesia and Sri Lanka.
Waves as high as 30 meters killed many people and damaged or destroyed a lot of buildings and other
property. Over 225,000 people died or they were not found after the tsunami. The waves traveled as
far away as South Africa (8,000 kilometers) where as many as 8 people died because of high water
caused by the waves. Because of how much damage was caused and the number of people the
earthquake affected, over $7 billion was donated to help the survivors and rebuild the areas
damaged.
66. Why was the tsunami called the Boxing Day Tsunami in England?
A. Because it happened when people were boxing.
B. Because it happened when people were collecting boxes.
C. Because it happened on Boxing Day.
D. Because it destroyed a lot of boxes.
67. How high were the waves?
A. thirteen meters B. eighteen meters C. thirty meters D. two hundred meters
68. What were some people in South Africa killed by?
A. earthquake B. high water C. high wind D. volcano
69. Which of the following sentences is NOT true?
A. Only in Asia the tsunami was called Asian Tsunami.
B. The tsunami caused a lot of damage to Indonesia.
C. Many people died because of the high waves.
D. A lot of money was raised to help people.
70. What does the word “survivors” in the last sentence mean?
A. Houses that aren’t destroyed. B. Offices are being rebuilt.
C. People who were dead. D. People who are left alive.
XI. Answer the following questions based on the words given. Then practise the dialogue with your
partner.
Floods in Central Viet Nam
- October 2020 / Central Viet Nam / hit by thirteen successive tropical storms / caused the worst
flooding and landslides in 100 years
- flood I take place / in several provinces I Thừa Thiên - Hue, Quảng Trị, Quảng Bình, Hà Tĩnh and
Quảng Ngãi
- floods / caused / numerous tropical cyclones
- storm Linfa / caused / the rainfall I over 90 inches in Thua Thien - Hue I destroyed about 400
houses / caused big losses to thousands of hectares of crops
- also caused landslides / Rào Trăng 3 Hydropower Plant I over 30 workers and rescuers missing
71. A: What did Central Viet Nam suffer from in October 2020?
B: __________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
72. A: What provinces did the flood take place?
B: __________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
73. A: What were the floods caused by?
B: __________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
74. A: What damage did the storm Linfa cause?
B: __________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
75. A: Did it make any landslides? If any, where?
B: __________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
XII. Write instructions about things to do before, during, and after a tsunami, using the words given.
Tsunamis
Tsunamis can hit people in coastal areas within minutes after a severe earthquake. The best way to
protect yourself and your family in case of a tsunami is to follow these steps.
Before:
76. find out if your home, 01 school / in tsunami hazard areas / plan evacuation routes / areas 30
metres above sea level / your family members
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
77. prepare an emergency kit / including I items I drinking water, medicine, food, cash and other
necessary items / at least three days
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
During:
78. after you hear the unusual noise / an approaching train, plane / move quickly / higher ground
away from the coast
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
After:
79. return home / after / the local officials / tell / it / safe
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
80. aware of secondary effects / landslides, contaminated water, / damaged walls or houses
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 REVIEW 3 (UNITS 7-8-9)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. coral B. authority C. storm D. volcanic
2. A. tornado B. shake C. sale D. habitat
3. A. tremble B. endangered C. extinct D. emergency
4. A. destroy B. disaster C. ecosystem D. display
5. A. species B. access C. centre D. price
II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
6. ____________ you come to the festival, you can enjoy the singing of the most skilled artists and
singers.
A. Because B. Since C. When D. During
7. ____________ they were boiling chung cakes, they told the stories about Tet.
A. Until B. While C. Although D. But
8. He hadn’t met his present wife ____________ he was nearly 40 years old.
A. when B. after C. as soon as D. until
9. We ____________ the first-footer on the morning of the first day of the Lunar New Year.
A. welcome B. will welcome C. welcomed D. can welcome
10. We ____________ the English Mid-term test next Wednesday according to the announcement.
A. take B. will take C. took D. can take
11. He ____________ drinks wine, but at the Christmas party he drinks a small glass of wine.
A. often B. sometimes C. rarely D. never
12. She has a desktop computer and a laptop. She ____________ uses the desktop, and she
____________ uses the laptop.
A. always - always B. always - sometimes
C. often - often D. sometimes - sometimes
13. What ____________ at 9 o’clock last night?
A. you were doing B. were you doing C. did you do D. you did
14. “You fell down on the ground. What ____________ then?” - “The nurse at our school
____________ me first aid.”
A. happened - gave B. was happening - was giving
C. happened - was giving D. was happening - gave
15. We ____________ a party when our neighbours ____________ fireworks in their garden.
A. had - set off B. were having - were setting off
C. were having - set off D. had - were setting off
III. Complete each blank in the following passage with the correct word below. There are some
extra words that you do not need.
floods argument disappear destroy
action activity difference discussion
Most people are worried about the future of our planet. There is clear evidence that the Earth has
been getting warmer. Most people believe that human activity, such as burning fossil fuels, has
caused the Earth to warm up. Human activity has not only caused change but also caused permanent
16
damage to the planet. The ____________ about climate change and how it will eventually destroy
our planet seems to be a popular topic nowadays. Every year, as the Earth continues to warm, the
17
effects of climate change are seen everywhere. As ice caps slowly ____________ and sea levels rise,
we also experience more storms, 18 ____________, and wildfires. We think our planet will be around
19
forever. However, the truth is that the Earth cannot survive unless we start taking ____________.
20
We must start working together to make a real ____________. We must stop polluting the planet
now.
IV. Read the text, and do the tasks that follow.
Earthquakes
Earthquakes are among the deadliest natural disasters, causing the largest numbers of casualties, the
highest death tolls, and the greatest destruction. In 1556 in China, the deadliest earthquake in history
killed 830,000 people. But many other earthquakes have caused the deaths of more than 100,000
people, and it is not unusual, even in modem times, for an earthquake death toll to reach 20,000 to
30,000 people with hundreds of thousands left homeless and with countless injured. The floodwaters
of the 2004 tsunami in Sumatra, which killed over 200,000 people, were caused by a catastrophic
earthquake.
Task 1. Decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).
21. Earthquakes are one of the deadliest natural disasters. _____
22. In modem times, the number of deaths caused by an earthquake is limited. _____
23. China is the country with the deadliest earthquake in history. _____
24. Earthquakes cause lots of death toll, homelessness and injuries. _____
25. arthquakes do not cause tsunamis at all. _____
Task 2. Match a word in column A with its definition in column B, writing the answer in each blank.
26. deadly (adj) _____ A. a person killed in a war or disaster
27. casualty (n) _____ B. very many
28. (death) toll (n) _____ C. causing great damage
29. countless (adj) _____ D. causing death
30. catastrophic (adj) _____ E. the number of people who were kill by something
V. Read the text and mark the sentences true (T), false (F), or not mentioned (NM).
Leeds Kirkgate Market

Leeds Kirkgate Market is on Vicar Avenue in the centre of Leeds, England. It is a very large covered
market. It has 800 stalls selling everything from food to household objects. Over 100,000 people visit
the market every week.
When the market opened in 1822, it was an open-air market. In 1850, they started to cover it. In
1875, they finished the construction and the market had an indoor and an outdoor shopping area.
Another interesting fact about this market is that it is the original location of a very popular
department store, Marks and Spencer. Michael Marks opened a penny bazaar in the outdoor market
in 1884 and it is still open today.
So, when you visit Leeds, make sure you make the Leeds Kirkgate Market one of your stops. You are
going to find some great bargains and have a great shopping day.
31. Leeds Kirkgate Market is in the centre of Leeds. _____
32. The market has only food stalls. _____
33. Leeds Kirkgate Market was the first covered market in Europe. _____
34. More than 100,000 people go to the market weekly. _____
35. The covered market opened in 1822. _____
36. In 1875, the market had two shopping areas. _____
37. The market has only an indoor area now. _____
38. The first Marks and Spencer shop opened at the market. _____
39. There isn’t a Marks and Spencer shop at the market today. _____
40. You can buy toys at the market. _____
VI. Answer the following questions, using the cues below.
Vincom Centre B Shopping Mall
Location: 72 Le Thanh Ton Street, Ben Nghe Ward, District 1, Ho Chi Minh City
Total area: 4,000 m2
Opening hours: 9.30-22.00
Vincom Centre B Shopping Mall provides full services in many department stores.
There are more than 100 brand names, domestic and international.
Fashion: clothes, footwear, eyewear, jewelleries, cosmetics...
Cuisine: Vietnamese, Asian (Thai, Korean, Chinese, Japanese) and Western (Italian,
American, French) restaurants, bakeries and cafes
Entertainment: cinemas, indoor children playing centre
41. Where is Vincom Centre B Shopping Mall? What are the opening hours?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
42. What services does it offer?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
43. What can you find out about fashion?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
44. What styles of cuisine are there?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
45. What are the facilities for entertainment there?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
VII. Write sentences about advantages and disadvantages of traditional shopping, using the words
given. Insert the expressions showing the sequence: firstly, secondly, moreover, to start with, and
in addition.
There are several advantages of traditional shopping.
46. we / know / where / goods / come from / check them
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. we / get them immediately / after / we / pay / without the Internet access / we / also return faulty
items easily
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. we / ask sellers / questions / get shopping experience
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. However, there are some disadvantages of traditional shopping.
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. it / take / a lot of time / go shopping like this
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 UNIT 10.
COMMUNICATION IN THE FUTURE
A. Pronunciation
• Stress in words ending in -ese and -ee
I. Write the words ending in -ese below in the correct group of the stress pattern
Chinese Lebanese Congolese Japanese Portuguese
Vietnamese Sudanese Maltese Bhutanese Burmese
Senegalese Nepalese Togolese journalese
Oo _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
oO _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
ooO _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
oooO _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
ooOoo _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
II. Write the words ending in -ee below in the correct group of the stress pattern.
payee jubilee employee trainee refugee escapee
trustee coffee interviewee committee absentee officialese
devotee nominee addressee divorcee examinee
Oo _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
oO _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Ooo _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
oOo _______________________________________________________________________
 _______________________________________________________________________
ooO _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
oooO _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________

B. Vocabulary
• Communication technology
I. Complete the sentences with the words given.
translation webcam smartphone voice message video conference
emoji cake language connection social networks
1. You need a fast Internet _______________ to download the information.
2. During lockdown we had a weekly _______________ with the rest of the family.
3. We teach children how to deal with cyberbullying and the safe use of chat rooms and
____________.
4. He directs his business mostly from home via email and _______________.
5. She wasn’t in so I left a(n) _______________ on her answerphone.
6. Online _______________ services are not always accurate as they should be.
7. Users can also now use colour _______________ symbols in their messages.
8. Creating graphs is a piece of _______________ on the computer - it’s very simple.
9. You can use your _______________ to access the Internet.
10. Despite the _______________ barrier, they soon became good friends.
II. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs given.
focus translate text zoom leave
hold keep make adjust connect
1. Children seem to be _______________ non-stop these days.
2. If I am not there when you call, _______________ a message.
3. Have you _______________ in contact with any of your friends from primary school?
4. This button is for _______________ the volume.
5. Could we _______________ a meeting to discuss this matter tomorrow afternoon?
6. I’ll just _______________ up the printer to the computer and then we’ll be ready to go.
7. I know it’s noisy in here, but try to _______________ on the main points.
8. I _______________ a video call to a friend in London yesterday.
9. Television cameras _______________ in on the fans cheering in the stands.
10. She works for the UN, _______________ from English into French.
III. Complete the sentences with the words given below.
inbox clip browser search
folder broadband icon
1. You can download files much faster if you have a(n) _______________ connection.
2. Google is the most popular _______________ engine.
3. Are there any new messages in your _______________?
4. Click the _______________ at the bottom of the page to visit our website.
5. Internet Explorer is the most common _______________, but Firefox is also popular.
6. It’s easy to upload a movie _______________ onto YouTube or Google Video.
7. Store the documents in a(n) _______________ so that they are easier to find.
IV. Match the verbs with the definitions.
blog post share register update upload
1. to enter your name and other personal information before using a site __________
2. to add recent news or information __________
3. to put text or images online for other people to see __________
4. to write for a website about your opinions, interests or experiences __________
5. to send files from your computer to the internet __________
6. to allow other people to see something online __________
V. Complete the sentences with the verbs given below.
leave make post send take
1. Just a minute - I need to __________ a quick phone call.
2. If I’m not at home, you can __________ a message with my dad.
3. You look very funny. Just a minute, I’m going to __________ a photo of you.
4. I’m just going out to __________ an important letter.
5. It’s Mai’s birthday on Sunday. Don’t forget to __________ her a card.
VI. Match the verbs with the corresponding nouns to make meaningful phrases and write the
answer in each blank.
 1. express ________ A. eye contact
2. achieve ________ B. a message
3. hold ________ C. your head
4. impress ________ D. a question
5. make ________ E. an opinion
6. nod ________ F. a rule
7. send ________ G. a result
8. ask ________ H. an answer
9. follow ________ I. a conversation
10. give ________ J. other people
VII. Ways of communicating
Task 1. What can you see in the photos? Which phrases in the table do you connect with each item?

take / send a photo write a letter make a phone call

write a note post a letter / card send / receive an e-mail
send a card leave a message send / get a text
go on the Internet check your messages message call someone
Picture a: __________________________________________________________________________
Picture b: __________________________________________________________________________
Picture c: __________________________________________________________________________
Picture d: __________________________________________________________________________
Picture e: __________________________________________________________________________
Picture f: __________________________________________________________________________
Task 2. Complete the sentences in as many ways as you can, using the phrases in Task 1.
1. If you need to contact someone urgently, you can _______________ or. _______________.
2. The cheapest way to keep in touch is to _______________ or _______________.
3. If you need to find some information quickly, you can _______________.
4. If the person you call doesn’t answer, you can _______________.
5. 100 years ago if people wanted to communicate with each other, they _______________.
6. If you want to wish someone happy birthday, you can _______________.
7. If you’re on holiday and want to contact your friends, you can _______________.
8. If you go out and you want to leave a message for a member of your family, you can
_____________.
9. If you want to say thank you for a meal or present, you can _______________.
10. If you’re bored and can’t think of anything to do, you can _______________.
 Prepostitions
VIII. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. I tried phoning her house, but I couldn’t get _______________.
2. Nam and I both went to live in Ha Noi _______________ the same time.
3. We communicated mostly _______________ email.
4. A teacher must be able to communicate effectively _______________ students.
5. We can use a computer _______________ a touch screen for more convenience.
6. Anna interacts well _______________ other children in the class.
7. She spends hours on the phone chatting _______________ her friends.
8. Text messaging enables people to keep _______________ close contact at all times.
9. The organization put me _______________ contact with other people in a similar position.
10. Reports are coming in _______________ satellite.
11. Imagine a private-school classroom where students have a two-way video conference
_______________ a major museum.
12. She focused her camera _______________ a tiny insect.

C. Grammar
• Prepositions of place and time
Prepositions of place
I. Complete the sentences with in, at or on.
1. Peter is _______________ the kitchen.
2. The book is _______________ the table.
3. He was waiting _______________ the bus stop.
4. The milk is _______________ the fridge.
5. My mother was waiting _______________ the school gate.
6. They were sitting _______________ the floor.
7. They are all _______________ the garden.
8. Ms. White is not here - she’s _______________ the office.
9. The butter is _______________ the shelf _______________ the cupboard.
10. The money is _______________ my pocket.
II. Complete the sentences with in, at or on.
1. Write your name _______________ the top of the page.
2. I like that picture _______________ the wall _______________ the kitchen.
3. There was an accident _______________ the crossroads this morning.
4. My cousin lives _______________ a small village _______________ the south of Viet Nam.
5. He wasn’t sure whether he came to the right office. There was no name _______________ the
door.
6. Mr. Quan couldn’t spend the whole day sitting _______________ a desk.
7. The headquarters of the company are _______________ Ho Chi Minh City.
8. You’ll find the answers to the problems _______________ the back pages of the book.
9. The police are looking for a man with a scar _______________ his right cheek.
10. _______________ the end of the street there is a path leading to the river.
III. Complete the sentences with in, at or on.
1. I didn’t see you _______________ the party on Saturday. Where were you?
2. It was a very slow train. It stopped _______________ every station.
3. I don’t know where my umbrella is. Maybe I left it _______________ the bus.
4. The exhibition _______________ the Museum of Modem Art finished on Saturday.
5. We stayed _______________ a very nice hotel when we were _______________ Ha Noi.
6. There were fifty rooms _______________ the hotel.
7. Nick is sick. He wasn’t _______________ school today. He was _______________ home
_______________ bed.
8. I wasn’t in when you phoned. I was _______________ my aunt’s house.
9. It was often too hot _______________ my uncle’s flat. It’s _______________ the top floor.
10. Paul lives _______________ London. He’s a student _______________ London University.
IV Look at the picture and fill in the gaps with the correct prepositions.

1. There is a bed, a wardrobe, a desk and some cupboards _______________ the room.
2. The desk is _______________ the window.
3. There is a computer _______________ the desk.
4. There is a wardrobe _______________ the desk.
5. There is a chair _______________ the bed.
6. There are some drawers _______________ the bed.
7. The desk is _______________ the bed.
8. There are some cupboards _______________ the wall _______________ the bed.
9. The desk is _______________ the wall and the wardrobe.
10. There is a pillow _______________ the bed.
V. Complete the sentences, using in, at or on and one of the phrases below.
the west coast the world the front row the corner
the right the back of the envelope the Red River the sky
the back of the class his way to work
1. The television is _______________ of the room.
2. Ha Noi - the capital of Viet Nam – is _______________.
3. It was a lovely day. There wasn’t a cloud _______________.
4. In most countries people drive _______________.
5. What is the tallest building _______________?
6. My father usually buys a newspaper _______________ in the morning.
7. San Francisco is _______________ of the United States.
8. We went to the theatre last night. We had seats _______________.
9. I couldn’t hear the teacher very well. She spoke quickly and I was sitting _______________.
10. When you send a letter, it is a good idea to write your name and address _______________.
Prepositions of time
VI. Complete the sentences, using suitable prepositions of time.
1. I’ll see you _______________ Monday.
2. I’ll pick you up _______________ eight o’clock.
3. I’m going home _______________ four o’clock.
4. We had a party _______________ the last day of the school year.
5. We arranged to meet _______________ seven _______________ the morning.
6. They came to visit us _______________ my birthday.
7. I can work _______________ the morning, but I don’t like working _______________ night.
8. Did you have a good time _______________ Christmas?
VII. Complete the sentences with in, at or on where necessary, or zero preposition (0).
1. I’ll see you _______________ Friday.
2. I’ll see you _______________ next Friday.
3. What are you doing _______________ Saturday?
4. What are you doing _______________ the weekend?
5. They often go out _______________ the evenings.
6. They often go out _______________ Sunday evenings.
7. Do you go to school _______________ Saturdays?
8. Do you go to school _______________ every Saturday?
9. We usually have a holiday _______________ the summer.
10. We often have a short holiday _______________ Tet.
11. My aunt got married _______________ 18 May 2022.
12. My sister is getting married _______________ this year.
VIII. Complete the sentences with in, at or on.
1. Mozart was bom in Salzburg _______________ 1756.
2. I haven’t seen Mai for a few days. I last saw her _______________ Tuesday.
3. The price of gas is going up _______________ October.
4. I was invited to a wedding _______________ 14 February.
5. Hurry up! We have to go _______________ five minutes.
6. There are usually a lot of parties _______________ New Year’s Eve.
7. We travelled overnight to Ha Noi and arrived _______________ 5 o’clock _______________ the
morning.
8. My father is 60. He’ll be retiring from his job _______________ two years’ time.
9. The course begins _______________ 7 January and ends sometime _______________ February.
10. Saturday night I went to bed _______________ 11 o’clock.
IX. Complete the sentences with in, at or on.
1. My uncle and aunt often go out for a meal _______________ their wedding anniversary.
2. Our family enjoys spending time together _______________ the evening.
3. The children always stay at home _______________ night.
4. He moved here _______________ 2008.
5. He moved here _______________ September 2008.
6. He moved here _______________ September 3, 2008.
7. _______________ Thursday afternoon, I have an English class.
8. The plane left _______________ 7.10 pm, and it’ll arrive at the airport _______________ two
hours.
9. We ate lunch _______________ noon.
10. We often have a big party _______________ Christmas Eve.
X. Fill in each blank with at, in, or on.
1
_______________ Saturdays, I get up early and take a shower. Then, I go to the dance class
2 3
_______________ 9.00. _______________ the afternoon, I go to the mall with my friends.
4
_______________ the evening, I watch a DVD. 5 _______________ Sundays, I help my mom with the
chores. Then, 6 _______________ the afternoon, we visit my grandparents. 7
_______________ the
evening, I do my homework and then watch TV. I go to bed 8 _______________ 10.00.
XI. Fill in the gaps with in, at, from... to, during, on, between, and within.
1. My birthday is _______________ December.
2. I have a piano lesson _______________ Wednesday afternoon.
3. _______________ the weekend, I like to go to the park.
4. We usually have lunch _______________ noon.
5. He works _______________ 8 am _______________ 5 pm, Monday to Friday.
6. I usually do my homework _______________ 4 pm and 7 pm every day.
7. Nam often wakes up _______________ 6 am _______________ the morning.
8. We often go to the beach _______________ the summer holidays.
9. Try to finish this work _______________ an hour.
10. We often have a party _______________ New Year’s Eve.
• Possessive pronouns
XI. Replace the underlined phrase with the correct possessive pronouns.
1. This pen is my pen.
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. These seats are our seats.
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. This umbrella is her umbrella.
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. These pencils are your pencils.
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. That overcoat is his overcoat.
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. I believe this pen is her pen; it is not my pen.
__________________________________________________________________________________
7. This pair of scissors is her pair of scissors.
__________________________________________________________________________________
8. His pronunciation is good, and my pronunciation is good too.
__________________________________________________________________________________
9. His bicycle was expensive, but your bike was more expensive.
__________________________________________________________________________________
10. Is this package of biscuits your package of biscuits or Phong’s?
__________________________________________________________________________________
XII. Choose the correct options to complete the following short exchanges.
1. A: Don’t forget your / yours hat. Here.
B: No, that’s not my / mine hat. My / Mine is green.
2. A: Please take this wood carving as a gift from me. Here. It’s your / yours.
B: Thank you. You’re very thoughtful.
3. A: Isn’t that the Smiths’ car? That one over there. The blue one.
B: No, that’s not their / theirs. Their / Theirs car is dark blue.
4. A: Nam and I really like our / ours new flat. It has a lot of space. How do you like your / yours?
B: Our / Ours is small, but it’s comfortable.
5. A: Excuse me. Is this your I yours umbrella?
B: I don’t have an umbrella. Ask Phong. Perhaps it is him / his.
6. A: When do your / yours classes begin?
B: September the fifth. How about your / yours? When do your / yours begin?
A: My / Mine begin on August the twenty-ninth.
7. A: Jane, your / yours spaghetti sauce is delicious.
B: Thank you, but it’s not as good as your / yours.
A: Oh, no. Your / Yours is much better! It tastes just as good as Anna’s.
B: Do you like Anna’s spaghetti sauce? I think her / hers is too salty.
A: Maybe. My / Mine father makes good spaghetti sauce too. His / He is thick and rich.
B: In fact, making spaghetti sauce is easy, but everyone’s sauce is just a little different.
XIV. Write new sentences using the structure: a friend of mine, etc.
1. I am speaking to one of my friends.
 I am speaking ____________________________________________________________________.
2. We met one of your relatives.
 We met a _______________________________________________________________________.
3. Phong borrowed one of my books.
 Phong __________________________________________________________________________.
4. Ann invited some of her friends to her flat.
 Ann ____________________________________________________________________________.
5. We had dinner with one of our neighbours.
__________________________________________________________________________________.
6. I went on holiday with two of my friends.
__________________________________________________________________________________.
7. Is that man one of your friends?
__________________________________________________________________________________?
8. I met one of Jane’s friends at the party.
__________________________________________________________________________________.
XV. Make sentences with a friend of/friends of + possessive pronoun from the cues given.
Example:
(You have a friend in Ha Noi. You wrote a letter to this person.)
 I wrote a letter to a friend of mine in Ha Noi.
1. Mai has a friend in Ho Chi Minh City. She wrote a letter to this person.
__________________________________________________________________________________.
2. Nam and I have good friends in Hoi An. We visited them.
__________________________________________________________________________________.
3. You have a friend. You met this person.
__________________________________________________________________________________.
4. Nam and Phong have some friends. They usually have lunch with these friends.
__________________________________________________________________________________.
5. You have a friend. You invited this person to spend the weekend with your family.
__________________________________________________________________________________.
6. You have a good friend. You want to introduce me to this person.
__________________________________________________________________________________.

D. Reading
I. Read about Michelle and Kenji and choose the correct answer.
Linking the World
Because of the Internet, people from all over the world can now be friends even if they never meet.
Michelle and Kenji are online friends. They tell us how they use their computers.
Michelle, 15, New York, USA
“When I’m doing a school project, I use my computer to go online and search the Internet for
information. Then I write the project on the computer. Right now I’m doing one on the Brazilian
rainforest. If I find some good photos, I’ll include them. And, of course, I use my computer to stay in
touch with friends like Kenji”
Kenji, 14, Manchester, UK
“I’m on my computer from eight until ten o’clock every evening. I use it to chat to Michelle, play
games, to check the latest football news and to chat about my favourite team, Manchester City. If
they win the match this Saturday, I’ll be really happy. Unfortunately, Michelle is a Manchester United
supporter!”
1. Michelle and Kenji are ___________.
A. brother and sister B. friends
2. They ___________.
A. meet once or twice a week B. have never met
3. Michelle talks to Kenji ___________.
A. online B. on her mobile phone
4. When she does school projects, Michelle usually ___________.
A. lakes her own photos B. finds photos on the Internet
5. Kenji goes online ___________.
A. every morning B. every evening
6. Michelle and Kenji often chat about ___________.
A. football B. their school projects
7. Kenji supports.
A. Manchester United B. Manchester City
8. Both of them use the Internet.
A. to keep in touch with their friends B. for their study
II. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Telepathy: Mind to Mind Communication
1
The ___________ “telepathy” has been derived from the words “tele” meaning “distance” and
2
“pathy” meaning “feeling”. So telepathy actually means ___________feelings through a distance.
Telepathy is the communication 3 ___________two minds, 4 ___________over a distance, without the
5
___________of the five known senses.
At some point of time or the other, we all have 6 ___________telepathy. Maybe you were thinking of
7
someone you haven’t talked to for months and you suddenly get a call from them. Or
___________two people are together, they might say the same thing at the same time. These are
 8
spontaneous mind-to-mind ___________that tend to occur frequently between closely related
individuals.
1. A. letter B. phrase C. word D. signal
2. A. holding B. carrying C. bringing D. getting
3. A. between B. among C. through D. across
4. A. separate B. separated C. separating D. be separated
5. A. use B. using C. take D. taking
6. A. made B. brought C. experienced D. taken
7. A. where B. when C. during D. since
8. A. ways B. methods C. techniques D. communications
III. Read the passage carefully, and then answer the questions below.
Getting In Touch Through The Ages
Nobody knows who wrote the first letter or when, but we know that 4,000 years ago in Ancient Egypt
people carried letters by hand over hundreds of kilometers. Very few people could write, so there
were special people, called scribes, who wrote letters for everyone else.
The first stamp didn’t appear until 1840 and it cost just one penny. Nowadays one of the original
stamps cost €375. Letter writing was so popular in the 1840s that people delivered the post several
times a day.
An American company - Remington and Sons - made the first typewriter in 1871. All the letters in the
word ‘typewriter’ were on the top line of the keyboard so that salesmen could demonstrate the
machine more easily. Amazingly, the letters are still in the same place on the modem computer
keyboard!
In 1875, when Alexander Graham Bell demonstrated a fantastic new invention called the telephone,
nobody was very interested in it. The first fax machine appeared at around the same time, but it was
so enormous that no one wanted one — in fact, fax machine didn’t become popular for another
hundred years.
Then there was the walkie-talkie, a small two-way radio first used by the US army in the 1930s.
However, since they weighed around 13.5 kilos, the talking was perhaps easier than the walking! After
World War Two, they became popular with police officers.
Nowadays, we can send messages and pictures around the world in a few seconds using computers
and mobile phones. It is hard to believe that e-mail was only invented in 1971, and the first text
message was sent in 1992. Today we send over a billion text messages around the world every single
day, and an incredible thirty-six billion e-mails.
1. How did people deliver letters in Ancient Egypt?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. How much did the first stamp cost?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. How often did they deliver letters in the 1840s?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. How are the letters arranged on a modem computer keyboard?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. When did the first fax machine appear?
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. Why was it difficult to walk with the first walkie-talkies?
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. When was the first text message?
___________________________________________________________________________________
8. How many e-mails do we send every day?
___________________________________________________________________________________
IV. Read the text and answer the questions.
Do You Need to Get out More?
Social networking sites, like Facebook and MySpace, began in 2003. Since then, they have become
incredibly popular with people of all ages - especially teenagers. Facebook, for example, now has
more than one billion users worldwide. The number of Facebook users is growing fastest in Asia.
There are 3.6% more users in Asia every month compared to 1.6% in the rest of the world.
The average Facebook users has 120 friends on the site. But how can they all be real friendships?
Often, these people have never actually met. Have teenagers become too interested in their online
social life? Are they just sitting in their bedroom staring at their laptops? Have they stopped going
out?
Recently, some scientists have claimed that social networking sites can cause serious health problems.
Dr. Arie Sigman insists that these sites are harmful to young people. Sitting in front of a computer
screen can increase the risk of headaches, diabetes and even heart disease. Furthermore, he believes
teenagers’ social skills are also becoming worse as a result of overuse of these sites. He says many of
today’s teenagers have not learned how to get along with real people in the real world.
However, not all scientists agree with this negative viewpoint. Other studies have shown that a good
online social life often encourages a healthy social life in the real world, too. These scientists say that
chatting in chat rooms is real communication. So who is right? Social networking sites have only
existed for a few years, so it’s probably too early to say. What do you think?
1. How long have social networking sites existed?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. How many users does Facebook have worldwide?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. According to Dr. Sigman, social networking sites can increase the risks of which three health
problems?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. According to other studies, what are the benefits of social networking sites?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Why is it difficult to know which group of scientists is correct?
___________________________________________________________________________________
V. Read the text, and match the headings (A-F) with paragraphs (1-5). There is one extra heading
that you do not need.
A. Why do “friends” websites seem dangerous?
B. How do “friends” websites work?
C. What’s the best advice for people who want to use “friends” websites?
D. Where do Millie’s friends live?
E. How can I find “friends” websites?
F. Why are “friends” websites popular?
1. ______________
Millie is 14 years old and lives in Miami. She has 204 friends - and she makes two or three more
friends every week. About 20 of her friends also live in Miami. Some go to the same school, and
others go to the same music clubs and sports centers. She often sees them. The others live in other
cities and other countries: England, Canada, Japan ... She never meets these friends, but she talks to
them on the Internet. They are her “MySpace Friends”.
2. ______________
Because of websites like MySpace, Yahoo, 360 and Bebo, people can make friends online. These
websites are very popular all over the world, especially with young people. Users have their own
homepage. They give information about themselves. They write letters for their webpage, show
photos and give opinions. They write about their favourite films, music and TV programmes.
3. ______________
For many young people, a good homepage is an important part of their image. It says: “This is me! I
have something to, say. These things - and these people - are important in my life.” And these
websites are also an easy way to talk to a lot of different people. That is why teenagers like these
“friends” websites.
4. ______________
But some people are worried that these websites aren’t safe. For example, it is impossible to know
that the information on a homepage is true. Perhaps the 14-year-old girl you talk to online is really a
40-year-old man. So here is some advice.
5. ______________
Keep your webpage private. (Only friends can see a private homepage.) Do not put photos of yourself
on your homepage. Do not meet people that you only know because of the website. And finally,
remember that online friends are fun, but they are not the same as real friends.
VI. Four people have talked about what they have done in their free time so far this week. Answer
the questions below.
Nick: I’ve spent about thirty hours on the Internet so far this week. I’m really into it. I usually go on
about 9.00 in the evening after dinner and homework. I maybe stay on until half past eleven in the
evening when the rest of my family are all in bed.
Mi: I haven’t watched any TV so far this week. I don’t have a television. I hate television - it’s really
bad for you.
Phong: I haven’t written any letters so far this year. Nobody writes letters these days, do they? I
always send e-mails, or cards if it’s a birthday or something personal.
Mai: I don’t know how many books I’ve read so far this year ... too many to count. I’ve read five books
this week. I usually read about four or five a week. I love reading. If I really like a book, I might read it
five or six times.
1. How many hours has Nick spent on the Internet this week?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. When does Nick often go to bed after going on the Net?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Why does Mi hate television?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. How can Phong communicate with others?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. How many books does Mai read a week?
___________________________________________________________________________________
VII. Read the article and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).
Telepathy is the ability to communicate information using your mind. Information is transmitted from
one mind to another using means other than your well-known perceptual senses. Telepathy ranges
from the basic reading of minds to more intense power, such as implanting or disrupting thoughts in
other people’s minds.
There are a few common reasons why someone becomes telepathic. For example, there are those
who are simply born with a sense of knowing. These people talk about seeing spirits. But they tend to
suppress their abilities as children and often lose it as adults. Alternatively, a life-changing event may
open them up to being telepathic and exploring their gift even further.
Also, there are times when a near-death experience or serious accident can also open someone up
and cause a telepathic awakening. And in some cases, hypnosis or healing sessions can help a sixth
sense to awaken. Such sessions help with getting energy flowing and causing a shift in awareness and
consciousness.
1. Telepathy is the ability to communicate information using normal senses. _____
2. Telepathy can be found in several forms. _____
3. People who often talk about seeing spirits may be telepathic. _____
4. Some people may not recognize and develop their telepathic abilities, so they lose these skills.
_____
5. A near-death experience or serious accident can make a person become telepathic. _____
6. Hypnosis may stimulate telepathy. _____
VIII. Read the text, and do the tasks that follow.
A. 1 ______________ We now take tablets, mobile communication and other types of new technology
for granted. We can speak to friends on the other side of the world as if they were in the same room
and see their faces on instant-messaging systems. Space travel is no longer unusual as we explore
Mars and beyond. Medical science has produced new ways of curing disease and helped build robotic
hands. In the last fifty years, technology has changed the world beyond recognition. Leading scientists
believe that technology will continue to change our lives in significant ways. So what can we expect in
the next 20 years or so?
2
B. Firstly, science will continue to change our homes and the world around us. ______________
Scientists believe that technology will be the key in helping us to protect the environment. New
systems will allow cities to become environmentally clean. Resources will be recycled and we will
produce energy that does not pollute the environment.
C. Houses themselves will become ‘smart’ with water, electricity, and doors being controlled via the
internet or our phones. 3 ______________ We already have the technology to control locks, lights and
alarms via phone apps. These will become normal as people use their mobile devices to turn on
heating or air conditioning and check security from miles away for even other countries.
D. We will continue to use technology to communicate. It is likely that broadband will become so
sophisticated that we will be able to project images of our friends like holograms when we talk to
them. Scientists in the USA have already found a way to project 3D images using sensors, mirrors and
video-conferencing pods.
4
______________ But they believe that the technology will eventually be good enough and small
enough for people to use every day and people will be able to project an image of themselves to
wherever they want - a business meeting, for example.
E. Medicine will continue to improve. Doctors will be able to grow skin, bone tissue and even organs
in laboratories to help repair wounds. As scientists understand more about human genes, they will be
able to cure or prevent illnesses by using this knowledge.
F. Of course, everyone is impressed by these developments. 5 ______________ In fact, many people
believe that science should only be used to prevent hunger, war and disease, and the money spent on
computers, space exploration and weapons should be used to improve the world as it is now.
Task 1. Read the text, and choose the correct title.
a. Famous Inventions
b. Man and the Planet - What’s Next?
c. Science in the Future: Discoveries
Task 2. Complete the text with the following sentences.
a. We will no longer need to be physically present to control what happens in our homes.
b. Some people would prefer technology to be used differently.
c. Of course at the moment the equipment is large and inconvenient.
d. These changes will make life easier for people but will offer other advantages, too.
e. It is hard to believe that only a few years ago computers were not an everyday part of life.
Task 3. Read the text again, and answer the questions.
1. Where has space exploration taken us?
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. What kind of energy will we produce?
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. How will we control the locks and lights in our homes?
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. What can American scientists already do?
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. Why will skin and bone grown in a laboratory help people?
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. Why do some people disagree with space exploration?
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
Task 4. Find words in the text to match definitions 1-4.
1. important (paragraph A) _________________
2. clever and complex (paragraph D) _________________
3. damage to a part of the body (paragraph E) _________________
4. searching for and finding out about a place (paragraph F) _________________
IX. Read the article and decide whether each sentence is true (T) or false (F).
Think before you act online
Sometimes what we post on our favourite social networks can have consequences we didn’t expect.
One weekend, 20-year-old James Miller posted on his Facebook page that his job was ‘so boring’.
When he got to work on Monday, his boss told him to clear his desk and get out. He gave him a letter,
too. It said: ‘After reading your comments on Facebook about our company, we understand you are
not happy with your work. We think it is better for you to look for something that you will find more
interesting.’
A few years ago, a girl’s birthday party turned into a nightmare. Fifteen-year-old Cathy posted an
invitation to her birthday party online. She posted her address, too. When her parents got back home
from the cinema that evening, they couldn’t believe their eyes. There were 500 people at the party,
and some of them were smashing windows, breaking potted plants and making a total mess of the
house.
Most teens think they know everything about social media, and that things like this could never
happen to them. A study shows that last year alone, more than three million young people worldwide
got into trouble with their online activities.
Here are some important tips. None of them can guarantee 100% Internet security, but all of them
will help you to be safer online.
Rule 1: Share with care!
Not everyone will like what you write on Facebook or Twitter. Think before you post something. You
can never completely control who sees your profile, your texts, your pictures, or your videos. Before
clicking ‘post’, everyone should ask themselves two questions: ‘How will I feel if my family or teachers
see this?’ and ‘How might this post be bad for me in three, five or ten years from now?’
Rule 2: Be polite when you write!
Imagine someone is unfriendly in real life. You don’t like it. The same is true of online communication.
Politeness matters, and anyone can be polite. No one likes it when you ‘shout’ in your messages.
Don’t use all capitals! If you feel angry or frustrated while you’re writing a message, wait a bit. Read it
again later and then send it.
Rule 3: Protect and respect!
Don’t share your passwords with anyone. Don’t post your home or email address online. Beware of
‘cyberbullying’ - don’t forward rumours about other people, and don’t say negative things about
them. If you get messages like that or see them online, talk to an adult you know.
_____
1. James Miller did not think before he wrote a post and so he lost his job. _____
2. His boss apologised for giving James work that wasn’t very interesting. _____
3. Cathy’s birthday party ended in disaster because her parents went out that evening. _____
4. A study from last year shows a lot of teens had problems because of their behaviour on the web.
_____
5. The writer of the article thinks that you can’t make everyone happy with your posts. _____
6. He says that before writing a post you should think of reactions you might get. _____
7. He thinks that we need to be as friendly online as we are in real life. _____
8. He says that posting things when you’re unhappy is a good way to feel better. _____
X. Read the text and do the tasks that follow.
Communication through history
 _____________________
Cave paintings are the oldest pictures. Some of them, for example the beautiful images in the caves of
Altamira in the north of Spain, are almost 30,000 years old. Many of these paintings show animals or
hunting scenes. The images do not have written words. But when we look at them, we get an idea of
the emotions the people felt when drawing them. The paintings tell stories of hopes and fears. They
are an early form of communication.
 _____________________
Sometime between 4000 and 3000 BC, people in Egypt and Mesopotamia developed the skill of
writing. They engraved text on stone tablets first. But it was impossible to carry stones from place to
place. The invention of papyrus allowed documents to be moved easily. Writing on papyrus made it
easier to correct mistakes too. And do you know how they did that? When a scribe - the person who
wrote the documents - made a mistake, they licked the ink off the papyrus before it got dry and made
their corrections.
 _____________________
People made the first books from papyrus and from thin animal skins. Paper was invented in China as
early as 105 AD. The quality of paper soon became very good. The world’s oldest known printed book
is from China too. It was published on May 11, 868 AD. In Europe, books were written manually until
the middle of the 15th century when Johannes Guttenberg invented the printing press in Germany.
Since that time, almost 140 million books have been published worldwide. For many people, one of
life’s greatest pleasures is spending a few hours in a bookshop browsing through the books.
 _____________________
Books will be around for many years. But some people prefer reading e-books. They are easier to take
with you when you travel, and you can download them instantly from the Internet. Now you can buy
your books whenever you want without having to leave the comfort of your home.
Task 1. Match the paragraph headings with the paragraphs. There are two extra headings you do
not need.
A. The invention of books by Gutenberg
B. Early forms of written communication
C. Books in their most modem form
D. From stone tablets to the printing press
E. Communication without reading and writing
F. The history of book making
Task 2. Find words or phrases in the text with the following meaning.
1. _____________________ (paragraph 1) a large hole underground
2. _____________________ (paragraph 1) happiness, love and anger
3. _____________________ (paragraph 2) cut words into stone
4. _____________________ (paragraph 2) paper made from plants
5. _____________________ (paragraph 2) moved the tongue across something
6. _____________________ (paragraph 3) produced (and sold) a book
7. _____________________ (paragraph 3) a machine to make newspapers, books or magazine
8. _____________________ (paragraph 3) looking through a book or magazine very quickly, without
reading everything
XI. Read the text, and do the following tasks.
Mind-blowing facts about modern communication
The Internet holds about 5 million terabytes of data. That’s about the same as 1 million human brains.
According to experts, there are about 2 billion Internet users in the world. 70% of people in developed
countries go online, but only 20% of people in developing countries can access to the Internet.
The average Internet user has 25 online accounts and logs in 8 times a day. 30% of Internet users have
just 1 password for all their online accounts, and the most common password is “password1”. About
55% of users choose words which have some personal meaning, and 15% write down both their
password and username.
Many people use Wi-Fi hotspots in public places, such as café, airports and hotels. 46% of them are
worried about viruses and hackers. Many people type in personal information while using public Wi-
Fi: 22% regularly type in email passwords, 21% log onto Facebook and 8% do online banking, but they
are unaware about how to be totally secure.
The first computer virus appeared in 1981. The first virus to affect mobile phones appeared in 2005.
And the first anti-virus software came out in 1990. There are now about 6,000 new computer viruses
every month.
87% of Internet users go online with their smartphone at least once a day. About 80% keep their
smartphone turned on 24-7 and 23% use it during mealtimes.
500,000,000 people in the world have a Facebook account - that’s about one in every 13 people. The
average user has 130 “friends”, and 48% of adults check their Facebook page as soon as they wake up
in the morning. Every 20 minutes, Facebook users around the world upload 2,716,000 photos.
Note: mind-blowing (adj) = extremely exciting or surprising (làm cho mê mẩn, sửng sờ)
Task 1. Choose the best answers.
1. How many Internet users are there in the world?
A. half a billion B. one billion C. two billion
2. How many new computer viruses are there every month?
A. 60 B. 600 C. 6,000
3. How many people in the world have a Facebook account?
A. 500,000 B. 5,000,000 C. 500,000,000
Task 2. Match the sentence halves.
1. One in five people _______ A. have their phone on all day, every day
2. About one third of people _______ B. have a Facebook account.
3. 22 percent of people _______ C. use their mobile phones while they’re eating a meal.
4. In 2005, _______ D. have access to the Internet in developing countries.
5. 500 million people _______ E. type in their email password on a public computer.
6. Four in five people _______ F. the first mobile phone virus appeared.
7. 23 percent of people _______ G. have only one password for all their online accounts.
Task 3. Match a word / phrase from the text with its definition.
1. access to the Internet _______ A. a programme that inserts itself into a computer system
and damage the operation of the computer
2. Internet user _______ B. a secret word that you must type in order to use a
computer system
3. online account _______ C. a programme used to protect the main memory of a
 computer against a virus
4. password _______ D. an arrangement that a person has with a company to
allow him to use the Internet
5. username _______ E. the range of a wireless (Wi-Fi) network
6. Wi-Fi hotspots _______ F. the chance or right to use the Internet
7. hacker _______ G. a person using a computer to change information stored
on another computer
8. virus _______ H. copy programmes or information to the Internet
9. anti-virus software _______ I. a person that uses the Internet
10. upload _______ J. a name that you need to type in together with a password
before you are allow to use the computer or the Internet

E. Speaking
• Everyday English
I. Choose the correct response. Then practise the short exchanges in pairs.
1. A: I think we’ll communicate in the B: a/ No, we communicate with the network.
cyberworld. b/ Yes, the internet is very useful.
2. A: How can you keep in touch with a friend B: a/ I watched him in a TV show.
who lives far away? b/ I use the internet to chat or send email.
3. A: Do we have social contact in the future? B: a/ I think it’s still with us.
b/ That’s awesome.
4. A: Can we send a message with flowers? B: a/ Yes, flowers are colourful.
b/ Yes, it has the colour language.
5. A: People in China don’t speak much English. B: a/ Let’s learn some basic Chinese phrases
How about our stay there? b/ Don’t be shy to share your feelings.
6. A: Should we buy some flowers to B: a/ Do you know the meaning of messages
congratulate him? from flowers?
b/ OK. But not red roses, they’re for lovers.
7. A: Everyone stays at home because of the B: a/ We’ll have a video conference.
pandemic. How about the meeting? b/ We’ll send emails to everyone.
8. A: Do you think the landline phone will B: a/ I don’t think so. It’s still very useful.
 disappear? b/ I hope so. Many offices use it now.
9. A: Can we use the body language to B: a/ Certainly. We can communicate non-
communicate our feelings with others? verbally with animals.
b/ Of course, you can. But it depends on culture.
10. A: Can I call Americans by their first names? B: a/ I think you should have their permission.
b/ It shows respect for other people.
• Talking about the advantages and disadvantages of a way of
communicating
II. Complete the dialogue with the phrases below. There is one extra that you do not need.
A. not only useful for students but also for teachers
B. prefer using a phone to going through pages of a book
C. offers a variety of entertainment for all ages
D. an effective way to teach difficult things
E. in biology, chemistry, physics and so on
F. search for useful content and learn from educational videos
Phong: I think smartphones are very useful. They help students to prepare for their study. They are
1
used _________________________________________ because a mobile phone has fast
capabilities.
Nick: I think so. Smartphones can make learning easy because one can 2_____________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Phong: Students are more confident in learning with smartphones because students 3 _____________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Nick: Do you know that smartphones are 4 ______________________________________________?
One can solve their doubt just by a click.
Phong: With a lot of apps on smartphones, we can make smart use of smartphones. With the audio
5
and videos in a smartphone, learning becomes more fun and lively. So, it’s
________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
III. Here is the presentation on the advantages and disadvantages of Skype - a Microsoft
application. Complete the presentation with the supporting ideas given below.
A. Its services help users hold discussions, show presentations, stay in touch with friends, families and
even use Skype for business purposes.
B. It can make some people become addicted. They may avoid face-to-face conversations, travelling
to school, and skip physical activity.
C. With the apps available on the webs, users can chat, call, have video conferences, hold interviews,
join meetings with Skype.
D. But if you want to call or text on mobile devices, you have to pay a monthly subscription or use
Skype Credit.
E. Microsoft has paid a big sum of money every year to upgrade its security, stability and add new
features.
F. We can use Skype with any devices, such as computers, tablets, or smartphones.
G. Besides that, they lack security features to stop cyberbullying and the spreading of illegal files.
Skype
Advantages of Skype
Skype is easy to install and works across any boundaries. We can use it on Windows, Android, Linux or
iOS.
1. _________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. _________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Users don’t have to pay to create an account and we can use Skype for free.
3. _________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Its technology allows a variety of communication types, including HD audio and video Skype calls,
Skype groups for chatting, audio and video calling or recording Skype meeting calls.
4. _________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Disadvantages of Skype
Skype communicates via the Internet, so data traffic can be hacked.
5. _________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Skype may be a poor choice for children and young teenagers.
Skype offers free services.
6. _________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Skype allows users to text, audio call or video chat with up to 100 users at the same time.
7. _________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
• Interrupting politely
IV. Read the expressions below and mark each expression I (introduce the interruption), A (approve
the interruption) or R (reject the interruption). Then write them in the correct categories.
1. Would you please let me finish? ___________
2. No problem ___________
3. It’s OK. ___________
4. I’m sorry for interrupting, but... ___________
5. Sorry to butt in, but... ___________
6. Sorry, I’d like to finish the thought. ___________
7. Excuse me, but I’d like to mention something. ___________
8. Please, go ahead. ___________
9. Excuse me, but I haven’t finished yet. ___________
10. Of course, what do you think? ___________
11. Hang on a minute, will you? ___________
12. Sure, what’s your opinion? ___________
13. May I say something? ___________
14. Can I add something here, please? ___________
15. May I continue, please? ___________
Introduce your interruption:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
How to approve someone’s interruption:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
How to reject interruption:
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________

F. Writing
• Writing a paragraph to describe a way of modern communication
Write the answers to the questions using the cues given below.
What is telepathy?
1. telepathy / ability / communicate thoughts or ideas / not by / five human senses
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. one person / be thinking / sending / a thought I another person I the other person / pick up / feel /
same thought
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Why do we use telepathy?
3. telepathy / help us / when / we / not know / what to say / how to say it
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. we / not want / talk / the phone / but / we / still want / say / what / our heart
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Benefits of telepathy
5. telepathy / help / us feel / calm / concentrated / difficult times
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. telepathy / a great tool / between / friends / partners
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. we / use telepathy / maintain relationships / someone / we / not hear of / for a long time
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Negative effects of telepathy
8. with telepathy / we / give / receive / so much information / so / we / be aware / the limit
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
9. if / we / sad / upset / we / not want / receive telepathic messages
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST (UNIT 10)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. carrier B. tablet C. telepathy D. webcam
2. A. emoji B. smartphone C. social D. holography
3. A. conference B. network C. text D. telepathy
4. A. pigeon B. message C. holography D. advantage
5. A. transmit B. translation C. message D. possessive
II. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others.
6. A. charity B. reality C. quality D. density
7. A. curiosity B. personality C. community D. university
8. A. additive B. positive C. primitive D. possessive
9. A. nationality B. mobility C. equality D. majority
10. A. transitive B. effective C. positive D. sensitive
III. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
11. A study shows that teenagers use text messaging to communicate with their friends more than
_____________.
A. to send email B. to write letters C. emailing D. texting
12. The _____________ communication services, along with chat rooms, continue to be an important
part of children’s online interactions.
A. online B. offline C. direct D. phone
13. Email _____________ are often necessary to join social networking sites, online games, and
virtual worlds.
A. address B. information C. senders D. accounts
14. Email, and chat rooms let children _____________ with friends and family members.
A. talk B. say C. speak D. communicate
15. We have _____________ data transmission in our system.
A. high point B. high-speed C. high-powered D. high-top
16. Luckily, there are many communication techniques to help overcome _____________.
A. foreign languages B. culture shocks C. language barriers D. sound barriers
17. A non-native speaker most likely can recognize the ____________ - the non-verbal
communication.
A. second language B. official language C. sign language D. body language
18. Internet _____________ via broadband offers many advantages.
A. relation B. connection C. connectivity D. link
19. Seven of 10 people prefer face-to-face _____________ when having a date.
A. code B. sign C. language D. contact
20. We should not _____________ passwords with anyone.
A. share B. send C. bring D. lend
IV. Complete the text with the words below. There are three extra words that you do not need.
download homepage website cyber-bullying download
online posted surf view online
I’ve stopped going on social networks now because I was suffering from 21 _____________. Somebody
22
was posting aggressive comments on my homepage. I’ve never _____________ a nasty comment
on anybody’s 23 _____________, and I don’t have any enemies so I think it was a stranger. I don’t like
24
the idea that a stranger can _____________ my photos or my personal information. Now, I prefer
to keep in touch with my friends by phone. If I want my friends to see photos or videos, I don’t need
to post them 25 _____________. I can send them on my phone by using the mobile application - Viber.
V. Complete the sentences with the prepositions below.
until during after before on
between at through from in
26. I waited _____________ nine o’clock and then went home.
27. If you come _____________ seven, we’ll catch the bus that leaves at 7.05.
28. Will you come and see me _____________ a week or two?
29. _____________ the children left, the house was very quiet.
30. _____________ the holidays, we played football and did a lot of swimming.
31. I can’t remember when we left the cinema: I think it was _____________ ten and half past ten.
32. My grandmother was ill _____________ January to March.
33. We worked all _____________ the holidays to finish painting the walls.
34. I saw them _____________ the station.
35. There was a picture _____________ the wall.
VI. Complete the sentences with the correct possessive adjectives or possessive pronouns.
36. Tom lost _____________ pen. Will you please lend him _____________?
37. I was on time for _____________ class, but Helen was late for _____________.
38. I found _____________ notebook, but John couldn’t find _____________.
39. I left _____________ pen at home. May I borrow _____________ for a moment?
40. He drives to work in _____________ car, and she drives to work in _____________.
41. I have a holiday in Ha Long Bay, and Susan has _____________ in Hue.
42. We were late for _____________ class, and Mai and Lan were also late for _____________.
43. They have _____________ ideas on such matters, and we also have _____________.
44. I borrow money from all _____________ friends, but Jane refused to borrow any money from
_____________.
45. We have a television set in _____________ bedroom, and the boys have another set in
_____________.
VII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
E-mail, and chat rooms let children communicate 46 _____________ friends and family members. They
47
can also allow children to connect with people that they have never _____________ in person.
48
Knowing a little about each of these communication services can help parents _____________
children safer while online.
49
Through e-mail, _____________ can easily send and receive messages. These messages may also
50
have text, audio, and picture files attached. Signing up for an e-mail account is simple
_____________ most services offer them for free. Sometimes these messages contain viruses, or
other inappropriate content, so parents should 51 _____________ children to be wary of e-mails from
52
_____________ people.
53
Chat rooms are online hang-out spots where anyone can talk about _____________ - current
54
events, books, and _____________ common interests. Users often do not know each other in real
life, so it is important that parents keep a close eye on the content of any 55 _____________.
46. A. to B. with C. for D. through
47. A. met B. gone C. asked D. called
48. A. save B. protect C. surround D. keep
49. A. receivers B. messengers C. users D. partners
50. A. due to B. because C. because of D. so
51. A. understand B. recognise C. warn D. suggest
52. A. known B. well-known C. unknown D. unpopular
53. A. every B. something C. nothing D. anything
54. A. other B. others C. the other D. the others
55. A. conversations B. meetings C. letters D. users
VIII. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true), F (false), or NM (not mentioned).
Nowadays, several new words have already become part of the new vocabulary, and some words
have disappeared. In writing, gender-neutral words have been encouraged, such as firefighter, police
officer or chairperson to replace the words like fireman, policeman and chairman.
In space exploration, humans try to land on Mars and set up accommodation there, and it takes seven
months to visit the Red Planet. If we could establish colonies on Mars, contact between the people
living on the Earth and the people living on Mars could be interrupted for some decades, so
differences between languages would begin. It’s likely the differences between British English and
American English.
Emojis might be the most important representation of modem communication. On Facebook
Messenger, for instance, it’s possible to set a favourite emoji so that you never have to reply with
anything else. However, the use of emojis in communication is limited by several factors, like the
absence of grammatical rules and inability to express any feeling.
Emojis aren’t the first-time humans have tried to shorten language. The first was telegrams using the
minimum number of content words and removing the functional ones.
56. Vocabulary tends not to mention sexes. _____
57. The people living on Mars have their own language. _____
58. Humans might tiy to establish accommodation on Mars in the future. _____
59. Some differences in language may appear because of the issue of long distances between the
Earth and colonies on other planets in the future.
_____
60. There are some differences between British English and American English nowadays. _____
61. Emojis are the most popular type in modem communication. _____
62. Facebook Messenger offers you a wide range of emojis to reply to any message. _____
63. The absence of grammatical rules makes emojis the best in communication. _____
64. Emojis are the first type of shortened languages. _____
65. Emojis use the minimum number of content words and remove the functional ones. _____
IX. Rearrange the sentences in order to make a meaningful conversation, writing the number (66-
70) in each blank. Number 0 has been done for you. Then practise it with your classmate.
_____ A. Nick: When a student stays at home for illnesses, that student can have lessons through the
Skype platform.
_____ B. Nick: Besides language learning, we can have virtual field trips by using Skype to take
students to another country or area.
__0__ C. Phuc: Hi, Nick. I think it’s a good idea to use Skype in our classroom. Can we present it in the
next meeting?
_____ D. Phuc: I agree with you. Skype can be used to set up short communication sessions with
native speakers to improve listening skills and oral communication.
_____ E. Phuc: It sounds very interesting. I like travelling very much. Teachers can offer help with
homework, or give extra lessons to students through Skype.
_____ F. Nick: Great, Phuc. Teachers and students can benefit from Skype in the classroom, for
example foreign language learning.
X. Write sentences about advantages and disadvantages of video conferencing, using the cues given
below.
Advantages of a video conference
71. nowadays / schools / organise / teaching training, academic conferences and online lessons /
deliver them / audio and video streaming
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
72. teachers / interact / participants / the other side
___________________________________________________________________________________
73. they / save time / keep resources / future use
___________________________________________________________________________________
74. with / video conference / students / enjoy learning / their homes / any place
___________________________________________________________________________________
75. video conferences / allow I participants I record I save lessons I and I this / be convenient I absent
students
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
76. it / also allow / schools / hold Parents-Teacher meetings / anytime / anywhere
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Disadvantages of a video conference
77. it / lack / personal interaction I because I participants / not use body language / facial expressions
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
78. a live lesson / be affected / technical problems / hardware, software or network failure
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
79. video conferencing system / often / have / a certain limit / the number / participants
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
80. we / need / invest / the quality / devices / Internet connections
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 UNIT 11.
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
A. Pronunciation
• Sentence stress
Read the sentences and underline the words or syllables that receive the stress.
Example: I won’t get a job unless I study hard.
1. There have been significant computer developments during the last decade.
2. Is hard work the key to success? - Yes, it is.
3. Will the new system be a great benefit to the company? - Yes, it will.
4. I met an old friend by chance on the train.
5. Researchers have found links between stress and heart disease.
6. The labs use advanced technology to study the function of various body parts.
7. Are there any limits of our scientific knowledge?
8. Does the whole system require enormous amounts of energy? - No, it doesn’t.

B. Vocabulary
• Science and technology in the future
I. Fill in the blanks with the correct words matching with the verbs. Maybe some words can be used
more than once.
an answer hardware a design a gadget
a game a tool a technology an instrument
a graph employment understanding a machine
an evidence a mystery a website a secret
1. invent: _______________________________________________________________________
2. discover: _______________________________________________________________________
3. create: _______________________________________________________________________
4. develop: _______________________________________________________________________
II. Complete the sentences with the words given.
robots connection eye-tracking breakout online
experiment recognition fingertips face-to-face interact
1. Face ____________ is becoming more and more accurate.
2. It is interesting at parties to see how people ____________ socially.
3. Industrial ____________ are replacing people.
4. ____________ rooms are useful in an online training session to enable practice in small groups.
5. We have spoken on the phone but never ____________.
6. You need a fast Internet ____________.
7. Click on this link to visit our ____________ bookstore.
8. ____________ studies have shown that users rarely look at display advertisements on web pages.
9. In the second ____________ they obtained a very clear result.
10. The police have taken ____________ from every man in the neighborhood.
III. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs given.
interact motivate take discover create
concentrate scan develop invent mark
1. Scientists have ____________ how to predict an earthquake.
2. I am going to ____________ on my writing for a while.
3. Teachers often spend a lot of time ____________ exam papers.
4. He does not ____________ well with the other students.
5. I wish someone would ____________ an everlasting light bulb.
6. He is looking for a job which will allow him to ____________ his talents.
7. He ____________ a wonderful meal from very few ingredients yesterday.
8. The police questioned Jack and ____________ his fingerprints.
9. I’ll ____________ the article into the computer.
10. Teaching is all about ____________ people to learn.
IV. Use the correct form of the words given to complete the sentences.
1. Some types of computer games can be ____________. (educate)
2. Smartphones can vary from day to day due to new ____________ by different companies in the
world. (invent)
3. The ____________ of a nuclear power plant costs a lot of money. (construct)
4. Space ____________ brings about many benefits to science. (explore)
5. Life is become easy and ____________ through science and technology. (comfort)
6. Nuclear waste is ____________ for both humans and the environment. (harm)
V. Complete the gaps in the text with the words given.
technology skills impact thinking applications
intelligence teenagers science career predictions
What is Artificial Intelligence?
1
Artificial Intelligence (Al) is a branch of computer ____________ that deals with the ability of
2
computers to behave like humans. To act like a human, computers should have human
____________ which involves perception, decision-making, and problem-solving. Machines are
trained in such a way that they can recognise patterns and make 3 ____________.
Why is Al important to teenagers?
Teenagers need different 4 ____________ at different stages in their life. From the age of 7 to about
5
15 years old, children’s logical ____________ and reasoning power will develop. This is the right
stage where parents should help them learn the applications of Al which prepare them to use the
6
____________ in a better way. Teaching Al will help 7 ____________ develop their critical thinking
skills and also provide 8 ____________ preparation.
Real-life example of Al
9 10
Every day, Al has a(n) ____________ on our lives. We are using devices or ____________ that
work as a result of Al, like Google Maps for Navigating, Apple’s Siri, ChatGPT, self-driving cars or smart
homes.
• Prepositions
VI. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. Jane’s teacher says that she interacts well ____________ the other children.
2. We’ve got some good news ____________ you. You’re getting a scholarship.
3. Her grandfather had planted both trees in front ____________ the house.
4. Her mum always comments ____________ what she is wearing.
5. The government will provide poorer families ____________ good social services.
6. Reports are coming in ____________ satellite.
7. She was concentrating ____________ her book and his voice surprised her.
8. He is the creator ____________ a successful cartoon series.
9. I think his career is more important ____________ him than I am.
10. It was time to put their suggestion ____________ practice.

C. Grammar
• Reported speech (statements)
I. Choose the correct words.
1. “I’m 15.”  She said she is / was 15.
2. “We’re chatting.”  They told us they have been / were chatting.
3. “You didn’t tell the truth.”  He said I not to tell / hadn’t told the truth.
4. “I’ve told a lie.”  She said she had told / told a lie
5. “I won’t feel guilty, Jack.”  I said / told Jack I wouldn’t feel guilty.
6. “I won’t do it again.”  He said he won’t / wouldn’t do it again.
II. Complete these exchanges with the correct form of say or tell.
1. “What did the doctor ____________ to you earlier?” - “He ____________ me that I would get
better soon.”
2. “Did we ____________ you about our expedition to the mountains?” - “No, you ____________ that
you would talk to us about it later. ”
3. “Nick ____________ that he would stay at home today.” - “That’s strange. He ____________ me
that he was going out.”
4. “Jane ____________ that she could call you this evening.” - “Yes, she wants to ____________ me
about the school trip.”
5. “Have I ____________ you about my trip to Hoi An?” - “Yes, you ____________ that it was
wonderful.”
III. Complete the reported statements.
1. “I don’t have to go.”
 Tom said that he ____________ go.
2. “He’s telling a lie.”
 I told you that he ____________ a lie.
3. “We’ll help you.”
 They said that they ____________ help us.
4. “It rained all day.”
 Dad said that it ____________ all day.
5. “I’ve been to Italy.”
 He told me that he ____________ to Italy.
6. “You don’t look well.”
 Linda said that I ____________ well.
7. “I can’t do it in time.”
 Nick told me that he ____________ in time.
8. “Tim isn’t coming bowling with us.”
 Kevin told me that Tim ____________ bowling with us.
IV. Write the sentences in reported speech.
1. “I ate too much yesterday.”
 Helen said ______________________________________________________________________.
2. “I’ll call you next week.”
 He told his grandmother ___________________________________________________________.
3. “We can stay out late tonight.”
 They said _______________________________________________________________________.
4. “I don’t like Chinese food.”
 She said ________________________________________________________________________.
5. “I’m going home.”
 She told us ______________________________________________________________________.
6. “I work in a hospital.”
 She said ________________________________________________________________________.
7. “I’m busy tomorrow.”
 Phong said ______________________________________________________________________.
8. “We’ve finished our homework.”
 They told me ____________________________________________________________________.
V. Rewrite the sentences using reported speech.
1. The man said, “I don’t feel guilty.”
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. My brother said to me, “You’re making a big mistake.”
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. The teacher said, “Some students didn’t do much revision.”
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. Mary said, “I’ve never told a lie.”
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. Sam’s father said to him, “You must stay at home.”
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. The children said, “Our teacher can be quite strict.”
__________________________________________________________________________________
7. His friends said to him, “We’ve already seen that film.”
__________________________________________________________________________________
8. John said, “I’ll report my neighbour to the police for making very loud noise at night.”
__________________________________________________________________________________
VI. Change the sentences into reported speech.
1. The scientist: “Cloning will become more popular in the next century.”
 The scientist said that _____________________________________________________________.
2. Dr. Nelson: “Every home will have at least one robot to perform any boring task.”
 Dr. Nelson said that _______________________________________________________________.
3. Our teacher: “Parents do not allow children to play computer games for a long period of time.”
 Our teacher told us that ___________________________________________________________.
4. The doctor: “Nutrition pills can cause serious side effects.”
 The doctor told his patient that _____________________________________________________.
5. The physicist: “Nuclear power plants don’t require a lot of space.”
 The physicist said that _____________________________________________________________.
6. The politician: “Wrong decisions in Chernobyl caused a big nuclear explosion.”
 The politician told the audience that __________________________________________________.
VII. Read the conversation between Duong and Chau, and then report what Chau told her friend,
using reported speech.
Duong: You know, Alexander Graham Bell invented the telephone in 1876.
Chau: Many people think that the real inventor of the telephone was Antonio Meucci, a poor Italian
American.
Duong: Really? How could he do that?
Chau: He shared a workshop with Bell in the 1860s, and made a “talking telegraph” for his wife, who
was ill in bed.
Duong: Why didn’t Meucci become the inventor?
Chau: He didn’t become the inventor because he never took his idea to the US Patent Office.
Duong: Why not?
Chau: He was too poor to pay the $250 that he needed.
Duong: But Alexander Graham Bell is considered the inventor of the telephone, isn’t he?
Chau: Alexander Graham Bell took the invention to the Patent Office, and became the inventor.
1. Chau said that _____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. She said that ______________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. _________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. _________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. _________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________

D. Reading
I. Read the magazine guide. Put each phrase in the correct place. There is one phrase that you do
not need.
A. I like to know where I am
B. I’m terrible at doing mathematical calculations
C. I have on my phone
D. I prefer the simple ones
E. I want to know what other people think
F. I use most while I’m travelling
Essential Travel Apps
The most useful apps on my phone are travel apps. Here’s a quick guide to the top five apps you
should have on your phone.
It’s essential to know what the weather is going to be like at your destination, so you have to install a
weather app. There are many apps available, but 1 __________ that give you a detailed forecast for
today and a general forecast for the week ahead.
2
__________ so I always check my currency converter app to give me up-to-date exchange rates. It’s
very useful for shopping or for checking how much you are really paying to visit a monument.
3
Some people enjoy getting lost on holiday, but __________. My map app is probably the app
4
__________. Apart from showing your current location, it can show you how to get somewhere, or
which shops and restaurants are nearby.
And while we’re talking about restaurants, don’t forget to install a review app. 5 __________ before I
walk into a restaurant. Many of these apps also provide a reservation service.
Finally, if your airline has an app, put it on your phone. You can keep your boarding cards on your
phone and keep up-to-date with any changes or delays to your flight. Enjoy your trip.
II. Read the passage about a smart home, and do the tasks that follow.
A Home of the Future
Dr. Michiko Ishiguru describes a typical day at her smart home in Tokyo.
7.00 I wake up. The lights are on and I can hear my favourite music. The curtains open
automatically, too. It is cold outside but my bedroom is warm.
7.05 I get up and go to the bathroom. I watch the TV in my intelligent shower - it knows my
favourite water temperature.
7.20 My mother and I have breakfast. We have fruit - my intelligent fridge orders food from the
Internet. It knows when we need food, like milk or fruit.
7.45 I programme my vacuum cleaner, Homebot, to clean the floor. I put tonight’s dinner in the
intelligent oven. I can check the dinner with my mobile phone.
8.00 I go out. I go to work in my PIVO 2 car - it talks and gives me traffic information. My mother
stays with Wakamaru, our intelligent robot. It looks after her and phones me when she is not
well.
18.00 I get back home. I ride my exercise bike - it has got a computer. I can choose different routes
and today I go cycling in the Alps!
19.00 Dinner is ready in the intelligent oven. Great!
20.00 We watch a film on the home cinema in the living room.
23.30 I go to bed and read an e-book. Then I go to bed.
Task 1. Match the machines (1-7) with the descriptions (A-H). There is one extra description. Write
the answer in each blank.
1. Wakamaru domestic robot _____ A. cleans the floor
2. intelligent oven _____ B. looks after animals
 3. exercise bike with computer _____ C. orders food on the Internet
4. PIVO 2 car _____ D. controls the temperature of the water and has a TV
5. Homebot _____ E. cooks dinner automatically
6. intelligent shower _____ F. you can do exercise on it
7. intelligent fridge _____ G. talks to the driver
_____ H. looks after old people
Task 2. Read the passage again, and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).
1. The intelligent shower can show TV programmes and choose Michiko’s favourite water
temperature.
_____

2. The intelligent fridge asks Michiko and orders food from the Internet. _____
3. Her PIVO 2 car drives Michiko to work, and she only sits in her car. _____
4. Wakamaru can look after old people. _____
5. Michiko can do exercise and watch films at home. _____
III. Read the text, and complete the gaps (1-6) with the sentences (A-G). There is one sentence that
you do not need.
A. In 1975, he taught architecture, but he continued to invent puzzles.
B. He did a number of different jobs and then became a journalist in the 1930s.
C. He was born in Budapest in 1944.
D. However, it didn’t work because the ink was very thick.
E. In the 1970s, he worked as an architect and in his spare time he invented a mechanical puzzle.
F. It quickly became popular all over the world.
G. It wasn’t the only thing he invented.
Two Great Inventors
László Biró was born in Budapest in 1899. After he left school, he studied medicine at university, but
he didn’t finish his studies. 1 _____. He noticed that newspaper ink dried very quickly on the paper,
2
and put the ink into his fountain pen. _____. He and his brother Gyorgy then invented a new type
of pen with a small ball at the end. The new pen worked with the thick ink. 3 _____. In 1939, Biró
moved to Paris and then to Argentina. Biró invented many other things but the most important was
the ball-point pen, or “biro”. László Biró died in Buenos Aires in 1985.
Emo Rubik’s father was an engineer and his mother was a poet. 4 _____. After leaving school, he
studied architecture and design at the Technical University. 5 _____. Rubik called it the “Magic Cube”.
6
It soon became popular in Hungary and the rest of Europe. _____. In the early 1980s, the cube
became popular in the USA too, and got a new name: “Rubik’s Cube”. It is the world’s best-selling toy
- some people say there are 300 million cubes in the world. Rubik became very rich and went on to
invent many more games and puzzles.
IV. Read the passage carefully, and then answer the questions below.
Becky Schroeder, Gio-Sheet
Becky was only 10 years old when she was attempting to do homework in her mom's car. As it got
darker outside, she had the idea that there should be a way to make her paper easier to see in the
dark. Becky took matters into her own hands and began playing around with phosphorescent
materials, which emitted light but without heat. She then used phosphorescent paint to cover an
acrylic board and the Glow-Sheet was created.
In 1974, at the age of 12, Becky became the youngest women to be granted a U.S. patent for her Gio-
Sheet invention.
1. What happened while she was doing homework in her mom’s car?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why did Becky have the idea of the Gio-Sheet?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. What did she do to make the first Gio-Sheet?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. What is one advantage of her invention?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. How old was Becky when she became the youngest women to be granted a U.S. patent?
___________________________________________________________________________________
V. Read the text, and do the tasks that follow.
Thomas Suarez is an American teenager and he spends a lot of time on his computer. Why is this
surprising? Because he isn’t playing games or chatting to his friends. In fact, he’s developing and
designing new apps, or writing codes and programmes for smartphone apps. He’s the youngest app
developer in the world.
When he was just 11 years old, Thomas started his own company called CarrotCorp. In 2010, he
released his first app called Earth Fortune. It tells people their horoscope and depending on the
horoscope for a particular day, the colour of the Earth changes. By the age of 15, he had plans and
designs for a 3D printer. His printer will be ten times faster than other 3D printers.
His interest in technology began at an early age when Thomas taught himself to write computer
programmes. Like a lot of schools, Thomas’s school didn’t teach any technology courses. Thomas and
his friends were keen to learn more about writing computer codes and programmes so they decided
to start their own app club after school to design and create games and new apps. The club now
teaches other students and teachers in his school!
Thomas enjoys wearing his smart glasses at home. He also writes reviews for gadgets and he often
gives talks at technology conferences and his passion is obvious. Are you feeling surprised?
Task 1. Choose the best title for the text.
A. How to Make an App
B. A Passion for Technology
C. Phones in the Future
Task 2. Find verbs in the text that match the definitions.
1. to talk to a friend ________________
2. to plan how to make something ________________
3. to create a new product ________________
4. to make a product available to the public for the first time ________________
Task 3. Read the text again, and mark the sentences T (true) or F (false).
1. Thomas Suarez is from the UK. ______
2. Thomas designs and develops apps for smartphones. ______
3. CarrotCorp is the name of Thomas’s company. ______
4. Earth Fortune is the name of another company. ______
5. Thomas is designing a 3D printer. ______
6. Thomas’s teachers taught him how to write computer programmes. ______
7. Thomas hasn’t got any smart glasses. ______
8. Thomas is passionate about technology. ______
VI. Read the text and do the tasks that follow.
Inventions that Changed the World but Were Made by Mistakes
When you think of people who have invented something that has changed the world, you immediately
think of the achievements of some very intelligent scientists. But their success often comes in an
unexpected way. Did you know that the medicine penicillin was discovered because of a mistake? It’s
amazing to think that something that was an accident then became something that the whole world
now uses to stop serious illness.
Here are a few examples of inventions that were made by mistake:
Sticky notes
In 1968, scientist Spencer Silver created a type of glue that would stick to things but could be
removed easily from any surface. He was really trying to create a super-strong glue but failed. Art Fry,
another scientist, was tired of his bookmarks falling out of his books. He remembered Silver’s special
glue and wondered if this might be the answer to his problem. When he tried the glue on his
bookmarks, they stuck and didn’t damage the pages. It worked. It was then that he thought of the
idea of using the glue on notes.
Saccharine
Saccharine was discovered in 1879 by the chemist Constantine Fahlberg while he was working in his
university laboratory. The discovery came because he forgot to wash his hands after spilling a
chemical on them, and when he was eating his bread at lunch it tasted unusually sweet. It was later
produced in huge quantities as an artificial sweetener and is now used in soft drinks to reduce the
sugar and calories.
Penicillin
Scientist Alexander Fleming invented penicillin, which helps stop infection by killing bacteria. He was
on holiday and he had left a petri dish (a special dish used by scientists to grow bacteria) in his
laboratory. When he returned, the dish had an unusual mould on it, but there were no bacteria
growing. He realised that something in the mould was killing the bacteria. He also realised that if you
use this substance on the human body, it stops serious illness. This became the first antibiotic,
penicillin, which has saved millions of people’s lives over the years.
Chocolate chip cookies
In the 1930s, Ruth Wakefield owned a very popular restaurant called the Toll House Inn in the United
States. While making some chocolate cookies, she discovered she had no special baker’s chocolate
left and decided to use some normal chocolate instead. She poured it into the dough, but the
chocolate did not mix with the dough and this was how the chocolate chip cookie was born.
Task 1. Read the text and complete the sentences with one or two words in each space.
1. Silver Spencer was trying to make a glue that was easy to take off and didn’t _________________
the paper or pages it was stuck to.
2. Art Fry found that the glue didn’t make the pages of his books dirty and so was very good for
_________________.
3. Constantine Fahlberg left a chemical on his hands by mistake, and while eating his lunch he found
that his bread tasted unusually _________________.
4. Saccharine is used instead of _________________ to make soft drinks.
5. Alexander Fleming noticed that _________________ weren’t growing around the mould.
6. He realised that the substance could be used to cure _________________.
7. Ruth Wakefield didn’t have the right kind of _________________.
8. The chocolate and dough didn’t _________________ together.
Task 2. Match the words in bold in the text to their meanings.
1. _________________ a mixture made of flour and water used to make bread
2. _________________ a substance used to stick things together
3. _________________ something that grows on old food
4. _________________ an artificial substance that has similar taste to sugar
5. _________________ a room for doing scientific tests
Task 3. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words from Task 2.
1. Diet Cola is the same as normal cola, but it contains a _________________ instead of sugar.
2. Don’t eat that! It’s got _________________ on it.
3. You have to wear special glasses to protect your eyes when working in the _________________.
4. After you’ve made the _________________, put it in the oven.
5. It hasn’t stuck properly. This _________________ isn’t very strong.
VII. Read the text, and mark the sentences T (true), or F (false).
Future Homes
In recent years there have been many predictions about what our houses will be like in the future.
Some experts think we will all live in boxes; others think we may actually live on the moon or another
planet. Two things are clear. We will use power from the sun, wind or sea and computers will control
everything in our lives and especially in our homes.
Every house will have devices to change energy from natural sources into power, and we’ll build
houses that can use this power efficiently. Computers will open and close doors to allow people to
come in and out and they will make sure the house and the people in it are safe.
They will switch on the lights when we go into different rooms or switch on gadgets when we ask
them to. They will know when the fridge is empty and order food automatically. They will even tell us
who has visited the house while we were out and at what times.
Rooms will be smaller than today but furniture like beds, tables and chairs will come out of the floors
and walls when we want to use them. Again, the computer will do this for us.
Some experts predict that computers will control the entire world in the future, so perhaps they
might decide to shut us in our little boxes forever! There’s a thought.
1. We may live on the moon in the future. __________
2. Our energy will all come from oil. __________
3. Our houses will have no doors. __________
4. We will order our shopping on the computer. __________
5. We will sleep on the floors. __________
VIII. Read the text and answer the questions.
Dr. NakaMats
The Japanese love inventing and they are very good at it. But there is one inventor who has invented
more things than anyone else in Japan, and maybe the world. Yoshiro Nakamatsu, or Dr. NakaMats as
he calls himself, has the world record for the most inventions. He has designed over 4,000 new
inventions over the last fifty years or so. He is a celebrity in Japan, and has appeared on TV with his
creations. Although Dr. NakaMats did some early designs for a floppy disk and a digital watch, he is
most well-known for his more unusual inventions.
Some examples of the strange things he has created are: glasses which look like eyes so you can’t
notice them, shoes which have steel springs so that you can jump in them, a pillow which stops you
from falling asleep when you are driving, an aluminum mechanism which lifts up a toilet seat, and
even a one-person plastic car which is powered by water.
How does he come up with these ideas? Apparently, he finds listening to Beethoven helpful. But the
thing that makes him most creative is holding his breath underwater. He dives into his swimming pool
every day and stays underwater as long as he can. He believes that less oxygen in the brain is good for
new ideas. He also dives with a waterproof pencil and rubber notebook which he invented. He needs
to write down his ideas immediately in the water because they disappear quickly.
Dr. NakaMats believes that eating the right food is important for creativity, and he has invented some
snacks that he says are good for your brain. He has also invented an armchair which helps to improve
your brainpower. He sits in his chair every day to give him more good ideas.
1. How many new things has Dr. NakaMats invented?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why is he well-known?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Has he always invented strange things during his life?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. What does he do to help him invent?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. What is his opinion about eating the right food?
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. What has he invented to improve his brainpower?
___________________________________________________________________________________
IX. Read the text about a small, wearable computer, and do the tasks that follow.
New Way To See The Future
Although wearable computing devices are not a completely new idea, one in particular has been
attracting plenty of media attention. The Optical Head Mounted Display (OHMD) is a tiny, wearable
computer attached to what looks like a normal pair of frameless glasses. 1 __________________.
Wearers can receive and reply to messages or phone s calls, ask the device to translate for them, get
information about transport and possible disruptions, ask for directions and be guided to the place
they want to go, take pictures and record videos along the way - all without hardly ever having to take
their hands out of their pockets.
Enthusiasts who have been testing this groundbreaking new technology claim that it enables them to
2
obtain useful information without interrupting their daily lives. __________________. On a more
serious note, the ‘computer glasses’ could provide valuable assistance to disabled people or anybody
with impaired mobility.
As with all new technologies, there are detractions as well. Any device that allows its wearers to
photograph and record people without their consent, or without them being aware of it, raises
questions of intimacy and privacy.
3
__________________. Terrorists could employ the technology to explore the site of their next
attack, while criminals could use it to obtain plans of the next bank they are planning to rob. Apart
from these extreme cases, psychologists warn that there are reasons why we should be a little wary of
devices like these.
4
__________________. Think, for instance, of the ubiquitous MP3 and MP4 players: everywhere we
go, there are people plugged in to their players, oblivious of the world around them. Others have
become so addicted to their mobile phones that they cannot concentrate on face-to-face
conversations without simultaneous checking their messages.
As our wearable computer bombards us with all kinds of data in real time, our brain may experience
information overload, which can lead to stress and anxiety. 5 __________________. Moreover, if we
become too reliant on always being updated about any situation, we run the risk of feeling insecure
and out of control the moment we cannot get this information.
6
For the moment, we needn’t worry too much. __________________. And when they do become
available, will people still be comfortable viewing the world in such a different way? Well, you could
say that remains to be seen.
Task 1. What is the main point the author makes about this technology?
A. It will revolutionize and improve our lives.
B. It’s intrusive and potentially dangerous.
C. It’ll be expensive and only for a small, exclusive minority.
D. It has great potential, but needs to be used with caution.
Task 2. Read the text again, and complete gaps 1-6 with sentences A-G. There is one extra sentence
you do not need to use.
A. Moreover, it gives rise to security concerns as well.
B. It will probably be some time before such devices become readily available to consumers at an
affordable price.
C. The advantages for consumers far outweigh the disadvantages.
D. New technologies that have been devised to enhance the way we experience reality, may end up
cutting us off from real life instead.
E. There are moments when we should just sit back and watch the clouds, without immediately
receiving the latest weather forecast.
F. They also love the fact that it captures great moments with family or friends that might otherwise
have remained unrecorded, because of lack of a camera or mobile phone at hand.
G. The device can be controlled by pressing it or using voice commands.
Task 3. Choose the correct answers.
1. The wearable computer responds to __________________.
A. manual orders only
B. both manual and spoken orders
C. the wearer’s eye movement
2. Which of these is NOT said about the device?
A. It can help you deal with foreign languages.
B. It can take photographs of everything you see.
C. It can protect your eyes from bright light.
3. What do psychologists say about the use of technology?
A. Things that are supposed to improve our lives don’t always do so.
B. People waste a lot of time because they don’t know how to use them.
C. People lose concentration more easily these days.
4. What is meant by ‘information overload’?
A. The information people receive is not uploaded properly.
B. People receive too much unnecessary information.
C. People don’t always receive the latest information.

E. Speaking
• Everyday English
I. Choose the correct response. Then practise the short exchanges in pairs.
1. A: Do you think new technology will make B: a/ Really? I think we’ll become lazy and
many workers jobless? inactive.
b/ I don’t think so. We’ll have many new
industries and new jobs.
2. A: With robots in our house, we become lazy B: a/ Right. We’ll have more free time to get
and inactive. exercise, and play sports.
b/ I agree. I’ll have no robots in my house
3. A: My house has been installed the security B: a/ You’ll feel safer when you are away.
system with cameras.
 b/ New technology will always change.
4. A: Nikola Tesla had crazy ideas. Do you know B: a/ Scientists always have crazy ideas.
him? b/ He invented alternative currents.
5. A: I think the invention of penicillin is very B: a/ I hope so.
important because it saves lives. b/ I agree with you.
6. A: Why do we use the escalator instead of the B: a/ It can move more people.
lift? b/ It’s faster than the lift.
7. A: With Al, computers will be more intelligent B: a/ But we’ll design them.
than humans. b/ Computers will become smaller. Right?
8. A: Thomas Edison was a very famous B: a/ Was the internet popular at his time?
American inventor. b/ Which are his most famous inventions?
9. A: Some scientists made their inventions by B: a/ You bet. It was the result of hard work.
chance. b/ It was the case of penicillin. Is it right?
10. A: Do you know this game was invented by a B: a/ Really? Small children are fond of creating
ten-year-old boy? new things.
b/ Right. Children are taught to become great
inventors at the early age.
• Talking about a technology or an invention
II. Match the responses to the questions and practise the dialogue with your partner.
A. In the 1980s, Honda began to develop humanoid robots. The most famous of Honda’s
humanoid robots was Asimo in 2000.
B. In 2006 in the USA. They were used for delivery and photography.
C. It was the ‘Da Vinci’ surgical robot in 2000. It helped to improve a doctor’s precision.
D. It was the ‘Shakey’ using cameras and sensors. The robot using Al was invented by Stanford
University in 1972.
E. In a competition for self-driving cars in the USA in 2004.
F. I like the invention of robots most.
G. It was ‘Robert the Robot’ for children in the USA in 1954.
H. It was the Unimate, the first industrial robotic arm in 1954.
I. It was the Roomba vacuum cleaning robot in 2002.
1. What invention do you like?
_________________________________________________________________________________
2. What was the first ‘real’ robot?
_________________________________________________________________________________
3. What was the first robot that used Al (Artificial Intelligent)?
_________________________________________________________________________________
4. What was the first toy robot?
_________________________________________________________________________________
5. When did we have the first humanoid robots - resembling the human body in shape?
_________________________________________________________________________________
6. When did we have surgical robots?
_________________________________________________________________________________
7. When were service robots available?
_________________________________________________________________________________
8. When did the first self-driving cars appear?
_________________________________________________________________________________
9. When did we have the first drones - small flying machines?
_________________________________________________________________________________
III. Match the responses to the questions and practise the dialogue with your partner. There is one
extra response that you do not need.
A. It was Eliza. It was created in 1966.
B. It is a large language model created by OpenAI in 2021.
C. It is a free social media platform for sharing photos and videos with your followers.
D. It can be used for a variety of tasks, including conversation generation and language
translation. It can help users create human-like texts based on given input.
E. Yes, it was Siri. It was formed by Apple for iOS in 2010.
F. A chatbot is an Artificial Intelligence programme that chats with you.
G. Yes, it has. Google Now was launched in 2012, and Google Assistant in 2017. It answers
questions, performs requests by using the search engine.
1. What are chatbots?
_________________________________________________________________________________
2. What was the first chatbot?
_________________________________________________________________________________
3. Has Apple introduced any chatbots?
_________________________________________________________________________________
4. How about Google? Has Google ever introduced any chatbots?
_________________________________________________________________________________
5. What is ChatGPT?
_________________________________________________________________________________
6. What are the functions of ChatGPT?
_________________________________________________________________________________
• Giving and responding to good news
IV. Put the following expressions into the correct categories.
- Guess what...!
- I am really pleased to tell / inform you that...
- I have got a bit of good news to tell you...
- Wow! That sounds exciting!
- I have got some great / brilliant / wonderful news for you...
- That’s great. I’m so glad to hear that!
- Fantastic! / Great! / Awesome!
- Lucky you!
- Can you believe it...?
- Really? Are you serious?
- I can’t believe it! It’s great.
- Congratulations.
- I’m so happy for you.
- We’re really happy to inform you that...
- I am really glad to hear that.
- How fantastic/ brilliant / great news is this!
- Wonderful! Thank you for sharing.
- I’m so excited to tell you that...
Giving good news
Formal style Informal style
 _______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
Responding to good news
Formal style
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
Informal style
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________

F. Writing
• Writing an opinion paragraph
I. Write a paragraph about the reasons why you agree or disagree that Al (Artificial Intelligence) will
soon become common, using the cues provided.
Al (Artificial Intelligence)
1. Al / avoid human mistakes / perform repetitive activities very well
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
2. chatbots powered / Al / work on / a lot / data / and / offer service all day
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
3. Al / do / manual / tiring jobs / so / workers / perform more skilled jobs
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
4. Al / raise productivity / reduce / cost / the company
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
5. Al / make correct decisions / it / not depend / opinions
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
6. biggest drawback / using Al / its high costs / development
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
7. Al / make / decisions / without using emotions / so / a lack of creativity
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
8. Al / collect personal information / many people / so / an issue / personal privacy
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
II. Write a paragraph about the topic: Advantages and disadvantages of smartphones, using the
cues given. There are several advantages of smartphones.
1. smartphones / give / users / ability / surf websites / instead of / use a desktop or a laptop
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
2. they / also have applications / help us / create / edit Microsoft office documents
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
3. smartphones / have GPS / help / us / find / the place / we / look for
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
4. with a smartphone / we / have access / any email accounts / Outlook or Gmail / social networks /
Facebook and Twitter
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
However, smartphones have some disadvantages.
5. smartphones / not durable / especially / when / they / not taken / good care of
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
6. it / very expensive / buy smartphones / compared / other phones
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
7. smartphones / only work efficiently / when / there / Internet connection
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
8. you / not depend / smartphones / for all your work / but / you / a computer / do some tasks
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST (UNIT 11)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. convenient B. attendant C. develop D. biometric
2. A. platform B. scanner C. application D. truancy
3. A. discover B. digital C. biometric D. recognition
4. A. convenience B. epidemic C. complaint D. scanner
5. A. application B. suggestion C. invention D. recognition
II. Find one word that does not belong to each group.
6. A. cloning B. genetics C. cyberspace D. life span
7. A. rocket B. spaceship C. astronaut D. ship
8. A. driverless B. computer C. online D. websites
9. A. technician B. scientist C. technologist D. musician
10. A. advantage B. drawback C. benefit D. achievement
III. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
11. Scientists are __________ experiments to test the effectiveness of the new medicine.
A. doing B. making C. bringing D. taking
12. Face __________ is everywhere from social media tagging to airport security cameras.
A. agreement B. information C. realization D. recognition
13. __________ rooms allow you to divide your online meeting into as many as 50 separate sessions.
A. Break-up B. Breakaway C. Breakout D. Break-in
14. I usually have __________ lenses, but I sometimes wear glasses when my eyes are tired.
A. contact B. touch C. communication D. zoom
15. All hand luggage has to be __________ at the airport security.
A. read B. scanned C. watched D. seen
16. The study will be __________ over a six-month period.
A. carried B. carried away C. carried out D. carried on
17. An MRI __________ makes images of the brain, spinal cord and other organs.
A. webcam B. reader C. camera D. scanner
18. The problem can be solved by using __________ teachers because they can teach anywhere and
won’t get stressed or tired.
A. device B. tool C. machine D. robot
19. In 1989, Honda __________ the robot Asimo to work as a bartender.
A. discovered B. developed C. found out D. did
20. We can only find the best solution by __________.
A. experiment B. check C. examination D. test
IV. Complete the text with the words below. There are three extra words that you do not need.
information prints voice fingerprint
pattern keys thumb convenience
What is Biometric Authentication?
You need to open the door of your house, but you do not use a key. Instead, you just place your
21
______________ on a small machine on the wall and click - the door opens. The machine scans your
22
______________, then it matches your print with the one it has stored before. Once the
23
______________ match, the door unlocks. Above is a perfect example of biometric authentication.
Biometric authentication identifies who you are rather than what you have. The technology uses
24
fingerprints, facial features or retina ______________. People can also be verified based on their
25
behavioral characteristics, like their ______________, the way they walk, their gestures or even
their typing speed.
V. Use the correct form of the words given to complete the sentences.
26. Due to the ______________ in the science and technology, impossible things have become
possible. (develop)
27. Robots increase worker ______________ by preventing accidents since humans are not
performing ______________ jobs. (safe - risk)
28. One disadvantage of robots is its high cost for the ______________. (produce)
29. There is no ______________ reason why Japan will not be able to make progress in robotics.
(technology)
30. The key to YouTube’s success is the ______________ for anyone from anywhere in the world to
broadcast themselves for free. (able)
VI. Read the dialogue. Then complete the reported statements and requests.
Tom: 31 I’m worried about my job. 32 I’ve made a big mistake.
Bob: 33 I don’t think you need to worry. 34 Everybody makes mistakes sometimes.
Tom: 35 They won’t want me to work there.
Bob: 36 Don’t say things like that. 37 It can’t be that bad.
Tom: 38 You don’t understand! I did something wrong and I’ve kept quiet about it.
Bob: 39 You’ll tell them the truth on Monday. 40 Our boss has to give you another chance.
Tom said 31 _________________________________________________________________________.
He told Bob 32 _______________________________________________________________________.
Bob 33 _____________________________________________________________________________.
He said that 34 _______________________________________________________________________.
Tom said that 35 _____________________________________________________________________.
Bob told him 36 ______________________________________________________________________.
37
He said
___________________________________________________________________________.
Tom said that Bob 38 __________________________________________________________________.
39
Bob told Tom
______________________________________________________________________.
40
He said
___________________________________________________________________________.
VII. Change the following sentences into reported speech, using the words given in brackets.
41. ‘We are learning more about our universe.’ (Our teacher said)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
42. ‘Scientists have made various applications in long distance communication.’ (Dr. Nelson said)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
43. ‘Science is a good and useful servant, but it is a bad destructive master.’ (Our Chemistry teacher
told us)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
44. ‘Space tourism will broaden our knowledge of space.’ (Our headmaster said)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
45. ‘During the time in Paris in 1946, Uncle Ho attracted several Vietnamese scientists to return to the
country.’ (Our History teacher told us)
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
VIII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
46
Computers are helpful ______________ many ways. First, they are fast. They can work with
information even 47 ______________ quickly than a person. Second, computers can work with a lot of
information at the same time. Third, they can 48 ______________ information for a long time. They do
49
not forget things that the common people do. ______________, computers are almost always
correct. They are not perfect, but they usually do not 50 ______________ mistakes.
Recently, it is important 51 ______________ about computers. There are a number of things to learn.
52 53
Some companies have ______________ at work. In addition, most universities ______________
day and night courses in Computer Science. Another way to learn is from a book, or from a friend.
After a few hours of practice, you can 54 ______________ with computers. You may not be an expert,
but you can have 55 ______________.
46. A. in B. on C.at D. over
47. A. much B. rather C. more D. less
48. A. hold B. carry C. stay D. keep
49. A. However B. Moreover C. Therefore D. Nevertheless
50. A. do B. make C. have D. take
51. A. know B. knowing C. to know D. knew
52. A. classes B. meetings C. schools D. discussions
53. A. send B. offer C. bring D. spend
54. A. use B. make C. work D. take
55. A. fun B. funny C. enjoy D. for fun
IX. Read the article and then decide whether the statements are true (T), false (F) or not mentioned
(NM).
Global Positioning Systems
If you’ve ever said. “I wish I knew where I was going” or “If only there were some ways to find this
address,” then it may be time to consider buying yourself a Global Positioning Systems, or GPS.
Let’s look at some of the uses of GPS devices. Maybe you travel a lot by car and cannot look at a paper
map to find your way around. There is a GPS for cars that speaks to you and tells you exactly how to
get to your destination. Maybe you’re a golfer who has lost his golf ball and you need to find it on the
field. There’s a GPS for this. You’re a runner and want to track your speed, distance, and the courses
you run. Well, there’s a GPS for this, too.
What kinds of GPS devices are there? Well, GPS devices come in all kinds of shapes and sizes, and are
available in a variety of prices. Some are small and can fit into a pocket, and others are waterproof.
And for people who don’t like to carry anything extra with them, GPS systems are also available on
smart phones.
56. GPS is used to find out where you are going. ________
57. GPS cannot replace a paper map. ________
58. GPS can tell you how to get to a place while you are driving. ________
59. A GPS device depends on weather conditions. ________
60. A GPS device can look for a small moving item. ________
61. A GPS device can track your speed, distance but not the directions you run. ________
62. A GPS device can tell you how fit you are while you are running. ________
63. GPS devices can be in all kinds of shapes and sizes. ________
64. You cannot use a GPS device in water. ________
65. There are also GPS devices for smart phones. ________
X. Read the text, and choose the correct answers.
Jane: “I want to design AR video games. I really enjoy these games. They use real-world environments.
The games add fun digital elements to the environment with a smartphone or tablet. For example,
you could be looking at your room through your smart camera. But maybe the game will place a
monster in the room with you! Some AR video games encourage players to walk around their
neighborhood. Players can get some good exercise by playing these kinds of games. These kinds of
games might even help people to be healthier.”
66. What type of games does Jane like?
a. mobile games b. AR games c. environmental games
67. How do people play these games?
a. with phones and tablets b. with a computer c. on a special field
68. What will the game maybe place in the room with you?
a. a real-world environment b. a monster c. a player
69. What do some AR games encourage players to do?
a. sit in their rooms b. play with their friends c. walk in their neighborhood
70. What do some players probably get when playing AR games?
a. a monster b. some exercise c. a new phone
XI. Match the responses to the questions and practise the dialogue with your partner. There is one
extra response that you do not need.
A. January 1, 1983 is considered the official birthday of the Internet with the same standard.
B. It was Tim Berners-Lee.
C. It’s the Internet.
D. It supplies a lot of knowledge and information, and allows instant communication with
anyone in the world.
E. The largest platforms are Facebook, YouTube, WhatsApp, Instagram, and WeChat.
F. It started in the 1960s as a way to share information.
71. What invention do you like?
___________________________________________________________________________________
72. When did the Internet start?
___________________________________________________________________________________
73. When was the official birthday of the Internet?
___________________________________________________________________________________
74. Who was the inventor of the World Wide Web?
___________________________________________________________________________________
75. What are the benefits of the Internet?
___________________________________________________________________________________
XII. Write about the reasons why you agree or disagree that robots will soon replace teachers at
schools, using the cues provided.
Robots can help teachers in their work.
76. robots / repetitive tasks / like / collecting homework, marking papers / memorizing contents / so /
teachers / save / time and energy
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
77. teachers / use robots / help students / difficulties / their physical / mental health conditions
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
78. robots / seem / more efficient / teachers / because / they / give lessons / each student / teach
large classes
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
79. although / robots / detect technical problems / not realise / issues / speech difficulties or
recognise emotions
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
80. teachers / the unique ability / inspire children / learn / and / robots /not / share their life
experiences
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 UNIT 12.
LIFE ON OTHER PLANETS
A. Pronunciation
• Intonation for making lists
Read the following sentences, and insert the rising tone () or the failing tone () to show the
correct intonation.
1. The most famous scientists in astronomy are Galileo, Newton, Kepler, and Hawking.
2. The most common chemical elements in the human body are oxygen, carbon, hydrogen, and
nitrogen.
3. The Nobel Prize categories are physics, chemistry, medicine, literature, and peace.
4. Compulsory subjects at high school in Viet Nam are literature, mathematics, English, PE, and
history.
5. The biggest cities in Viet Nam are Ho Chi Minh City, Ha Noi, Hai Phong, Can Tho, Bien Hoa and Da
Nang.
6. The four main skills in studying English are reading, listening, writing, and speaking.

B. Vocabulary
• Outer space
I. Match each word / phrase with the definition and write the answer in each blank.
1. alien (n) ______ A. a large body in space that moves around the sun
2. spaceship (n) ______ B. Unidentified Flying Object
3. solar system (n) ______ C. having no weight, especially when travelling in space
4. galaxy (n) ______ D. a creature that comes from another planet
5. UFO ______ E. a large group of stars and planets in outer space
6. planet (n) ______ F. a vehicle in which people can travel in space
7. orbit (n) ______ G. a person who travels in a spaceship
8. satellite (n) ______ H. the sun and the planets that move around it
9. astronaut (n) ______ I. a man-made object that has been sent into space and that
moves around a planet
10. weightless (adj) ______ J. the path taken by something (a planet, a satellite, etc.) going
 round something else in space
II. Complete the sentences with the words given.
gravity trace creatures craters rocket probability
commander telescope aliens satellite Galaxy spaceships
1. He believes that ______________ visit the Earth in UFOs.
2. What is the ______________ of winning?
3. Mars’ ______________ is only about 38% of the Earth’s.
4. We try to fly to distant planets in futuristic ______________.
5. The troops will go into action as soon as their ______________ gives the order.
6. The film was about ______________ from the outer space.
7. There is no ______________ of the camp left.
8. Jupiter is the biggest planet in our solar system, but not the biggest planet in the ______________.
9. They launched a ______________ to the planet Venus.
10. The moon is a natural ______________ of the Earth.
11. With a good ______________, you can see ______________ on the moon.
III. Complete the sentences with the adjectives given.
special imaginary actual promising gravitational
living suitable unsuitable habitable intelligent
1. Water is essential to ______________ things.
2. Some areas of the country are just too cold to be ______________.
3. The equator is a(n) ______________ line around the middle of the Earth.
4. These roads are ______________ for use by heavy vehicles, so they can’t enter these roads.
5. A conference was planned, but finding a(n) ______________ location was difficult.
6. Firefighters use ______________ breathing equipment in smoky buildings.
7. They are searching for ______________ life forms in other solar systems.
8. Her school report described her as a very ______________ student.
9. The story of the film is based on ______________ events and people.
10. A black hole is matter so dense that nothing, not even light, can escape its ______________ pull.
IV. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs given.
travel destroy take over attack land
hold repair break down oppose support
1. She ______________ as manager two weeks ago.
2. You can ______________ a plane on water in an emergency.
3. Their car ______________ and they had to push it off the road.
4. The elderly ______________ free on public transport.
5. Most of the local residents ______________ to the closing of the school last month.
6. She asked if he could ______________ the broken lamp.
7. His starting salary as a new teacher wasn’t enough to ______________ a family.
8. She used to love cats, but one cat ______________ her and she doesn’t like them anymore.
9. In 1906, an earthquake ______________ much of San Francisco.
10. Can you ______________ the bag while I open the door?
V. Fill in each blank of the passage with the correct word below.
ocean life clouds system
difference conditions kind atmosphere
Can There be Life in the Environment of Titan?
Titan is Saturn’s largest moon and the second largest in the solar 1 ______________ (after Ganymede
of Jupiter). It is the only moon in the solar system with clouds and a dense, planet-like
2 3
______________. Scientists believe that ______________ on Titan are similar to Earth’s early
4
years. The main ______________ is that, because it is closer to the sun, Earth has always been
warmer. Titan’s atmosphere is very cold, from -200 degrees to -179 degrees Celsius!
5
In the atmosphere there are layers of ______________ composed of complex molecules such as
6
methane. There also may be a(n) ______________ of methane, or perhaps a liquid water layer
7
inside the moon. This type of environment, except for the cold, is the ______________ of
environment in which scientists think 8 ______________ began.
VI. Complete the conversation, using the words or phrases given below.
had marks on their faces came out wanted to run away
came up tome opened
Tony: Guess what just happened?
Sally: What?
Tony: I was walking down Ashley Road when I saw two lights. They were on a huge silver thing that
was blocking the street. Then a door 1 ______________ and a lot of men 2
______________. They
were wearing silver and 3 ______________. The tallest one 4 ______________ and said, ‘Why are you
here?’ I said, ‘I’m here because I live around here.’ But he asked me again, ‘Why are you here?’ I
5
______________, but the other ones blocked my path. The tall one said, “Send him away. There are
not many more streets left and we don’t have much time.”
Harry: To do what? Catch people like you? What’s this all about? Aliens?
Tony: Maybe. They’re still out there. Why don’t you check?
(A minute later)
Harry: Brilliant, Tony. Your aliens are people from the gas company, looking for a gas leak.
Tony: Got you!
Notes:
- leak (n) = lỗ thủng, khe hở
- (I) Got you! = Tôi hiểu bạn muốn nói gi!
VII. Fill in each blank in the following passage, using the words given below.
believe in nearest billion intelligent
Earth spaceship numbers ordinary universe
1 2
Our planet ______________ is revolving around the sun, which is a fairly small and
3
______________ star. There are about 250 ______________ stars in our galaxy, and billions of
4
galaxies in the ______________. In recent years, scientists have wondered about
the possibility of 5 ______________ life forms on the other planets.
Some scientists 6 ______________ that there may be large 7 ______________ of stars with their own
planets. It is almost impossible to reach the stars 8 ______________ the Milky Way galaxy. It would
take the fastest Earth 9 ______________ about 40,000 years to reach the 10 ______________ star.
VIII. Complete the sentences with the words below.
atmosphere black hole comet eclipse
gravity light year meteor orbit
satellite shooting star solar system space suit
SPACE - Q and A
Q: What’s a 1 _____________________?
A: It’s an arrangement of planets that are in 2 _____________________ around a star or sun.
Q: What’s a 3 _____________________?
A: It’s a place in space where 4 _____________________ is very strong. Not even light can escape.
Q: What’s a 5 _____________________?
A: It’s a big ball of ice and rock with a long tail. They travel around in space, but don’t usually crash
into planets.
Q: Is a 6 _____________________really a type of star?
A: No, it isn’t. When a 7 ________________ from space enters the Earth’s 8 _________________, it
bums very brightly.
Q: Is a 9 _____________________ comfortable?
A: Not exactly. It weighs 140 kilos and is difficult to put on. But if you’re working in space, for example
10
on a man-made _____________________ such as the International Space Station, you must wear
the suit to stay alive.
Q: What’s a 11 _____________________?
A: It’s the distance that light travels in one year: 9,460,800,000,000 kilometres.
Q: What happens during a solar 12 _____________________?
A: The moon passes between the sun and the Earth and blocks the sun’s light.
 Prepositions
IX. Complete each sentence with the correct preposition.
1. We are good friends ____________ Nam and Phong.
2. The teacher put me in charge ____________ organising the meeting.
3. These spaceships may send back data ____________ the outmost reaches of the solar system.
4. He was voted the most promising new actor ____________ his part in the film.
5. Do you have anything similar ____________ this material but cheaper?
6. The writer returned ____________ his hometown many years ago.
7. They were using animals ____________ scientific experiments.
8. In 1969, the first man landed ____________ the Moon.
9. They are considering the exploration ____________ Mars by robot.
10. The atmosphere protects us ____________ most the harmful ultraviolet radiation ____________
the Sun.

C. Grammar
• Reported speech (questions)
I. Choose the correct words.
I met a man in the city centre who asked me ...
1. whether I knew / know where Ben Thanh Market was.
2. if I have / had been there before.
3. what did I think / I thought of the city.
4. where did I come / I came from.
5. how much money I have got / had.
6. whether I want / wanted to buy a souvenir.
II. Read the questions. Choose the correct reported questions.
1. ‘Where did you go on holiday?’
A. He asked us where we did go on holiday.
B. He asked us where we went on holiday.
2. ‘Do you know about the Snowman?’
A. He asked me if I knew about the Snowman.
B. He asked me if I know about the Snowman.
3. ‘Will you set off early?’
A. She asked me would I set off early.
B. She asked me if I would set off early.
4. ‘Do you want a new laptop?’
A. My dad asked me did I want a new laptop.
B. My dad asked me if I wanted a new laptop.
5. ‘Can I borrow your calculator?’
A. Mai asked if she can borrow my calculator.
B. Mai asked if she could borrow my calculator.
6. ‘Where is the public library?’
A. They asked where the public library was.
B. They asked where was the public library.
7. ‘What can I do in the club?’
A. Nick asked me what he could do in the club.
B. Nick asked me what can he do in the club.
III. Write reported questions.
1. ‘When do you clean your shoes?’
 She asked him
2. ‘Where do you often go swimming?’
 She asked me
3. ‘What are you listening to?’
 We asked him
4. ‘What will you do with the prize money?’
 They asked us
5. ‘When will you get a new bicycle?’
 He asked me
6. ‘What sports do you play?’
 The doctor asked him
7. ‘Why are you in a hurry?’
 I asked my father
8. ‘Where did you park your car?’
 I asked her
IV. Change each of the questions into reported speech. Begin each one with the words given.
1. ‘Where is the principal’s office?’
 I didn’t know
2. ‘Where does Mr. Smith go?’
 We wanted to know
3. ‘Which file is the letter in?’
 The teacher asked me
4. ‘When is he leaving for the foreign trip?’
 No one seemed to know
5. ‘When will your father get back?’
 He asked me
6. ‘Where do you put the book?’
 I asked him
7. ‘What time are you coming back?’
 He didn’t tell me
8. ‘Where is it?’
 I didn’t have any idea
9. ‘What does this word mean?’
 I asked him
10. ‘How well does she speak English?’
 We wanted to know
V. Write the following sentences as reported questions, using the word given in brackets.
1. ‘What’s your name?’ he asked. (wanted to know)
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. ‘How old are you?’ she said. (asked)
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. ‘Who will you see at the meeting?’ my mother said. (asked)
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. ‘When does the train leave?’ I asked. (wanted to know)
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. ‘How do you get to school?’ she said. (asked)
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. ‘Why can’t you come to the party?’ she asked. (asked)
__________________________________________________________________________________
7. ‘Where do you live?’ the boy asked. (wanted to know)
__________________________________________________________________________________
8. ‘Who do you want to talk to at the meeting?’ she said. (asked)
__________________________________________________________________________________
9. ‘Why are you so late?’ the teacher said. (demanded to know)
__________________________________________________________________________________
10. ‘Why won’t you let me in the stadium?’ the man said to the guard. (wanted to know)
__________________________________________________________________________________
VI. Write these questions into reported speech, using wanted to know and the words given in
brackets.
Example: ‘Which book will you take?’ (he)
He wanted to know which book I would take.
1. ‘What are you doing?’ (he)
__________________________________________________________________________________
2. ‘How far do I have to walk?’ (she)
__________________________________________________________________________________
3. ‘What do you have to eat for lunch?’ (he)
__________________________________________________________________________________
4. ‘What time does the performance start?’ (he)
__________________________________________________________________________________
5. ‘How long does the journey take?’ (she)
__________________________________________________________________________________
6. ‘Where do you stay in Ho Chi Minh City?’ (my aunt)
__________________________________________________________________________________
7. ‘When do you start your Japanese class?’ (my mother)
__________________________________________________________________________________
8. ‘Where do you like to spend your holiday this year?’ (she)
__________________________________________________________________________________
9. ‘What nationality is Jack?’ (we)
__________________________________________________________________________________
10. ‘What are you wearing for the party tonight?’ (my sister)
__________________________________________________________________________________
VII. Complete the direct questions.
1. Can you tell me how old you are?
‘How ___________________________________________________________?’
2. Can you tell me how you made this cake?
‘How ___________________________________________________________?’
3. I’d like to know when you arrived.
‘When __________________________________________________________?’
4. I’d like to know when she’ll be ready.
‘When __________________________________________________________?’
5. Can you tell me what you’re doing?
‘What ___________________________________________________________?’
6. I was wondering if you’ve got a laptop.
‘Have ___________________________________________________________?’
VIII. Read the conversation between Mai and Dr. Nelson, and finish the following sentences.
Mai: When did the International Space Station start working, Dr. Nelson?
Dr. Nelson: An American astronaut and two Russian cosmonauts started working on the ISS on
November 2, 2000.
Mai: How many people have worked there?
Dr. Nelson: More than 220 people from more than a dozen countries have worked there.
Mai: How long and how heavy is the ISS?
Dr. Nelson: The station is 100 meters long and it weighs about 420 tons.
Mai: Is there anyone living on the space station all the time?
Dr. Nelson: There has always been a crew of three to six people on board all the time.
1. Mai asked Dr. Nelson _____________ the International Space Station _____________ working.
2. Dr. Nelson answered that an American astronaut and two Russian cosmonauts _____________
working on the ISS on November 2, 2000.
3. Mai wanted _____________ how many people _____________ there.
4. Dr. Nelson that _____________ more than 220 people from more than a dozen countries
_____________ there.
5. Mai asked how long and how heavy _____________.
6. Dr. Nelson said that the station _____________ 100 meters long and _____________ about 420
tons.
7. Mai asked _____________ there anyone _____________ living on the space station all the time.
8. Dr. Nelson told Mai that _____________ a crew of three to six people on board all the time.
IX. Rewrite the sentences in reported speech.
1. Nhi: Space offers unique pleasures including the view and zero gravity activities.
 Nhi said.
2. Duong: Space travel is risky and expensive.
 Duong thought that.
3. Mai: Will Enceladus provide a habitable environment for life?
 Mai asked.
4. Nick: When did the flyby - a flight of a spaceship near a planet - take place?
 Nick asked.
5. Mi: What do scientists discover from the photos of Saturn’s moon - Enceladus?
 Mi asked.

D. Reading
I. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Once a month, the moon travels in a complete circle 1 _____________ the earth. As it moves in its
circle, it 2 _____________ to change shape. This is because we, on Earth, 3 _____________ only that
section of the moon that catches the sun’s light
When the sun, the moon and the earth are in a straight line with the moon in the middle, it is
impossible for us to see the moon. At this point, the moon is said to be new. We are unable to see it
in this position because the side facing the 4 _____________ is in shadow. As the new moon begins to
5
circle the earth, however, we begin to see that part of its surface that catches the sun’s
_____________. After some days, when it reaches the position where the earth is 6 _____________
the sun and the moon, we see the lull moon. Later, it again 7 _____________ half moon, becoming
smaller and smaller until it disappears again to become the new moon. This cycle takes 28 days or a
lunar 8 _____________.
1. A. around B. under C. between D. through
2. A. looks B. wants C. seems D. takes
3. A. hear B. know C. see D. understand
4. A. sun B. earth C. moon D. sky
5. A. light B. energy C. heat D. movement
6. A. across B. between C. over D. after
7. A. sees B. goes C. gets D. becomes
8. A. week B. month C. fortnight D. year
II. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Why does Man want to go to other planets 1 _____________ the solar system? Just for adventure?
True, 2 _____________ is adventure in space travel. But a 3 _____________ to other planets would
4 5
also be _____________. For example, space stations could be built that would give us
_____________ information about the weather.
In space stations 6 _____________ around the earth, Man could live and Study the cloud formations
on 7 _____________ surface. These formations could tell US what weather to 8 _____________ in any
9
part of the world at any time. _____________ information would be useful to pilots, to ship
captains, and even to farmers 10 _____________ must set dates for planting and harvesting.
1. A. on B. in C. at D. of
2. A. there B. this C. that D. it
3. A. travel B. fly C. trip D. drive
4. A. practice B. practiced C. practicing D. practical
5. A. valuable B. wealthy C. expensive D. amused
6. A. moves B. moving C. moved D. moveable
7. A. his B. her C. its D. their
8. A. hope B. believe C. expect D. consider
9. A. These B. Those C. So D. Such
10. A. which B. who C. whom D. whose
III. Read the article about holidays on the moon. Match paragraphs A-D with the interview
questions 1-4.
1. Why isn’t tourist travel to the moon possible now? _______
2. How many people have walked on the moon? _______
3. When tourists get to the moon, what can they expect from a hotel? _______
4. When will there be a hotel on the moon? _______
Holiday on the Moon?
A People first visited the moon in 1969, when Neil Armstrong made ‘a giant leap for mankind’.
Between 1969 and 1972, a total of 12 men walked on the moon. After the moon landings, the
focus of space travel turned to making reusable spacecraft and building the International
Space Station.
B Construction has not yet begun, but some experts predict that there will be a hotel on the
moon in the next 50 years. Virgin Galactic is already planning tourist flights to orbit the Earth,
and may be able to touch down on the moon to deliver tourists one day.
C The big challenge is cost. Lots of people want to visit space, but at the moment, a ticket for
even a short journey is more than most normal people can afford. The other challenge is
training and fitness. Astronauts require at least six months of training to be prepared for the
physical effects of rocket travel. Most people don’t have the time to prepare.
D A company called Bigelow Aerospace has developed space stations that are inflatable, like
balloons. Each station could be used as a home-on-the-moon for up to 18 people. The rooms
wouldn’t be large, but they would have a great view of the Earth.
IV. Read the diary of British astronaut Tim Peake, and mark the sentences T (true), or F (false).
Correct the false sentences.

LIFE IN SPACE
‘What’s that light in the sky? Is it a star? Is it a planet? No, it’s the International Space Station, 400 km
above the Earth. I’m here on the space station for six months with five other astronauts from Russia,
the USA, Holland and Japan. We travel around the Earth sixteen times every day, at a speed of 27,724
km per hour.
I get up at six o’clock in the morning and I wash. Everything floats in space because of zero gravity,
including water. We have a special shampoo to wash our hair without water.
I get dressed in a T-shirt and shorts. We only use the space suits outside the space station. Outside,
the temperature changes a lot. It’s 100°C in the sun, but it’s -100°C in the dark. It’s 23°c inside the
space station, in winter and in summer.
We have breakfast at quarter to seven. All our food comes in tins and special bags and it isn’t very
nice. We don’t have pizzas on the space station. After breakfast, we do exercise for an hour. Our arms
and legs don’t do a lot of work on the space station because we float. We watch films in the gym. My
favorites are Russian comedies. They’re funny.
Then we start work. We do experiments and work on the computers. We have lunch at one o’clock. In
the afternoon, I make videos for science lessons in schools. I answer questions from students about
life in space. Before dinner we do another hour of exercise.
In the evening and at the weekend, we play games, chat or use the internet - we’ve got the internet in
space. On Sunday, we have a video chat with our families and friends.
We go to bed early. We sleep in sleeping bags, so we don’t float around the space station at night.
1. The astronauts are of different nationalities.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. The food they eat in space is popular.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. The writer likes Russian films.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. They do one hour of exercise every day.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. They have a video chat every evening.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. They go to bed late.
___________________________________________________________________________________
V. Read the text, and do the following tasks.
Out of This World
A 1 _______________ is an object that orbits another object in space. There are natural satellites like
2
the moon, which orbits the _______________, and there are also artificial satellites. Artificial
satellites are man-made objects which are sent into space. In 1957, the Soviet Union launched the
first artificial satellite, Sputnik 1, and there are about three thousand artificial satellites in orbit
around the Earth. We use them to transmit phone calls and TV signals across the world, to navigate
journeys, to forecast the weather, and to study the universe.
3
The largest artificial satellite in orbit is the International _______________ or ISS. The American
4
_______________ started taking material into space to build the ISS there in the late 1990s, and
different teams of researchers have lived there continuously since November 2000. The ISS was also
the destination of the world’s first space tourists. One of them, the Hungarian- American billionaire
Charles Simonyi, enjoyed the visit so much that he paid $35 million for a second trip. During his visits
to space, he helped with research projects and chatted to schoolchildren in the USA via a video link.
Space tourism will be more popular in the future, thanks to the development of sub-orbital
spacecraft. Travelling to altitudes of over one hundred kilometres, these craft reach the boundaries of
space, at the edge of the Earth’s atmosphere. From there, passengers get a breathtaking view of the
Earth, and can also experience 5 _______________. Prices started at $200,000 for a three-hour trip,
but flights will certainly become cheaper in the future. Scientists hope that the increase in space
tourism will help to raise money to fund further space projects.
Task 1. Complete the text with the words below.
Space Station weightlessness space shuttle Earth satellite
Task 2. Read the text again, and mark the sentences T (true), or F (false). Correct the false
sentences.
1. The Soviet Union put the first artificial satellite in orbit.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. Sputnik 1 was the first natural satellite.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Astronauts constructed the ISS in space.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. Teams of researchers have been living in ISS since 1990.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Charles Simonyi has been in only one trip into space.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. Sub-orbital spacecraft are spaceships which travel into space.
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. People can experience weightlessness on sub-orbital spacecraft.
___________________________________________________________________________________
8. Sub-orbital journeys can’t provide space tourists with the breathtaking view of the Earth from
space.
___________________________________________________________________________________
VI. Read the following passages, and decide if the sentences are T (True) or F (False). Correct the
false ones.
Passage 1
Robert Hammond was driving home one night with his wife Judy when their car suddenly stopped. He
turned the key but the car did not start. Judy looked at her watch. It was one minute before midnight
and there were no other cars on the road. They were discussing what to do when they saw a bright
light in the sky.
Robert opened the car door. Judy told him to stay in the car but he didn’t listen. She watched her
husband walk towards the light. He walked until he was under the light and stopped. Then suddenly
the light disappeared and it was dark. It was also silent again. At the same time, the car started again.
Judy looked at her watch again. It was still one minute to midnight. She waited for her husband but he
didn’t return. She called his name but there was no reply. Robert Hammond disappeared and his wife
Judy never saw him again.
Passage 2
Mary was studying late one night for her final exams when she fell asleep in front of her computer.
She started to have a really strange dream. She was wearing a white dress and she was lying on a bed.
She tried to move but she couldn’t. She looked up and saw two alien faces looking at her. They had
big grey heads with large black eyes.
Then another alien arrived. He was carrying a large machine. He put something over her mouth.
When Mary woke up, she was not in front of her computer. She was in her bed. Then she got up and
looked into the mirror. Her two front teeth were missing.
1. Robert and Judy were on a busy road. ____________
2. They saw a bright white light in the night sky. ____________
3. Robert got out of the car. ____________
4. Robert’s encounter lasted for twenty minutes. ____________
5. Mary went to bed because she was tired. ____________
6. In her dream, she saw three aliens. ____________
7. The aliens put something over her hand. ____________
8. Her mother woke her up the next morning. ____________
VII. Read the story, and match the sentence halves. Write the answer in each blank.
A New Home
The president of the planet Trojan was standing in front of her palace. She spoke to all the people.
“People of Trojan!” she said. “I have some bad news. Another planet is coming towards us. One
hundred years from now, the other planet is going to hit us and destroy us. There is nothing we can
do.”
The Trojan people were very frightened. The president said more.
“Don’t worry. We have a plan. We’re going to build spaceships - the biggest spaceships in the history
of universe. Each spaceship is going to carry 10,000 people - and we are going to build 20,000
spaceships! In this way, we can take every Trojan man, woman, and child to a safe place - before the
other planet hits us.”
The people asked, “Where? Where is this safe place?”
The president said, “There is another planet, very far from here. It is a planet where Trojan people can
live. The air is like our air; the water is like our water; and there is room for us. The name of this
planet is: Earth!”
The next day, the people of Trojan started to build the spaceships. It took them a very long time -
more than fifteen years - to build the first 1,000 spaceships. And after fifty years, 5,000 spaceships
were ready. And finally, all the 20,000 spaceships were ready. The spaceships were round, like huge
yellow footballs - so big that 10,000 Trojans could go inside each one.
Then, one day, the people of Trojan said goodbye to their home. They got into the spaceships. And,
one by one, the spaceships took off. And the Trojans began the journey to their new home.
20 years later, the spaceships landed on the planet Earth.
1. Another planet was going to ... ______ A. into each spaceship.
2. The Trojan people planned ... ______ B. 20,000 very big spaceships.
3. The Trojan people built... ______ C. hit the planet Trojan.
4. 10,000 Trojan people went... ______ D. on the planet Earth.
5. After twenty years, the Trojan people landed ... ______ E. to travel to Earth.
VIII. Read the passage and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F).

The International Space Station - the manned satellite - has constantly circled the Earth in low orbit up
to now. Since the first permanent crew moved in on 2 November 2000, 220 people representing 17
countries have come and gone. Most of those astronauts have been Americans on the space shuttle
flights to deliver the equipment, food and other supplies.
Russia has sent the second largest number of people, with Canada and Japan tied for third. At least
one American and one Russian have been on board at all times.
The ISS orbits 240 miles above the planet at 17,150 mph and can often be seen by the naked eye. The
complex has grown from three to 13 rooms and the current structure has a mass of nearly 450 tons.
More than 26,500 meals have been served, 1,760 experiments carried out and 189 spacewalks
undertaken, according to NASA. The 189 spacewalks have been undertaken to build and maintain the
space station.
The most important experiment, according to Commander Scott Kelly, was about keeping humans
alive in space.
NASA administrator, Charles Bolden, called the 15-year milestone in 2015 ‘a remarkable moment’. He
added, ‘It has taught us about what’s possible when tens of thousands of people across 15 countries
work together with the shared goals.’
1. The International Space Station started working on 2 November 2000. _____
2. People of different nationalities have worked on the ISS. _____
3. American astronauts flew on the space shuttles to bring supplies to the ISS. _____
4. The ISS orbits high above the Earth and can only be seen through telescopes. _____
5. The space station travels around the Earth at the speed of light. _____
6. The astronauts have to walk outside space to maintain the space station. _____
7. The most important experiment done by the ISS was about keeping humans lively in space. _____
8. The achievements of the ISS are to make thousands of people in many countries collaborate with
the same purposes. _____
IX. Read the passage, and do the tasks that follow.
The New Horizons - a NASA probe - went past Pluto in summer 2015. Pluto was discovered by Clyde
Tombaugh - an American astronomer - in 1930 as the ninth planet in the solar system. However, on
January 19, 2006, Pluto was regarded as a dwarf planet. In the solar system, there are the inner rocky
planets, such as the Earth, Mars, Venus and Mercury, and the outer gas giants, like Jupiter, Saturn,
Uranus, and Neptune. Pluto and its largest moon, Charon, belong to a third category known as “ice
dwarfs”. They have solid surfaces but, unlike the other planets, their mass is icy material.
The probe traveled more than 3.6 billion miles to take the photos. The new image shows a clear view
of Pluto’s surface, and it is covered with wide smooth areas, and mountains. Huge mountains are
made of water ice. Scientists hope that information from the New Horizons will prove that there
might be a lot of water on Pluto. Finding water on another world is important because water is
considered one of the key materials to life.
Besides Charon, Pluto has four other small moons: Styx, Nix, Kerberos, and Hydra.
The New Horizon’s mission makes the United States the first nation to send a space probe to every
planet from Mercury to Pluto.
Task 1. Read the passage again, and then answer the following questions.
1. When was Pluto discovered?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why was Pluto not considered a planet but a dwarf planet?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. How far did the New Horizons travel to take the photos of Pluto?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. Why do scientists hope that there might be a lot of water on Pluto?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Why was the mission to Pluto important to the United States?
___________________________________________________________________________________
Task 2. Match each underlined word in the text with the definition, writing the answer in each
blank.
1. probe ______ A. a scientist who studies universe
2. astronomer ______ B. a group of people or things that are similar to each other
3. dwarf ______ C. a small spacecraft with no one travelling in it
4. category ______ D. very important
5. key ______ E. someone or something that is smaller than the usual size

E. Speaking
• Everyday English
I. Choose the correct response. Then practise the short exchanges in pairs.
1. A: Can ordinary people become space B: a/ I think they need some training.
tourists? b/ Space travel takes a long period of time.
2. A: How would we live on the moon with high B: a/ Don’t worry about it.
temperatures in daytime? b/ We would live underground.
3. A: Some day the Earth will be attacked by B: a/ What are they like?
aliens. b/ It sounds like science fiction!
4. A: Can humans live on Mars? B: a/ Nearly impossible - no oxygen and water.
b/ Certainly - we find traces of water.
5. A: Do you believe in UFOs? B: a/ We need more evidence about them.
b/ There are many films about them.
6. A: Can we live on Mercury? B: a/ It’s so close to the sun and it’s too hot.
b/ Sure. It moves very fast around the sun.
7. A: We can live on Jupiter because he is the B: a/ I agree with you. It’s far from the Earth
God of thunder and lightning. b/ You’re kidding.
8. A: Jupiter is the father of Saturn, so Jupiter is B: a/ Well, it’s a good way to memorize.
bigger than Saturn. b/ Are they in the solar system?
9. A: Is Neil Armstrong the first to walk on the B: a/ Is Yuri Gagarin the first to orbit the Earth?
moon? b/ Right. He travelled on Apollo 11.
10. A: Have astronomers discovered any planets B: a/ Certainly. We have no information.
similar to Earth? b/ Yes, several planets in our galaxy.
• Talking about the conditions needed for planets to support human
life
II. Match the responses to the questions, and then practise the dialogue with your partner. There is
one extra response that you do not need.
A. The planet should have a circular orbit around the star for a long time.
B. There should be circulations of water and air to maintain life.
C. The planet has a similar size and mass to the Earth.
 D. The temperatures on the planet are not too low or too high so that water could exist in
liquid.
E. It should not be too close to a giant planet to avoid a shower of asteroids.
F. It must contain enough water liquid, air, and necessary compounds to create nutrients, such
as proteins and carbohydrates.
What Are the Factors that Make a Planet Habitable?
1. How about the temperatures on the planet?
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. Does the planet need any movement?
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. Are there any conditions for the surrounding stars and planets?
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. How can it support life?
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. How can it maintain life?
___________________________________________________________________________________

F. Writing
• Describe imaginary creatures living on another planet
I. Write the description of aliens using the words given below.
1. they / more than 8 feet tall / run 40 mph / live 800 years
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. they I speak / like a dog barking / learn English quite easily
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. they / have large blue eyes / small noses I tiny ears
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. their thumbs / small I four fingers / long and slender
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. they / wear metal jumpsuits / white motorcycle helmet
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. they / extremely intelligent / have very high information speed
___________________________________________________________________________________
7. they / all have white chalky complexion / called the ‘Tall White Aliens’
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
II. Write meaningful sentences about the appearance of aliens based on the words or phrases given,
using may /might.
1. aliens / small creatures / made of chitin / an insect skeletal protein
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
2. they / thick skin / minimize / evaporation I and / conserve water
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
3. they / 18 pairs / legs / sucker-like feet
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
4. they / be short creatures / thick legs / support / their bodies / against / strong gravity
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
5. they / absorb / oxygen I their skin
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
6. they / use antennas / collect information
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
7. they / intelligent robots / fly / through / air
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
8. they / look like / jellyfish / which / communicate / through flashes / light
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
 TEST (UNIT 12)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. gravity B. habitable C. alien D. galaxy
2. A. promising B. oppose C. rocket D. possibility
3. A. trace B. crater C. actual D. spaceship
4. A. telescope B. atmosphere C. promising D. oppose
5. A. creature B. bright C. crater D. attack
II. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others.
6. A. alien B. atmosphere C. adventure D. galaxy
7. A. exploration B. accommodate C. environment D. experience
8. A. forgetful B. wonderful C. beautiful D. waterless
9. A. sighting B. climate C. attempt D. system
10. A. astronaut B. Mercury C. Jupiter D. computer
III. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
11. An astronaut has to wear a spacesuit ____________ it may be very cold in space.
A. so B. but C. because D. because of
12. In the story, the spaceship comes into contact with a society of friendly ____________.
A. enemies B. aliens C. citizens D. foreigners
13. Scientists have been trying to find ____________ of aliens.
A. amounts B.records C. traces D. sights
14. There have been many UFO ____________ reported.
A. sights B. signs C. signals D. sightings
15. The unicorn - an imaginary horse with a horn in front of its head - is a mythical ____________.
A. animal B. person C. giant D. creature
16. In the mid-19th century, scientists discovered that Mars had some similarities ____________ Earth.
A. to B. with C. of D. from
17. Neptune is bright blue ____________ it is named after the Roman God of the sea.
A. because B. but C. so D. or
18. There is a lot of interest in doing experiments in the ____________ conditions.
A. weigh B. weighing C. weight D. weightless
19. Titan, one of Saturn’s ____________, has a thick atmosphere.
A. satellite B. spaceships C. moons D. comets
20. Scientists believe that Mars also ____________ seasons just as the Earth does.
A. spends B. experiences C. experiments D. takes
IV. Complete the sentences with the words given.
collect back from watch first
suits speed work transported understanding

Lunar Roving Vehicle

21
In the late 1960s, NASA began a series of missions to the moon. On the ____________ three
missions the astronauts explored on foot only a few hundred meters around then spacecraft, but on
the last three missions, they used a small electric car which allowed them to see and do much more
on their short visits.
22
The Lunar Roving Vehicle (LRV) was an electric car which had a top ____________ of 8 mph, and
23
allowed the astronauts to visit sites five miles away from their landing, and to ____________
24
samples from a much wider area to help scientists get a better ____________ of the moon’s
surface.
The LRV had to be 25 ____________ to the moon in the bottom part of the spacecraft. A camera was set
26
up in the LRV so that NASA could control remotely ____________ the Earth, allowing them to
27
____________ the astronauts as they explored the moon’s surface in the LRV.
28
NASA plans to go ____________ to the moon from the year 2022. This time they aim to explore
thousands of miles of the surface, staying for months at a time. Right now, NÁSA is working on new
ideas for moon cars in which astronauts can live and 29 ____________ for up to two weeks. They will be
able to sleep in the cab, and there is a separate compartment where they can put on the space
30
____________ to go exploring on foot.
V. Choose the correct form to complete the following sentences.
31. She asked me where was I /I was going.
32. I don’t know what is his name / his name is.
33. Ask him what time is it / it is.
34. He wants to know where she lives I does she live.
35. He asked me how much did my bike cost / my bike cost.
36. I don’t know where did he put / he put those magazines.
37. He asked me how old was I / I was.
38. He didn’t say where he was / was he going.
39. He asked me when I would / would I return.
40. I asked him what time could he / he could meet us.
VI. Change the following sentences into reported speech.
41. I said to the shopkeeper, ‘How much does this shirt cost?’
___________________________________________________________________________________
42. Mr. Vinh said to me, ‘Where are you going?’
___________________________________________________________________________________
43. Mary said, ‘What are you going to eat in the cafeteria?’
___________________________________________________________________________________
44. His uncle asked him, ‘Where are you going on your holiday?’
___________________________________________________________________________________
45. He said to me, ‘How are you today?’
___________________________________________________________________________________
46. She said to me, ‘When will you get back from your trip?’
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. He asked her, ‘What time is it?’
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. The tourist asked, ‘How long does it take to get to Ha Noi by car?’
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. He asked me, ‘How long have you studied English?’
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. I said to her, ‘What will you buy for your father’s birthday?’
___________________________________________________________________________________
VII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Long ago a lot of people 51 _______________ the moon was a god. Other people thought it was just a
light in the sky. And others thought it was a big 52 _______________ of cheese!
The telescopes were made, and men saw that the moon was really another world. They wondered
53
_______________ it was like. They dreamed of going there. On July 20, 1969, that dream came
54 55
_______________. Two American astronauts landed on the moon. _______________ names
were Neil Armstrong and Edwin Aldrin.
56
The first thing the men found was that the moon is covered _______________ dust. The dust is so
57
thick that the men left _______________ where they walked. Those were the first marks a living
58
thing had ever made on the moon. And they could _______________ there for years and years.
59
There is no wind or rain to wipe them off. The two men _______________ rocks to bring back to
Earth for study. They dug up dirt to bring back. They set up machines to find out things people wanted
to know. Then they were off on their long trip 60 _______________ the earth.
51. A. thought B. guessed C. told D. said
52. A. form B. stone C. ball D. round
53. A. how B. which C. that D. what
54. A. real B. true C. unreal D. untrue
55. A. Their B. His C. Its D. Theirs
56. A. by B. for C. to D. with
57. A. fingerprints B. footprints C. handprints D. prints
58. A. go B. remain C. put D. run
59. A. got up B. gave up C. picked up D. set up
60. A. back to B. from to C. into D. onto
VIII. Read the following passage carefully, then write True (T) or False (F) for each statement.
People have been talking about UFOs for ages. Millions of normal people keep saying that they were
caught and taken into UFOs.
The first case was in the 1950s when George Adamski said a UFO had taken him to the far side of the
moon. Another case took place in 1961, when an American couple, Betty and Barley Hill, were chased
by a UFO while they were driving home one night in New Hampshire. The couple stopped to observe
the UFO through binoculars. To escape from it, they took the back roads and arrived home two hours
later.
Fourteen years later, in 1975, one of the most shocking events happened in a small town in Arizona,
when a woodcutter called Travis Walton disappeared with a blue-green light from a flying saucer
under his teammates’ eyes. Five days later, the missing woodcutter returned home and said, T woke
up on the UFO and found myself among strangers with no hair and half-formed face. They put a mask
over my face, and I fell asleep again. 1 remembered nothing else until I awoke in the forest where I
had been caught.’
61. It was first claimed that someone had been taken away in a UFO in the middle of the 20 th century.
____
62. Betty and Barley Hill live in the USA. ____
63. Betty and Barley Hill were also taken away in a UFO. ____
64. Travis Walton was caught on the road. ____
65. The aliens wore the masks all the time while Travis was staying with them. ____
IX. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage.
A UFO (Unidentified Flying Object) is any object flying in the sky which cannot be identified by the
person who sees it. Sometimes the object is investigated. If people cannot figure out what the object
is after an investigation, it is called a UFO. If they figure out what the object is, it can no longer be
called a UFO because it has been identified.
Even though UFOs can be anything, people can use the word UFO when they are talking about alien
spacecraft. Flying saucer is another word that is often used to describe an identified flying object.
Studies estimate that 50-90% of all reported sightings are identified later. Usually 10-20% are never
identified. Studies also show that very few UFO sightings are hoaxes (people trying to trick other
people). Most UFOs are actually natural or man-made objects that looked strange. 80-90% of UFOs
are identified as one of three different things: (a) astronomical causes (for example: planets, stars, or
meteors); (b) aircraft; and (c) balloons. 10-20% of UFOs are other causes, such as birds, clouds,
mirages, searchlights, etc.
66. Another word used to describe a UFO is ____.
A. astronaut B. cooking plane C. spacecraft D. flying saucer
67. How many percent of all reported sights are not identified?
A. 10-20% B. 20-30% C. 30-50% D. 80-90%
68. Most UFOs are identified as one of the following things except.
A. balloons B. rains C. stars D. clouds
69. Which of the following sentences is NOT true?
A. UFO means Unidentified Flying Object.
B. UFO is often used to talk about alien objects.
C. Many UFO sightings are hoaxes.
D. Over half of all reported UFO sightings are identified.
70. What does the word “figure out” in paragraph 1 mean?
A. explain B. observe C. calculate D. require
X. Match the responses to the questions, and then practise the dialogue with your partner. There is
one extra response that you do not need.
A. It should hold an atmosphere.
B. It must rotate on its axis and move around the star.
C. It should contain liquid water and other compounds that are necessary for life.
D. It has a reasonable distance away from a star.
E. It must be with too much mass or too low in mass.
F. It doesn’t have a very low or very high mass.
What Are the Factors that Make a Planet Habitable?
71. How about the distance from the planet to the nearest star?
___________________________________________________________________________________
72. What about its mass?
___________________________________________________________________________________
73. How about its movement?
___________________________________________________________________________________
74. Does it need an atmosphere?
___________________________________________________________________________________
75. What should it have to support life?
___________________________________________________________________________________
XI. Write the description of aliens using the words given below.
I sometimes dream about meeting an alien from Mars. He looks very strange.
76. he / big eyes / and / a little bigger / more violent / a human being
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
77. his skin / black / no hair / his head / but / he / have / an antenna
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
78. he / wear / clothing / but / it / made of metal / very strong
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
79. he / look / really powerful / because / there / a lot of enemies / the Galaxy
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
80. he / love / peace / and / do everything / protect his planet
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
 REVIEW 4 (UNITS 10-11-12)
I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.
1. A. platform B. scanner C. advanced D. translation
2. A. invent B. machine C. fingerprint D. promising
3. A. telepathy B. telescope C. develop D. epidemic
4. A. creatures B. lens C. Mars D. marks
5. A. fingerprint B. truancy C. connection D. contact
II. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others.
6. A. telepathy B. community C. development D. scientific
7. A. incident B. terrorist C. adventure D. cultural
8. A. disease B. tablet C. buggy D. robot
9. A. unnatural B. impossible C. emotionless D. disrespectful
10. A. multimedia B. communication C. similarity D. possibility
III. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences.
11. Facebook was built on the ______________ of earlier social network sites like MySpace and Bebo.
A. succeed B. successful C. successfully D. success
12. It is thought that driverless cars will transform the way we move ______________ cities in the
future.
A. around B. away C. along D. ahead
13. Little Pascal ______________ a mechanical calculator which could do additions or subtractions
very quickly.
A. discovered B. found C. found out D. invented
14. Robots save workers from ______________ dangerous tasks.
A. making B. having C. performing D. carrying
15. Many people believe that robots have made workers jobless, ______________ that is not
necessarily true.
A. but B. and C. so D. or
16. The power is cut! What happens ______________ the cake?
A. on B. at C. to D. with
17. Teenagers spend most of their time playing computer games; ______________, they lose their
interests in daily activities.
A. moreover B. so C. however D. as a result
18. Science and technology have ______________ the life safe, secure and comfortable.
A. transformed B. made C. done D. changed
19. Terrorists are using modem technology ______________ their destructive work.
A. about B. at C. for D. with
20. With the advance of science and technology, our life changes greatly in various ______________.
A. scenes B. fields C. sights D. regions
IV. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following
passage.
Eye Contact
Eye contact is an important type of 21 ______________ communication. The way you look at someone
can 22 ______________ many things, including interest, affection, hostility, or attraction. Eye contact is
also important in 23 ______________ the flow of conversation.
Eye contact will be more continuous 24 ______________ a person is trying to listen to you. Looking at
25
a person can be an indication of ______________. People who are interested in someone show
26
______________ eye contact and lean forward toward the other person in the conversation.
27
______________ eye contact with another person can be 28 ______________ to show respect.
21. A. verbal B. non-verbal C. oral D. online
22. A. mean B. bring C. transmit D. communicate
23. A. maintaining B. stopping C. preventing D. increasing
24. A. although B. because C. unless D. if
25. A. attract B. attracted C. attractive D. attraction
26. A. high B. strong C. weak D. deep
27. A. Taking B. Doing C. Making D. Bringing
28. A. use B. used C. using D. to use
V. Read the text and do the tasks that follow.
If you think of the jobs robots could never do, you would probably put doctors and teachers at the top
of the list. It’s easy to imagine robot cleaners and factory workers, but some jobs need human
connection and creativity. But are we underestimating what robots can do? In some cases, they
already perform better than doctors at diagnosing illness. Also, some patients might feel more
comfortable sharing personal information with a machine than a person. Could there be a place for
robots in education after all?
British education expert Anthony Seldon thinks so. And he even has a date for the robot takeover of
the classroom: 2037. He predicts robots will do the main job of transferring information and teachers
will be like assistants. Intelligent robots will read students’ faces, movements and maybe even brain
signals. Then they will adapt the information to each student. It’s not a popular opinion and it’s
unlikely robots will even have empathy and the ability to connect with humans like another human
can.
One thing is certain, though. A robot teacher is better than no teacher at all. In some parts of the
world, there aren’t enough teachers and 9-16% of children under the age of 14 don’t go to school.
That problem could be partly solved by robots because they can teach anywhere and won’t get
stressed, or tired, or move somewhere for an easier, higher-paid job.
Those negative aspects of teaching are something everyone agrees on. Teachers all over the world are
leaving because it is a difficult job, and they feel overworked. Perhaps the question is not ‘Will robots
replace teachers?’ but ‘How can robots help teachers?’ Office workers can use software to do things
like organise and answer emails, arrange meetings and update calendars. Teachers waste a lot of time
doing non-teaching work, including more than 11 hours a week marking homework. If robots could
cut the time teachers marking homework and write reports, teachers would have more time and
energy for the parts of the job humans do best.
Task 1. Read the text, and mark the sentences true (T) or false (F).
29. Some jobs seem as if they can be done by robots or computers. ____
30. Robots are always better at diagnosing illnesses than doctors. ____
31. Many experts agree robots will replace teachers by 2037. ____
32. One advantage of robot teachers is that they don’t need to rest. ____
33. Robot assistant could help teachers by marking homework and writing reports. ____
34. Some teachers use robots to reduce their time answering emails and marking homework. ____
Task 2. Choose the correct answers.
35. It’s easy to think robot doctors ____________.
A. will replace people even if we don’t like the idea
B. are more capable than people and it’s true
C. can do less than people but it’s not always true
36. Anthony Seldon thinks teachers in the future will ____________.
A. help robots in class
B. teach knowledge to students
C. no longer exist
37. Robots will probably never ____________.
A. have human understanding of emotions
B. be a popular choice for teachers
C. be intelligent enough to work in education
38. Some parts of the world ____________.
A. pay robots to teach
B. already use robots in teaching jobs
C. have a shortage of teachers
39. Teachers ____________.
A. work harder than office workers
B. have less help than office workers
C. leave their jobs to become office workers
40. Robots could ____________.
A. empathise with students
B. mark homework
C. prepare lessons
VI. Rearrange the sentences in order to make a meaningful conversation, writing the number (41-
45) in each blank. Then practise it with your classmate.
__0__ 0. Mai: Will we be using telepathy as the main type of communication in the 21 sl century, Nick?
_____ A. Mai: What does community media mean?
_____ B. Mai: Communication in the form of electronic signals. Right! Picking up ideas and
transmitting them to another brain will be as easy as storing them on the Net.
_____ C. Nick: I think so. Telepathy sounds like out of Hollywood, but it is certainly possible.
Communication is understood to be electrical signals rather than words.
_____ D. Nick: Community media is a system by which people can access various communities of
people. Virtual cafes allow people to meet others in virtual environments at any time.
_____ E. Nick: Yes, that’s right. Transmitting ideas through telepathy will become faster. And I think
social media will be developing into community media.
VII. VII. Write meaningful sentences about the appearance of aliens based on the words or phrases
given, using may/might
46. aliens / a hard container / the brain
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
47. they I two eyes / a nose I a mouth / us
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
48. their eyes I bug-eyed I and I the nose I not I in the middle of the face
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
49. they / two arms / but / arms / suckers / pick up small objects
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
50. their hand / only three or four fingers
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________